Methods of stapling tissue

ABSTRACT

A method of stapling tissue is disclosed. The method can include obtaining a staple cartridge including a plurality of staples, wherein each staple has a base and a leg extending from the base. The stapling method can also include firing the staples from the staple cartridge, wherein the staples are fired into tissue in a staple line. The staple line can include a first portion having a first flexibility and a second portion having a second flexibility, wherein the second flexibility is different than the first flexibility. A method of stapling tissue can also include adapting an anvil with an anvil plate having an arrangement of staple-forming pockets that differs from the staple-forming pockets in the anvil.

CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION

This application is a continuation application that claims priorityunder 35 U.S.C. § 120 to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,953,filed Dec. 21, 2016, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.2018/0168637, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated byreference herein.

BACKGROUND

The present invention relates to surgical instruments and, in variousarrangements, to surgical stapling and cutting instruments and staplecartridges for use therewith that are designed to staple and cut tissue.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Various features of the embodiments described herein, together withadvantages thereof, may be understood in accordance with the followingdescription taken in conjunction with the accompanying drawings asfollows:

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of an interchangeable surgical toolassembly embodiment operably coupled to a handle assembly embodiment;

FIG. 2 is an exploded assembly view of portions of the handle assemblyand interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 1;

FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a distal portion of the interchangeablesurgical tool assembly embodiment depicted in FIGS. 1 and 2 withportions thereof omitted for clarity;

FIG. 4 is an exploded assembly view of a distal portion of theinterchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 1;

FIG. 5 is a partial cross-sectional perspective view of a proximalportion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 1;

FIG. 6 is an exploded assembly view of the proximal portion of theinterchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 5;

FIG. 7 is a partial exploded assembly view of a portion of a spineassembly embodiment of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly ofFIG. 1;

FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional end view of the proximal portion ofthe interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 5 with a clutchassembly thereof shown in an articulation mode;

FIG. 9 is another partial cross-sectional end view of the proximalportion of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 5 with theclutch assembly thereof shown in a firing mode;

FIG. 10 is a partial side view of the proximal portion of theinterchangeable surgical tool assembly of FIG. 1 with a clutch assemblythereof shown in the articulation mode;

FIG. 11 is a partial side view of a portion of the interchangeablesurgical tool assembly of FIG. 1 with the clutch assembly thereof shownin the firing mode;

FIG. 12A is a partial side cross-sectional view of the interchangeablesurgical tool assembly of FIG. 1 with a closure stroke reductionassembly embodiment in a retracted orientation corresponding to thearticulation mode;

FIG. 12B is a partial side cross-sectional view of the interchangeablesurgical tool assembly of FIG. 12A with the closure stroke reductionassembly embodiment in an extended orientation corresponding to thefiring mode;

FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a portion of the interchangeablesurgical tool assembly of FIG. 12A showing the closure stroke reductionassembly embodiment in the retracted orientation corresponding to thearticulation mode;

FIG. 14 is a perspective view of a portion of the interchangeablesurgical tool assembly of FIG. 12B showing the closure stroke reductionassembly embodiment in the extended orientation corresponding to thefiring mode;

FIG. 15A is a side elevational view of a portion of a surgical endeffector embodiment with the jaws thereof in a fully closed orientation;

FIG. 15B is another side elevational view of the surgical end effectorembodiment of FIG. 15A with the jaws thereof in a fully openorientation;

FIG. 16 is a perspective view of a distal closure member embodiment withpositive jaw opening features;

FIG. 17 is a perspective view of a portion of a surgical end effectorembodiment that is configured to be used in connection with the distalclosure member of FIG. 16;

FIG. 18 is a side elevational view of portions of the surgical endeffector of FIG. 17 with jaws thereof in a fully closed position and thedistal closure member of FIG. 16 shown in cross-section;

FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional side view of the surgical end effector anddistal closure member of FIG. 18 with the jaws thereof in the fullyclosed position;

FIG. 20 is another cross-sectional side view of the surgical endeffector and distal closure member of FIG. 18 with the jaws thereof inthe fully open position;

FIG. 21 is a side view of the surgical end effector and distal closuremember of FIG. 18 with the jaws thereof in the fully open position;

FIG. 22 is a perspective view of a portion of another surgical endeffector embodiment with the anvil omitted for clarity that employs apositive jaw opening spring;

FIG. 23 is perspective view the positive jaw opening spring of FIG. 22;

FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional side view of the surgical end effector ofFIG. 22 with jaws thereof in a fully open position;

FIG. 25 is another cross-sectional side view of the surgical endeffector of FIG. 22 with jaws thereof in a fully closed position;

FIG. 26 is a side view of a portion of another surgical end effectorembodiment and a distal closure member embodiment with the jaws of thesurgical end effector in a fully open position;

FIG. 27 is another side view of the surgical end effector and distalclosure member of FIG. 26 at the beginning of a jaw closure sequence;

FIG. 28 is another side view of the surgical end effector and distalclosure member of FIG. 26 during the jaw closure sequence;

FIG. 29 is another side view of the surgical end effector and distalclosure member of FIG. 26 with the jaws thereof in a fully closedposition;

FIG. 30 is a perspective view of a firing member embodiment;

FIG. 31 is a side elevational view of the firing member of FIG. 30;

FIG. 32 is a front view of the firing member of FIG. 30;

FIG. 33 is a perspective view of the firing member of FIG. 30 inrelation to a sled assembly embodiment and a firing member lockembodiment;

FIG. 33A is a top view of a staple driver embodiment;

FIG. 33B is a top perspective view of the staple driver embodiment ofFIG. 33A;

FIG. 33C is a bottom perspective view of the staple driver embodiment ofFIGS. 33A and 33B;

FIG. 34 is a bottom perspective view of the firing member lock of FIG.33;

FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional side elevational view of a portion of asurgical end effector embodiment with jaws thereof in a fully openorientation and the firing member lock of FIG. 33 in an unlockedorientation;

FIG. 36 is another cross-sectional side elevational view of the surgicalend effector of FIG. 35 with an unspent surgical staple cartridgesupported in one of the jaws and retaining the firing member lock in theunlocked orientation;

FIG. 37 is another cross-sectional side elevational view of the surgicalend effector of FIG. 36 after a firing sequence has been commenced;

FIG. 38 is another cross-sectional side elevational view of the surgicalend effector of FIG. 36 as the firing member is being retracted back toa starting position;

FIG. 39 is a top cross-sectional view of the firing member and firingmember lock in the position shown in FIG. 38;

FIG. 40 is another cross-sectional side elevational view of the surgicalend effector of FIG. 36 after the firing member has been retracted backto the starting position;

FIG. 41 a top cross-sectional view of the firing member and firingmember lock in the position shown in FIG. 40;

FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional side elevational view of a portion ofanother surgical end effector embodiment with jaws thereof in a fullyopen orientation and another firing member lock embodiment of FIG. 33 ina locked orientation;

FIG. 43 is a left side perspective view of portions of another surgicalend effector embodiment and distal closure member embodiment with jawsof the surgical end effector in a fully open position and supporting asurgical staple cartridge therein with expandable tissue stops in afully expanded orientation;

FIG. 44 is a right side perspective view of the surgical end effector ofFIG. 43;

FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of one of the jaws and thesurgical staple cartridge of FIGS. 43 and 44;

FIG. 46 is a perspective view of a stop spring of one of the expandabletissue stops of FIG. 43;

FIG. 47 is a partial cross-sectional end view of the surgical endeffector of FIGS. 42 and 43 with the jaws thereof in the fully openorientation and the expandable tissue stops thereof in their fullyexpanded orientations;

FIG. 48 is a top view of a portion of the surgical staple cartridge ofFIGS. 42 and 43;

FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional side view of the surgical end effector ofFIGS. 43 and 44 with the jaws thereof in the fully closed position;

FIG. 50 is another cross-sectional side view of the surgical endeffector of FIGS. 43 and 44 with the jaws thereof in the fully openposition;

FIG. 51 is a partial cross-sectional end view of another surgical endeffector embodiment with the jaws thereof in a fully open orientation;

FIG. 52 is a side elevational view of a portion of the surgical endeffector of FIG. 51 with the jaws thereof in a fully open orientation;

FIG. 53 is another side elevational view of a portion of the surgicalend effector of FIG. 51 with the jaws thereof in a fully closedorientation;

FIG. 54 is a perspective view of a staple cartridge body having aplurality of staple cavities defined therein;

FIG. 55 is a partial perspective bottom view of the staple cartridgebody of FIG. 54;

FIG. 56 is a top plan view of the staple cartridge body of FIG. 54 anddepicting a cutting element positioned in a longitudinal slot of thecartridge body;

FIG. 57 is a bottom plan view of the staple cartridge body of FIG. 54and depicting drivers positioned in the staple cavities;

FIG. 58 is a staple line implanted in stapled tissue and generated bythe staple cartridge body of FIG. 54 and depicting certain staples thatare likely to be missing from the staple line with phantom lines;

FIG. 59 is a side elevation view of a staple in the staple line of FIG.58;

FIG. 60 is a side elevation view of a staple;

FIG. 61 is a bottom plan view of a staple cartridge body having aplurality of staple cavities defined therein and depicting driverspositioned in the staple cavities;

FIG. 62 is a perspective view of the drivers in the proximal staplecavities of FIG. 57;

FIG. 63 is a side elevation view of the drivers of FIG. 62 and depictingan offset ramped surface with a phantom line;

FIG. 64 is a plan view of the drivers of FIG. 62;

FIG. 65 is a front elevation view of the drivers of FIG. 62;

FIG. 66 is a plan view of the drivers in the proximal staple cavities ofthe staple cartridge body of FIG. 61;

FIG. 67 is a front elevation view of the drivers of FIG. 66;

FIG. 68 is a top plan view of a staple cartridge body having a pluralityof staple cavities defined therein;

FIG. 69 is a bottom plan view of the staple cartridge body of FIG. 68and depicting drivers positioned in the staple cavities;

FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the drivers in the proximal staplecavities of FIG. 69;

FIG. 71 is a front elevation view of the drivers of FIG. 70;

FIG. 72 is a plan view of the drivers of FIG. 70;

FIG. 73 is a side elevation view of the drivers of FIG. 70 and depictingan offset ramped surface with a phantom line;

FIG. 74 is a top plan view of a staple cartridge body having a pluralityof staple cavities defined therein;

FIG. 75 is a bottom plan view of the staple cartridge body of FIG. 74and depicting drivers positioned in the staple cavities;

FIG. 76 is a plan view of a portion of a staple cartridge body having aplurality of angularly-oriented staple cavities defined therein anddepicting staples in the staple cavities;

FIG. 77 is a plan view of a portion of a staple cartridge body having aplurality of angularly-oriented staple cavities defined therein anddepicting staples in the staple cavities;

FIG. 78 is a plan view of a portion of a staple cartridge body having aplurality of angularly-oriented staple cavities defined therein anddepicting staples in the staple cavities;

FIG. 79 is a plan view of a portion of a staple cartridge body having aplurality of angularly-oriented staple cavities defined therein anddepicting staples in the staple cavities;

FIG. 80 is a plan view of a portion of a staple cartridge body having aplurality of angularly-oriented staple cavities defined therein anddepicting staples in the staple cavities;

FIG. 81 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 82 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 81;

FIGS. 83-84C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 82;

FIG. 85 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 86 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 85;

FIGS. 87-88C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 86;

FIG. 89 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 90 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 89;

FIGS. 91-92C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 90;

FIG. 93 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 94 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 93;

FIGS. 95-96C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 94;

FIG. 97 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 98 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 97;

FIGS. 99-100C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 98;

FIG. 101 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 102 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 101;

FIGS. 103-104C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 102;

FIG. 105 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 106 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 105;

FIGS. 107-108C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 106;

FIG. 109 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 110 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 109;

FIGS. 111-112C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 110;

FIG. 113 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 114 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 113;

FIGS. 115-116C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 114;

FIG. 117 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 118 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 117;

FIGS. 119-120C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 118;

FIG. 121 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein;

FIG. 122 is a detail view of a pocket of FIG. 121;

FIGS. 123-125C are cross-sectional views of the pocket of FIG. 122;

FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of an end effector and anadaptor assembly;

FIG. 127 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a portion of the endeffector and the adaptor assembly of FIG. 126;

FIG. 128 is a cross-sectional perspective view of a portion of the endeffector of FIG. 126 and an adaptor assembly; and

FIG. 129 is a plan view of a portion of an anvil having a plurality ofstaple-forming pockets defined therein.

Corresponding reference characters indicate corresponding partsthroughout the several views. The exemplifications set out hereinillustrate various embodiments of the invention, in one form, and suchexemplifications are not to be construed as limiting the scope of theinvention in any manner.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. PatentApplications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entireties:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,185, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENTS AND REPLACEABLE TOOL ASSEMBLIES THEREOF,        now U.S. Pat. No. 10,639,035;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,230, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168649;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,221, entitled LOCKOUT        ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL END EFFECTORS, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168646;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,209, entitled SURGICAL        END EFFECTORS AND FIRING MEMBERS THEREOF, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,588,632;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,198, entitled LOCKOUT        ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL END EFFECTORS AND REPLACEABLE TOOL        ASSEMBLIES, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,610,224; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,240, entitled SURGICAL        END EFFECTORS AND ADAPTABLE FIRING MEMBERS THEREFOR, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168651.

Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. PatentApplications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entireties:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,939, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGES AND ARRANGEMENTS OF STAPLES AND STAPLE CAVITIES        THEREIN, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168629;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,941, entitled SURGICAL        TOOL ASSEMBLIES WITH CLUTCHING ARRANGEMENTS FOR SHIFTING BETWEEN        CLOSURE SYSTEMS WITH CLOSURE STROKE REDUCTION FEATURES AND        ARTICULATION AND FIRING SYSTEMS, now U.S. Patent Application        Publication No. 2018/0168630;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,943, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENTS AND STAPLE-FORMING ANVILS, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168631;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,950, entitled SURGICAL        TOOL ASSEMBLIES WITH CLOSURE STROKE REDUCTION FEATURES, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,588,630;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,945, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGES AND ARRANGEMENTS OF STAPLES AND STAPLE CAVITIES        THEREIN, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168632;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,946, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENTS AND STAPLE-FORMING ANVILS, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168633;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,951, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH JAW OPENING FEATURES FOR INCREASING A JAW        OPENING DISTANCE, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,568,626;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,954, entitled FIRING        MEMBERS WITH NON-PARALLEL JAW ENGAGEMENT FEATURES FOR SURGICAL        END EFFECTORS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,624,635;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,955, entitled SURGICAL        END EFFECTORS WITH EXPANDABLE TISSUE STOP ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168639;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,948, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENTS AND STAPLE-FORMING ANVILS, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168584;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,956, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH POSITIVE JAW OPENING FEATURES, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,588,631;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,958, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR PREVENTING FIRING        SYSTEM ACTUATION UNLESS AN UNSPENT STAPLE CARTRIDGE IS PRESENT,        now U.S. Pat. No. 10,639,034; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,947, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGES AND ARRANGEMENTS OF STAPLES AND STAPLE CAVITIES        THEREIN, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,568,625.

Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. PatentApplications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entireties:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,896, entitled METHOD FOR        RESETTING A FUSE OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SHAFT, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168597;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,898, entitled STAPLE        FORMING POCKET ARRANGEMENT TO ACCOMMODATE DIFFERENT TYPES OF        STAPLES, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,537,325;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,899 entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT COMPRISING IMPROVED JAW CONTROL, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168600;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,901, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGE AND STAPLE CARTRIDGE CHANNEL COMPRISING WINDOWS        DEFINED THEREIN, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168602;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,902, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A CUTTING MEMBER, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168603;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,904, entitled STAPLE        FIRING MEMBER COMPRISING A MISSING CARTRIDGE AND/OR SPENT        CARTRIDGE LOCKOUT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168605;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,905, entitled FIRING        ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A LOCKOUT, now U.S. Patent Application        Publication No. 2018/0168606;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,907, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT SYSTEM COMPRISING AN END EFFECTOR LOCKOUT AND A        FIRING ASSEMBLY LOCKOUT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication        No. 2018/0168608;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,908, entitled FIRING        ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A FUSE, now U.S. Patent Application        Publication No. 2018/0168609; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,909, entitled FIRING        ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A MULTIPLE FAILED-STATE FUSE, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168610.

Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. PatentApplications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entireties:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,920, entitled STAPLE        FORMING POCKET ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,499,914;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,913, entitled ANVIL        ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL STAPLERS, now U.S. Patent Application        Publication No. 2018/0168614;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,914, entitled METHOD OF        DEFORMING STAPLES FROM TWO DIFFERENT TYPES OF STAPLE CARTRIDGES        WITH THE SAME SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168615;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,893, entitled        BILATERALLY ASYMMETRIC STAPLE FORMING POCKET PAIRS, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168594;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,929, entitled CLOSURE        MEMBERS WITH CAM SURFACE ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS        WITH SEPARATE AND DISTINCT CLOSURE AND FIRING SYSTEMS, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168626;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,911, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLERS WITH INDEPENDENTLY ACTUATABLE CLOSING AND FIRING        SYSTEMS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,448,950;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,927, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH SMART STAPLE CARTRIDGES, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No 2018/0168625;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,917, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGE COMPRISING STAPLES WITH DIFFERENT CLAMPING BREADTHS,        now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168617;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,900, entitled STAPLE        FORMING POCKET ARRANGEMENTS COMPRISING PRIMARY SIDEWALLS AND        POCKET SIDEWALLS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168601;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,931, entitled        NO-CARTRIDGE AND SPENT CARTRIDGE LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR        SURGICAL STAPLERS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168627;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,915, entitled FIRING        MEMBER PIN ANGLE, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168616;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,897, entitled STAPLE        FORMING POCKET ARRANGEMENTS COMPRISING ZONED FORMING SURFACE        GROOVES, now U.S.

Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168598;

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,922, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT WITH MULTIPLE FAILURE RESPONSE MODES, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,426,471;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,924, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT WITH PRIMARY AND SAFETY PROCESSORS, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168624;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,912, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH JAWS THAT ARE PIVOTABLE ABOUT A FIXED AXIS AND        INCLUDE SEPARATE AND DISTINCT CLOSURE AND FIRING SYSTEMS, now        U.S. Pat. No. 10,568,624;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,910, entitled ANVIL        HAVING A KNIFE SLOT WIDTH, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,485,543;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,903, entitled CLOSURE        MEMBER ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,617,414; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,906, entitled FIRING        MEMBER PIN CONFIGURATIONS, now U.S. Patent Application        Publication No. 2018/0168607.

Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. PatentApplications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entireties:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,188, entitled STEPPED        STAPLE CARTRIDGE WITH ASYMMETRICAL STAPLES, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,537,324;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,192, entitled STEPPED        STAPLE CARTRIDGE WITH TISSUE RETENTION AND GAP SETTING FEATURES,        now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168643;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,206, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGE WITH DEFORMABLE DRIVER RETENTION FEATURES, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168586;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,226, entitled DURABILITY        FEATURES FOR END EFFECTORS AND FIRING ASSEMBLIES OF SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication        No. 2018/0168648;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,222, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENTS HAVING END EFFECTORS WITH POSITIVE OPENING        FEATURES, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168647; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/386,236, entitled CONNECTION        PORTIONS FOR DISPOSABLE LOADING UNITS FOR SURGICAL STAPLING        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168650.

Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. PatentApplications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entireties:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,887, entitled METHOD FOR        ATTACHING A SHAFT ASSEMBLY TO A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT AND,        ALTERNATIVELY, TO A SURGICAL ROBOT, now U.S. Patent Application        Publication No. 2018/0168589;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,889, entitled SHAFT        ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A MANUALLY-OPERABLE RETRACTION SYSTEM FOR        USE WITH A MOTORIZED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168590;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,890, entitled SHAFT        ASSEMBLY COMPRISING SEPARATELY ACTUATABLE AND RETRACTABLE        SYSTEMS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168591;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,891, entitled SHAFT        ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A CLUTCH CONFIGURED TO ADAPT THE OUTPUT OF A        ROTARY FIRING MEMBER TO TWO DIFFERENT SYSTEMS, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168592;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,892, entitled SURGICAL        SYSTEM COMPRISING A FIRING MEMBER ROTATABLE INTO AN ARTICULATION        STATE TO ARTICULATE AN END EFFECTOR OF THE SURGICAL SYSTEM, now        U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2018/0168593;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,894, entitled SHAFT        ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A LOCKOUT, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,492,785; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,895, entitled SHAFT        ASSEMBLY COMPRISING FIRST AND SECOND ARTICULATION LOCKOUTS, now        U.S. Pat. No. 10,542,982.

Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. PatentApplications that were filed on Dec. 21, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entireties:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,916, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEMS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168575;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,918, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEMS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168618;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,919, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEMS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168619;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,921, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLE CARTRIDGE WITH MOVABLE CAMMING MEMBER CONFIGURED TO        DISENGAGE FIRING MEMBER LOCKOUT FEATURES, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168621;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,923, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEMS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168623;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,925, entitled JAW        ACTUATED LOCK ARRANGEMENTS FOR PREVENTING ADVANCEMENT OF A        FIRING MEMBER IN A SURGICAL END EFFECTOR UNLESS AN UNFIRED        CARTRIDGE IS INSTALLED IN THE END EFFECTOR, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,517,595;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,926, entitled AXIALLY        MOVABLE CLOSURE SYSTEM ARRANGEMENTS FOR APPLYING CLOSURE MOTIONS        TO JAWS OF SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application        Publication No. 2018/0168577;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,928, entitled PROTECTIVE        COVER ARRANGEMENTS FOR A JOINT INTERFACE BETWEEN A MOVABLE JAW        AND ACTUATOR SHAFT OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168578;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,930, entitled SURGICAL        END EFFECTOR WITH TWO SEPARATE COOPERATING OPENING FEATURES FOR        OPENING AND CLOSING END EFFECTOR JAWS, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2018/0168579;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,932, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL END EFFECTOR WITH ASYMMETRIC SHAFT        ARRANGEMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2018/0168628;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,933, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH INDEPENDENT PIVOTABLE        LINKAGE DISTAL OF AN ARTICULATION LOCK, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,603,036;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,934, entitled        ARTICULATION LOCK ARRANGEMENTS FOR LOCKING AN END EFFECTOR IN AN        ARTICULATED POSITION IN RESPONSE TO ACTUATION OF A JAW CLOSURE        SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,582,928;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,935, entitled LATERALLY        ACTUATABLE ARTICULATION LOCK ARRANGEMENTS FOR LOCKING AN END        EFFECTOR OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT IN AN ARTICULATED        CONFIGURATION, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        10,524,789; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/385,936, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH ARTICULATION STROKE        AMPLIFICATION FEATURES, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,517,596.

Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. PatentApplications that were filed on Jun. 24, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entireties:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,775, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGE COMPRISING WIRE STAPLES AND STAMPED STAPLES, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0367695;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,807, entitled STAPLING        SYSTEM FOR USE WITH WIRE STAPLES AND STAMPED STAPLES, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0367696;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,834, entitled STAMPED        STAPLES AND STAPLE CARTRIDGES USING THE SAME, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,542,979;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,788, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGE COMPRISING OVERDRIVEN STAPLES, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2017/0367698; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/191,818, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGE COMPRISING OFFSET LONGITUDINAL STAPLE ROWS, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0367697.

Applicant of the present application owns the following U.S. PatentApplications that were filed on Jun. 24, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entireties:

-   -   U.S. Design patent application Ser. No. 29/569,218, entitled        SURGICAL FASTENER, now U.S. Pat. No. D826,405;    -   U.S. Design patent application Ser. No. 29/569,227, entitled        SURGICAL FASTENER, now U.S. Pat. No. D822,206;    -   U.S. Design patent application Ser. No. 29/569,259, entitled        SURGICAL FASTENER CARTRIDGE, now U.S. Pat. No. D847,989; and    -   U.S. Design patent application Ser. No. 29/569,264, entitled        SURGICAL FASTENER CARTRIDGE, now U.S. Pat. No. D850,617.

Applicant of the present application owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Apr. 1, 2016 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,325, entitled METHOD FOR        OPERATING A SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2017/0281171;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,321, entitled MODULAR        SURGICAL STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A DISPLAY, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,271,851;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,326, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A DISPLAY INCLUDING A RE-ORIENTABLE        DISPLAY FIELD, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,433,849;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,263, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT HANDLE ASSEMBLY WITH RECONFIGURABLE GRIP PORTION, now        U.S. Pat. No. 10,307,159;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,262, entitled ROTARY        POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MANUALLY ACTUATABLE BAILOUT        SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,357,246;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,277, entitled SURGICAL        CUTTING AND STAPLING END EFFECTOR WITH ANVIL CONCENTRIC DRIVE        MEMBER, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,531,874;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,296, entitled        INTERCHANGEABLE SURGICAL TOOL ASSEMBLY WITH A SURGICAL END        EFFECTOR THAT IS SELECTIVELY ROTATABLE ABOUT A SHAFT AXIS, now        U.S. Pat. No. 10,413,293;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,258, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A SHIFTABLE TRANSMISSION, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,342,543;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,278, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM CONFIGURED TO PROVIDE SELECTIVE CUTTING OF        TISSUE, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,420,552;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,284, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A CONTOURABLE SHAFT, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2017/0281186;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,295, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A TISSUE COMPRESSION LOCKOUT, now        U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0281187;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,300, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING AN UNCLAMPING LOCKOUT, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,456,140;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,196, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A JAW CLOSURE LOCKOUT, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,568,632;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,203, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A JAW ATTACHMENT LOCKOUT, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,542,991;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,210, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A SPENT CARTRIDGE LOCKOUT, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,478,190;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,324, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A SHIFTING MECHANISM, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,314,582;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,335, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENT COMPRISING MULTIPLE LOCKOUTS, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,485,542;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,339, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2017/0281173;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,253, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM CONFIGURED TO APPLY ANNULAR ROWS OF STAPLES        HAVING DIFFERENT HEIGHTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,413,297;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,304, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING A GROOVED FORMING POCKET, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,285,705;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,331, entitled ANVIL        MODIFICATION MEMBERS FOR SURGICAL STAPLERS, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,376,263;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,336, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGES WITH ATRAUMATIC FEATURES, now U.S. Patent Application        Publication No. 2017/0281164;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,312, entitled CIRCULAR        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING AN INCISABLE TISSUE SUPPORT, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0281189;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,309, entitled CIRCULAR        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING ROTARY FIRING SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2017/0281169; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/089,349, entitled CIRCULAR        STAPLING SYSTEM COMPRISING LOAD CONTROL, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2017/0281174.

Applicant of the present application also owns the U.S. PatentApplications identified below which were filed on Dec. 31, 2015 whichare each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/984,488, entitled MECHANISMS        FOR COMPENSATING FOR BATTERY PACK FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,292,704;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/984,525, entitled MECHANISMS        FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,368,865; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/984,552, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH SEPARABLE MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUITS,        now U.S. Pat. No. 10,265,068.

Applicant of the present application also owns the U.S. PatentApplications identified below which were filed on Feb. 9, 2016 which areeach herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,220, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT WITH ARTICULATING AND AXIALLY TRANSLATABLE END        EFFECTOR, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,245,029;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,228, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH MULTIPLE LINK ARTICULATION ARRANGEMENTS, now        U.S. Pat. No. 10,433,837;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,196, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT ARTICULATION MECHANISM WITH SLOTTED SECONDARY        CONSTRAINT, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,413,291;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,206, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH AN END EFFECTOR THAT IS HIGHLY ARTICULATABLE        RELATIVE TO AN ELONGATE SHAFT ASSEMBLY, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2017/0224331;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,215, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH NON-SYMMETRICAL ARTICULATION ARRANGEMENTS, now        U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2017/0224332;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,227, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH SINGLE ARTICULATION LINK        ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2017/0224334;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,235, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH TENSIONING ARRANGEMENTS FOR CABLE DRIVEN        ARTICULATION SYSTEMS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,245,030;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,230, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH OFF-AXIS FIRING BEAM        ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,588,625; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,245, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH CLOSURE STROKE REDUCTION ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,470,764.

Applicant of the present application also owns the U.S. PatentApplications identified below which were filed on Feb. 12, 2016 whichare each herein incorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/043,254, entitled MECHANISMS        FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,258,331;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/043,259, entitled MECHANISMS        FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,448,948;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/043,275, entitled MECHANISMS        FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2017/0231627; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/043,289, entitled MECHANISMS        FOR COMPENSATING FOR DRIVETRAIN FAILURE IN POWERED SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2017/0231628.

Applicant of the present application owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Jun. 18, 2015 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,925, entitled SURGICAL        END EFFECTORS WITH POSITIVE JAW OPENING ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,182,818;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,941, entitled SURGICAL        END EFFECTORS WITH DUAL CAM ACTUATED JAW CLOSING FEATURES, now        U.S. Pat. No. 10,052,102;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,914, entitled MOVABLE        FIRING BEAM SUPPORT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,405,863;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,900, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH COMPOSITE FIRING BEAM        STRUCTURES WITH CENTER FIRING SUPPORT MEMBER FOR ARTICULATION        SUPPORT, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,335,149;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,885, entitled DUAL        ARTICULATION DRIVE SYSTEM ARRANGEMENTS FOR ARTICULATABLE        SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,368,861; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,876, entitled PUSH/PULL        ARTICULATION DRIVE SYSTEMS FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,178,992.

Applicant of the present application owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Mar. 6, 2015 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,746, entitled POWERED        SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,808,246;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,795, entitled MULTIPLE        LEVEL THRESHOLDS TO MODIFY OPERATION OF POWERED SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,441,279;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,832, entitled ADAPTIVE        TISSUE COMPRESSION TECHNIQUES TO ADJUST CLOSURE RATES FOR        MULTIPLE TISSUE TYPES, now U.S. Patent Application Publication        No. 2016/0256154;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,935, entitled OVERLAID        MULTI SENSOR RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) ELECTRODE SYSTEM TO MEASURE        TISSUE COMPRESSION, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,548,504;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,831, entitled MONITORING        SPEED CONTROL AND PRECISION INCREMENTING OF MOTOR FOR POWERED        SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,895,148;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,859, entitled TIME        DEPENDENT EVALUATION OF SENSOR DATA TO DETERMINE STABILITY,        CREEP, AND VISCOELASTIC ELEMENTS OF MEASURES, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,052,044;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,817, entitled        INTERACTIVE FEEDBACK SYSTEM FOR POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS,        U.S. Pat. No. 9,924,961;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,844, entitled CONTROL        TECHNIQUES AND SUB-PROCESSOR CONTAINED WITHIN MODULAR SHAFT WITH        SELECT CONTROL PROCESSING FROM HANDLE, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,045,776;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,837, entitled SMART        SENSORS WITH LOCAL SIGNAL PROCESSING, now U.S. Pat. No.        9,993,248;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,765, entitled SYSTEM FOR        DETECTING THE MIS-INSERTION OF A STAPLE CARTRIDGE INTO A        SURGICAL STAPLER, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,617,412;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,799, entitled SIGNAL AND        POWER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM POSITIONED ON A ROTATABLE SHAFT, now        U.S. Pat. No. 9,901,342; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/640,780, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A LOCKABLE BATTERY HOUSING, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,245,033.

Applicant of the present application owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Feb. 27, 2015, and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,576, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT SYSTEM COMPRISING AN INSPECTION STATION, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,045,779;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,546, entitled SURGICAL        APPARATUS CONFIGURED TO ASSESS WHETHER A PERFORMANCE PARAMETER        OF THE SURGICAL APPARATUS IS WITHIN AN ACCEPTABLE PERFORMANCE        BAND, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,180,463;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,560, entitled SURGICAL        CHARGING SYSTEM THAT CHARGES AND/OR CONDITIONS ONE OR MORE        BATTERIES, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2016/0249910;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,566, entitled CHARGING        SYSTEM THAT ENABLES EMERGENCY RESOLUTIONS FOR CHARGING A        BATTERY, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,182,816;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,555, entitled SYSTEM FOR        MONITORING WHETHER A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT NEEDS TO BE SERVICED,        now U.S. Pat. No. 10,321,907;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,542, entitled REINFORCED        BATTERY FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,931,118;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,548, entitled POWER        ADAPTER FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,245,028;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,526, entitled ADAPTABLE        SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HANDLE, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,993,258;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,541, entitled MODULAR        STAPLING ASSEMBLY, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,226,250; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/633,562, entitled SURGICAL        APPARATUS CONFIGURED TO TRACK AN END-OF-LIFE PARAMETER, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,159,483.

Applicant of the present application owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Dec. 18, 2014 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/574,478, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS COMPRISING AN ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTOR AND        MEANS FOR ADJUSTING THE FIRING STROKE OF A FIRING MEMBER, now        U.S. Pat. No. 9,844,374;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/574,483, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING LOCKABLE SYSTEMS, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,188,385;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,139, entitled DRIVE        ARRANGEMENTS FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S.        Pat. No. 9,844,375;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,148, entitled LOCKING        ARRANGEMENTS FOR DETACHABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES WITH ARTICULATABLE        SURGICAL END EFFECTORS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,085,748;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,130, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT WITH AN ANVIL THAT IS SELECTIVELY MOVABLE ABOUT A        DISCRETE NON-MOVABLE AXIS RELATIVE TO A STAPLE CARTRIDGE, now        U.S. Pat. No. 10,245,027;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,143, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH IMPROVED CLOSURE ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,004,501;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,117, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTORS AND MOVABLE FIRING        BEAM SUPPORT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,943,309;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/575,154, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS WITH ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTORS AND IMPROVED FIRING        BEAM SUPPORT ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,968,355;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/574,493, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A FLEXIBLE ARTICULATION SYSTEM,        now U.S. Pat. No. 9,987,000; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/574,500, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A LOCKABLE ARTICULATION SYSTEM,        now U.S. Pat. No. 10,117,649.

Applicant of the present application owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Mar. 1, 2013 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,295, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH CONDUCTIVE PATHWAYS FOR        SIGNAL COMMUNICATION, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,700,309;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,323, entitled ROTARY        POWERED ARTICULATION JOINTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S.        Pat. No. 9,782,169;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,338, entitled THUMBWHEEL        SWITCH ARRANGEMENTS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2014/0249557;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,499, entitled        ELECTROMECHANICAL SURGICAL DEVICE WITH SIGNAL RELAY ARRANGEMENT,        now U.S. Pat. No. 9,358,003;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,460, entitled MULTIPLE        PROCESSOR MOTOR CONTROL FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now        U.S. Pat. No. 9,554,794;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,358, entitled JOYSTICK        SWITCH ASSEMBLIES FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No.        9,326,767;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,481, entitled SENSOR        STRAIGHTENED END EFFECTOR DURING REMOVAL THROUGH TROCAR, now        U.S. Pat. No. 9,468,438;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,518, entitled CONTROL        METHODS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH REMOVABLE IMPLEMENT        PORTIONS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.        2014/0246475;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,375, entitled ROTARY        POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH MULTIPLE DEGREES OF FREEDOM,        now U.S. Pat. No. 9,398,911; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/782,536, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT SOFT STOP, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,307,986.

Applicant of the present application also owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Mar. 14, 2013 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,097, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A FIRING DRIVE, now        U.S. Pat. No. 9,687,230;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,193, entitled CONTROL        ARRANGEMENTS FOR A DRIVE MEMBER OF A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now        U.S. Pat. No. 9,332,987;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,053, entitled        INTERCHANGEABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES FOR USE WITH A SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,883,860;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION        LOCK, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,210, entitled SENSOR        ARRANGEMENTS FOR ABSOLUTE POSITIONING SYSTEM FOR SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,808,244;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,148, entitled        MULTI-FUNCTION MOTOR FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,470,762;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,066, entitled DRIVE        SYSTEM LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS,        now U.S. Pat. No. 9,629,623;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,117, entitled        ARTICULATION CONTROL SYSTEM FOR ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL        INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,351,726;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,130, entitled DRIVE        TRAIN CONTROL ARRANGEMENTS FOR MODULAR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now        U.S. Pat. No. 9,351,727; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,159, entitled METHOD AND        SYSTEM FOR OPERATING A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No.        9,888,919.

Applicant of the present application also owns the following patentapplication that was filed on Mar. 7, 2014 and is herein incorporated byreference in its entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/200,111, entitled CONTROL        SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,629,629.

Applicant of the present application also owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Mar. 26, 2014 and are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,106, entitled POWER        MANAGEMENT CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S.        Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272582;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,099, entitled        STERILIZATION VERIFICATION CIRCUIT, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,826,977;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,094, entitled        VERIFICATION OF NUMBER OF BATTERY EXCHANGES/PROCEDURE COUNT, now        U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0272580;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,117, entitled POWER        MANAGEMENT THROUGH SLEEP OPTIONS OF SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND WAKE        UP CONTROL, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,013,049;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,075, entitled MODULAR        POWERED SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH DETACHABLE SHAFT ASSEMBLIES,        now U.S. Pat. No. 9,743,929;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,093, entitled FEEDBACK        ALGORITHMS FOR MANUAL BAILOUT SYSTEMS FOR SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS,        now U.S. Pat. No. 10,028,761;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,116, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT UTILIZING SENSOR ADAPTATION, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2015/0272571;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,071, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT CONTROL CIRCUIT HAVING A SAFETY PROCESSOR, now U.S.        Pat. No. 9,690,362;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,097, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT COMPRISING INTERACTIVE SYSTEMS, now U.S. Pat. No.        9,820,738;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,126, entitled INTERFACE        SYSTEMS FOR USE WITH SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,004,497;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,133, entitled MODULAR        SURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEM, now U.S. Patent Application        Publication No. 2015/0272557;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,081, entitled SYSTEMS        AND METHODS FOR CONTROLLING A SEGMENTED CIRCUIT, now U.S. Pat.        No. 9,804,618;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,076, entitled POWER        MANAGEMENT THROUGH SEGMENTED CIRCUIT AND VARIABLE VOLTAGE        PROTECTION, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,733,663;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,111, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENT SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,750,499; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/226,125, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A ROTATABLE SHAFT, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,201,364.

Applicant of the present application also owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Sep. 5, 2014 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,103, entitled CIRCUITRY        AND SENSORS FOR POWERED MEDICAL DEVICE, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,111,679;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,119, entitled ADJUNCT        WITH INTEGRATED SENSORS TO QUANTIFY TISSUE COMPRESSION, now U.S.        Pat. No. 9,724,094;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/478,908, entitled MONITORING        DEVICE DEGRADATION BASED ON COMPONENT EVALUATION, now U.S. Pat.        No. 9,737,301;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/478,895, entitled MULTIPLE        SENSORS WITH ONE SENSOR AFFECTING A SECOND SENSOR'S OUTPUT OR        INTERPRETATION, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,757,128;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,110, entitled POLARITY        OF HALL MAGNET TO DETECT MISLOADED CARTRIDGE, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,016,199;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,098, entitled SMART        CARTRIDGE WAKE UP OPERATION AND DATA RETENTION, now U.S. Pat.        No. 10,135,242;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,115, entitled MULTIPLE        MOTOR CONTROL FOR POWERED MEDICAL DEVICE, now U.S. Pat. No.        9,788,836; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/479,108, entitled LOCAL        DISPLAY OF TISSUE PARAMETER STABILIZATION, now U.S. Patent        Application Publication No. 2016/0066913.

Applicant of the present application also owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Apr. 9, 2014 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,590, entitled MOTOR        DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH LOCKABLE DUAL DRIVE SHAFTS, now        U.S. Pat. No. 9,826,976;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,581, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A CLOSING DRIVE AND A FIRING DRIVE        OPERATED FROM THE SAME ROTATABLE OUTPUT, now U.S. Pat. No.        9,649,110;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,595, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT SHAFT INCLUDING SWITCHES FOR CONTROLLING THE        OPERATION OF THE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No.        9,844,368;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,588, entitled POWERED        LINEAR SURGICAL STAPLER, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,405,857;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,591, entitled        TRANSMISSION ARRANGEMENT FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,149,680;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,584, entitled MODULAR        MOTOR DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH ALIGNMENT FEATURES FOR        ALIGNING ROTARY DRIVE SHAFTS WITH SURGICAL END EFFECTOR SHAFTS,        now U.S. Pat. No. 9,801,626;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,587, entitled POWERED        SURGICAL STAPLER, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,867,612;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,586, entitled DRIVE        SYSTEM DECOUPLING ARRANGEMENT FOR A SURGICAL INSTRUMENT, now        U.S. Pat. No. 10,136,887; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/248,607, entitled MODULAR        MOTOR DRIVEN SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH STATUS INDICATION        ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,814,460.

Applicant of the present application also owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Apr. 16, 2013 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,365,        entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS PERFORMED        BY A SINGLE MOTOR;    -   U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,376,        entitled LINEAR CUTTER WITH POWER;    -   U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,382,        entitled LINEAR CUTTER WITH MOTOR AND PISTOL GRIP;    -   U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,385,        entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HANDLE WITH MULTIPLE ACTUATION        MOTORS AND MOTOR CONTROL; and    -   U.S. Provisional Patent Application Ser. No. 61/812,372,        entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT WITH MULTIPLE FUNCTIONS PERFORMED        BY A SINGLE MOTOR.

Applicant of the present application also owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Sep. 2, 2015 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/843,168, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLE CARTRIDGE WITH IMPROVED STAPLE DRIVER CONFIGURATIONS, now        U.S. Pat. No. 10,314,587;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/843,196, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLE DRIVER ARRAYS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,172,619;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/843,216, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLE CARTRIDGE STAPLE DRIVERS WITH CENTRAL SUPPORT FEATURES,        now U.S. Pat. No. 10,251,648;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/843,243, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLE CONFIGURATIONS WITH CAMMING SURFACES LOCATED BETWEEN        PORTIONS SUPPORTING SURGICAL STAPLES, now U.S. Pat. No.        10,357,252; and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/843,267, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLE CARTRIDGES WITH DRIVER ARRANGEMENTS FOR ESTABLISHING        HERRINGBONE STAPLE PATTERNS, now U.S. Pat. No. 10,238,390.

Applicant of the present application also owns the following patentapplications that were filed on Sep. 26, 2014 and which are each hereinincorporated by reference in their respective entirety:

-   -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/498,070, entitled CIRCULAR        FASTENER CARTRIDGES FOR APPLYING RADIALLY EXPANDABLE FASTENER        LINES; now U.S. Pat. No. 10,426,476;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/498,087, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLE AND DRIVER ARRANGEMENTS FOR STAPLE CARTRIDGES; now U.S.        Pat. No. 10,206,677;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/498,105, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLE AND DRIVER ARRANGEMENTS FOR STAPLE CARTRIDGES; now U.S.        Pat. No. 9,801,628;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/498,121, entitled FASTENER        CARTRIDGE FOR CREATING A FLEXIBLE STAPLE LINE; now U.S. Pat. No.        9,801,627;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/498,145, entitled METHOD FOR        CREATING A FLEXIBLE STAPLE LINE; now U.S. Pat. No. 10,327,764;        and    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/498,107, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING BUTTRESSES AND ADJUNCT MATERIALS; now U.S. Pat. No.        9,943,310.

Applicant of the present application also owns U.S. Pat. No. 8,590,762,which issued Nov. 26, 2013, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE CAVITYCONFIGURATIONS, which is herein incorporated by reference in itsrespective entirety.

Applicant of the present application also owns U.S. Pat. No. 8,727,197,which issued May 20, 2014, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE CAVITYCONFIGURATION WITH COOPERATIVE SURGICAL STAPLE, which is hereinincorporated by reference in its respective entirety.

Numerous specific details are set forth to provide a thoroughunderstanding of the overall structure, function, manufacture, and useof the embodiments as described in the specification and illustrated inthe accompanying drawings. Well-known operations, components, andelements have not been described in detail so as not to obscure theembodiments described in the specification. The reader will understandthat the embodiments described and illustrated herein are non-limitingexamples, and thus it can be appreciated that the specific structuraland functional details disclosed herein may be representative andillustrative. Variations and changes thereto may be made withoutdeparting from the scope of the claims.

The terms “comprise” (and any form of comprise, such as “comprises” and“comprising”), “have” (and any form of have, such as “has” and“having”), “include” (and any form of include, such as “includes” and“including”) and “contain” (and any form of contain, such as “contains”and “containing”) are open-ended linking verbs. As a result, a surgicalsystem, device, or apparatus that “comprises,” “has,” “includes” or“contains” one or more elements possesses those one or more elements,but is not limited to possessing only those one or more elements.Likewise, an element of a system, device, or apparatus that “comprises,”“has,” “includes” or “contains” one or more features possesses those oneor more features, but is not limited to possessing only those one ormore features.

The terms “proximal” and “distal” are used herein with reference to aclinician manipulating the handle portion of the surgical instrument.The term “proximal” refers to the portion closest to the clinician andthe term “distal” refers to the portion located away from the clinician.It will be further appreciated that, for convenience and clarity,spatial terms such as “vertical”, “horizontal”, “up”, and “down” may beused herein with respect to the drawings. However, surgical instrumentsare used in many orientations and positions, and these terms are notintended to be limiting and/or absolute.

Various exemplary devices and methods are provided for performinglaparoscopic and minimally invasive surgical procedures. However, thereader will readily appreciate that the various methods and devicesdisclosed herein can be used in numerous surgical procedures andapplications including, for example, in connection with open surgicalprocedures. As the present Detailed Description proceeds, the readerwill further appreciate that the various instruments disclosed hereincan be inserted into a body in any way, such as through a naturalorifice, through an incision or puncture hole formed in tissue, etc. Theworking portions or end effector portions of the instruments can beinserted directly into a patient's body or can be inserted through anaccess device that has a working channel through which the end effectorand elongate shaft of a surgical instrument can be advanced.

A surgical stapling system can comprise a shaft and an end effectorextending from the shaft. The end effector comprises a first jaw and asecond jaw. The first jaw comprises a staple cartridge. The staplecartridge is insertable into and removable from the first jaw; however,other embodiments are envisioned in which a staple cartridge is notremovable from, or at least readily replaceable from, the first jaw. Thesecond jaw comprises an anvil configured to deform staples ejected fromthe staple cartridge. The second jaw is pivotable relative to the firstjaw about a closure axis; however, other embodiments are envisioned inwhich first jaw is pivotable relative to the second jaw. The surgicalstapling system further comprises an articulation joint configured topermit the end effector to be rotated, or articulated, relative to theshaft. The end effector is rotatable about an articulation axisextending through the articulation joint. Other embodiments areenvisioned which do not include an articulation joint.

The staple cartridge comprises a cartridge body. The cartridge bodyincludes a proximal end, a distal end, and a deck extending between theproximal end and the distal end. In use, the staple cartridge ispositioned on a first side of the tissue to be stapled and the anvil ispositioned on a second side of the tissue. The anvil is moved toward thestaple cartridge to compress and clamp the tissue against the deck.Thereafter, staples removably stored in the cartridge body can bedeployed into the tissue. The cartridge body includes staple cavitiesdefined therein wherein staples are removably stored in the staplecavities. The staple cavities are arranged in six longitudinal rows.Three rows of staple cavities are positioned on a first side of alongitudinal slot and three rows of staple cavities are positioned on asecond side of the longitudinal slot. Other arrangements of staplecavities and staples may be possible.

The staples are supported by staple drivers in the cartridge body. Thedrivers are movable between a first, or unfired position, and a second,or fired, position to eject the staples from the staple cavities. Thedrivers are retained in the cartridge body by a retainer which extendsaround the bottom of the cartridge body and includes resilient membersconfigured to grip the cartridge body and hold the retainer to thecartridge body. The drivers are movable between their unfired positionsand their fired positions by a sled. The sled is movable between aproximal position adjacent the proximal end and a distal positionadjacent the distal end. The sled comprises a plurality of rampedsurfaces configured to slide under the drivers and lift the drivers, andthe staples supported thereon, toward the anvil.

Further to the above, the sled is moved distally by a firing member. Thefiring member is configured to contact the sled and push the sled towardthe distal end. The longitudinal slot defined in the cartridge body isconfigured to receive the firing member. The anvil also includes a slotconfigured to receive the firing member. The firing member furthercomprises a first cam which engages the first jaw and a second cam whichengages the second jaw. As the firing member is advanced distally, thefirst cam and the second cam can control the distance, or tissue gap,between the deck of the staple cartridge and the anvil. The firingmember also comprises a knife configured to incise the tissue capturedintermediate the staple cartridge and the anvil. It is desirable for theknife to be positioned at least partially proximal to the rampedsurfaces such that the staples are ejected ahead of the knife.

FIG. 1 depicts one form of an interchangeable surgical tool assembly1000 that is operably coupled to a motor driven handle assembly 500. Thetool assembly 1000 may also be effectively employed with a tool driveassembly of a robotically controlled or automated surgical system. Forexample, the surgical tool assemblies disclosed herein may be employedwith various robotic systems, instruments, components and methods suchas, but not limited to, those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535,entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENTARRANGEMENTS, which is hereby incorporated by reference herein in itsentirety. The handle assembly 500, as well as the tool drive assembly ofa robotic system may also be referred to herein as “control systems” or“control units”.

FIG. 2 illustrates attachment of the interchangeable surgical toolassembly 1000 to the handle assembly 500. The handle assembly 500 maycomprise a handle housing 502 that includes a pistol grip portion 504that can be gripped and manipulated by the clinician. The handleassembly 500 may further include a frame 506 that operably supports theplurality of drive systems. For example, the frame 506 can operablysupport a “first” or closure drive system, generally designated as 510,which may be employed to apply closing and opening motions to theinterchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 that is operably attached orcoupled to the handle assembly 500. In at least one form, the closuredrive system 510 may include an actuator in the form of a closuretrigger 512 that is pivotally supported by the frame 506. Sucharrangement enables the closure trigger 512 to be manipulated by aclinician such that when the clinician grips the pistol grip portion 504of the handle assembly 500, the closure trigger 512 may be easilypivoted from a starting or “unactuated” position to an “actuated”position and more particularly, to a fully compressed or fully actuatedposition. In various forms, the closure drive system 510 furtherincludes a closure linkage assembly 514 that is pivotally coupled to theclosure trigger 512 or otherwise operably interfaces therewith. As willbe discussed in further detail below, in the illustrated example, theclosure linkage assembly 514 includes a transverse attachment pin 516that facilitates attachment to a corresponding drive system on thesurgical tool assembly. In use, to actuate the closure drive system 510,the clinician depresses the closure trigger 512 towards the pistol gripportion 504. As described in further detail in U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 14/226,142, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A SENSORSYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,913,642, which is hereby incorporated byreference in its entirety herein, when the clinician fully depresses theclosure trigger 512 to attain a “full” closure stroke, the closure drivesystem 510 is configured to lock the closure trigger 512 into the fullydepressed or fully actuated position. When the clinician desires tounlock the closure trigger 512 to permit it to be biased to theunactuated position, the clinician simply activates a closure releasebutton assembly 518 which enables the closure trigger 512 to return tothe unactuated position. The closure release button assembly 518 mayalso be configured to interact with various sensors that communicatewith a microcontroller 520 in the handle assembly 500 for tracking theposition of the closure trigger 512. Further details concerning theconfiguration and operation of the closure release button assembly 518may be found in U.S. Pat. No. 9,913,642.

In at least one form, the handle assembly 500 and the frame 506 mayoperably support another drive system referred to herein as a firingdrive system 530 that is configured to apply firing motions tocorresponding portions of the interchangeable surgical tool assemblythat is attached thereto. As was described in detail in U.S. Pat. No.9,913,642, the firing drive system 530 may employ an electric motor 505that is located in the pistol grip portion 504 of the handle assembly500. In various forms, the motor 505 may be a DC brushed driving motorhaving a maximum rotation of, approximately, 25,000 RPM, for example. Inother arrangements, the motor 505 may include a brushless motor, acordless motor, a synchronous motor, a stepper motor, or any othersuitable electric motor. The motor 505 may be powered by a power source522 that in one form may comprise a removable power pack. The power packmay support a plurality of Lithium Ion (“LI”) or other suitablebatteries therein. A number of batteries may be connected in series andmay be used as the power source 522 for the handle assembly 500. Inaddition, the power source 522 may be replaceable and/or rechargeable.

The electric motor 505 is configured to axially drive a longitudinallymovable drive member 540 in distal and proximal directions dependingupon the polarity of the motor. For example, when the motor 505 isdriven in one rotary direction, the longitudinally movable drive member540 will be axially driven in the distal direction “DD”. When the motor505 is driven in the opposite rotary direction, the longitudinallymovable drive member 540 will be axially driven in a proximal direction“PD”. The handle assembly 500 can include a switch 513 which can beconfigured to reverse the polarity applied to the electric motor 505 bythe power source 522 or otherwise control the motor 505. The handleassembly 500 can also include a sensor or sensors (not shown) that isconfigured to detect the position of the drive member 540 and/or thedirection in which the drive member 540 is being moved. Actuation of themotor 505 can be controlled by a firing trigger 532 that is pivotallysupported on the handle assembly 500. The firing trigger 532 may bepivoted between an unactuated position and an actuated position. Thefiring trigger 532 may be biased into the unactuated position by aspring (not shown) or other biasing arrangement such that when theclinician releases the firing trigger 532, it may be pivoted orotherwise returned to the unactuated position by the spring or biasingarrangement. In at least one form, the firing trigger 532 can bepositioned “outboard” of the closure trigger 512 as was discussed above.As discussed in U.S. Pat. No. 9,913,642, the handle assembly 500 may beequipped with a firing trigger safety button (not shown) to preventinadvertent actuation of the firing trigger 532. When the closuretrigger 512 is in the unactuated position, the safety button iscontained in the handle assembly 500 where the clinician cannot readilyaccess it and move it between a safety position preventing actuation ofthe firing trigger 532 and a firing position wherein the firing trigger532 may be fired. As the clinician depresses the closure trigger 512,the safety button and the firing trigger 532 may pivot down wherein theycan then be manipulated by the clinician.

In at least one form, the longitudinally movable drive member 540 mayhave a rack of teeth (not shown) formed thereon for meshing engagementwith a corresponding drive gear arrangement (not shown) that interfaceswith the motor 505. Further details regarding those features may befound in U.S. Pat. No. 9,913,642. At least one form also includes amanually-actuatable “bailout” assembly that is configured to enable theclinician to manually retract the longitudinally movable drive member540 should the motor 505 become disabled. The bailout assembly mayinclude a lever or bailout handle assembly that is stored within thehandle assembly 500 under a releasable door 550. The lever is configuredto be manually pivoted into ratcheting engagement with the teeth in thedrive member 540. Thus, the clinician can manually retract the drivemember 540 by using the bailout handle assembly to ratchet the drivemember 540 in the proximal direction “PD”. U.S. patent application Ser.No. 12/249,117, entitled POWERED SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING APPARATUSWITH MANUALLY RETRACTABLE FIRING SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045,the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by referenceherein, discloses bailout arrangements and other components,arrangements and systems that may also be employed with the toolassembly 1000.

Turning now to FIGS. 4, 5 and 6, the interchangeable surgical toolassembly 1000 includes a shaft mounting portion 1300 that is operablyattached to an elongate shaft assembly 1400. A surgical end effector1100 that comprises an elongate channel 1102 that is configured tooperably support a staple cartridge 1110 therein is operably attached tothe elongate shaft assembly 1400. See FIGS. 3 and 4. The end effector1100 may further include an anvil 1130 that is pivotally supportedrelative to the elongate channel 1102. The elongate channel 1102 staplecartridge assembly 1110 and the anvil 1130 may also be referred to as“jaws”. The interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 may furtherinclude an articulation joint 1200 and an articulation lock 1210 (FIGS.3 and 4) which can be configured to releasably hold the end effector1100 in a desired articulated position about an articulation axis B-Bwhich is transverse to a shaft axis SA. Details regarding theconstruction and operation of the articulation lock 1210 may be found inU.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086, entitled ARTICULATABLESURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING AN ARTICULATION LOCK, now U.S. PatentApplication Publication No. 2014/0263541, the entire disclosure of whichis hereby incorporated by reference herein. Additional detailsconcerning the articulation lock 1210 may also be found in U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 15/019,196, filed Feb. 9, 2016, entitled SURGICALINSTRUMENT ARTICULATION MECHANISM WITH SLOTTED SECONDARY CONSTRAINT, theentire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated by reference herein.

As can be seen in FIGS. 5 and 6, the shaft mounting portion 1300includes a proximal housing or nozzle 1301 comprised of nozzle portions1302, 1304 as well as an actuator wheel portion 1306 that is configuredto be coupled to the assembled nozzle portions 1302, 1304 by snaps,lugs, screws etc. In the illustrated embodiment, the interchangeablesurgical tool assembly 1000 further includes a closure assembly 1406which can be utilized to close and/or open the anvil 1130 and theelongate channel 1102 of the end effector 1100 as will be discussed infurther detail below. In addition, the illustrated interchangeablesurgical tool assembly 1000 includes a spine assembly 1500 which isoperably supports the articulation lock 1210. The spine assembly 1500 isconfigured to, one, slidably support a firing member assembly 1600therein and, two, slidably support the closure assembly 1406 whichextends around the spine assembly 1500 or is otherwise movably supportedthereby.

In the illustrated arrangement, the surgical end effector 1100 isoperably coupled to the elongate shaft assembly 1400 by an articulationjoint 1200 that facilitates selective articulation of the surgical endeffector 1100 about an articulation axis B-B that is transverse to theshaft axis SA. See FIG. 3. As can be seen in FIG. 4, the spine assembly1500 slidably supports a proximal articulation driver 1700 that operablyinterfaces with an articulation lock 1210. The articulation lock 1210 issupported on a distal frame segment 1560 that also comprises a portionof the spine assembly 1500. As can be seen in FIG. 4, the distal framesegment 1560 is pivotally coupled to the elongate channel 1102 by an endeffector mounting assembly 1230. In one arrangement, for example, adistal end 1562 of the distal frame segment 1560 has an articulation pin1564 formed thereon. The articulation pin 1564 is adapted to bepivotally received within an articulation pivot hole 1234 formed in apivot base portion 1232 of the end effector mounting assembly 1230. Theend effector mounting assembly 1230 is pivotally attached to a proximalend 1103 of the elongate channel 1102 by a pair of laterally extendingjaw attachment pins 1235 that are rotatably received within jaw pivotholes 1104 that are provided in the proximal end 1103 of the elongatechannel 1102. The jaw attachment pins 1235 define a jaw pivot axis JAthat is substantially traverse to the shaft axis SA. See FIG. 3. Thearticulation pivot pin 1564 defines an articulation axis B-B that istransverse to the shaft axis SA. Such arrangement facilitates pivotaltravel (i.e., articulation) of the end effector 1100 about thearticulation axis B-B relative to the spine assembly 1500.

Referring again to FIG. 4, in the illustrated embodiment, thearticulation driver 1700 has a distal end 1702 that is configured tooperably engage the articulation lock 1210. The articulation lock 1210includes an articulation frame 1212 that is pivotally coupled to anarticulation link 1214 that is adapted to operably engage anarticulation drive pin 1236 on the pivot base portion 1232 of the endeffector mounting assembly 1230. As indicated above, further detailsregarding the operation of the articulation lock 1210 and thearticulation frame 1212 may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No.13/803,086, U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541.Further details regarding the end effector mounting assembly andarticulation link 1214 may be found in U.S. patent application Ser. No.15/019,245, filed Feb. 9, 2016, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITHCLOSURE STROKE REDUCTION ARRANGEMENTS, the entire disclosure of which ishereby incorporated by reference herein.

In various circumstances, the spine assembly 1500 further includes aproximal spine channel 1510 that may be fabricated out of pressed, bentor machined material. As can be seen in FIG. 6, the proximal spinechannel 1510 is essentially C-shaped (when viewed from a distal end) andis configured to operably support the firing member assembly 1600between side wall portions 1512 thereof. As can be seen in FIGS. 6 and7, the spine assembly 1500 further comprises a proximal spine mountingsegment 1530 that is rotatably pinned to a distal end 1514 of theproximal spine channel 1510 by a spine pin 1550. The proximal spinemounting segment 1530 comprises a proximal end portion 1532 that hasopposing notches 1535 (only one can be seen in FIG. 7) for receiving acorresponding mounting lug 1308 (shown in FIG. 5) that protrude inwardlyfrom each of the nozzle portions 1302, 1304. Such arrangementfacilitates rotation of the proximal spine mounting segment 1530 aboutthe shaft axis SA by rotating the nozzle 1301 about the shaft axis SA.In the illustrated arrangement, the proximal spine mounting segment 1530further comprises a distally protruding lower shaft segment 1534 and adistally protruding upper shaft segment 1536 that is spaced from thelower shaft segment 1534. See FIG. 7. Each of the shaft segments 1534,1536 has an arcuate cross-sectional shape. The lower shaft segment 1534is received within the proximal end 1514 of the proximal spine channel1510. The spine pin 1550 extends through a pivot hole 1516 in theproximal end of the proximal spine channel 1510 and a pivot hole 1538 inthe lower shaft segment 1534. The spine pin 1550 includes a verticalgroove 1552 that forms two upstanding sidewall portions 1554. The upperends of the side wall portions 1554 are received within correspondingpockets 1539 that are formed in the proximal spine mounting segment1530.

The interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 includes a chassis 1800that rotatably supported the shaft assembly 1400. The proximal endportion 1532 of the proximal spine mounting segment is rotatablysupported in a central shaft hole 1801 that is formed in the chassis1800. See FIG. 6. In one arrangement, for example, the proximal endportion 1532 may be threaded for attachment to a spine bearing (notshown) or other wise supported in a spine bearing that is mounted withinthe chassis 1800. Such an arrangement facilitates rotatable attachmentof the spine assembly 1500 to the chassis 1800 such that the spineassembly 1500 may be selectively rotated about a shaft axis SA relativeto the chassis 1800.

The closure assembly 1406 comprises an elongate intermediate closuremember 1410, a distal closure member 1430 and a proximal closure member1480. In the illustrated arrangement, the proximal closure member 1480comprises a hollow tubular member that is slidably supported on aportion of the spine assembly 1500. Hence, the proximal closure member1480 may also be referred to herein as the proximal closure tube.Similarly, the intermediate closure member 1410 may also be referred toherein as the intermediate closure tube and the distal closure member1430 may also be referred to as the distal closure tube. Referringprimarily to FIG. 6, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000includes a closure shuttle 1420 that is slidably supported within thechassis 1800 such that it may be axially moved relative thereto. In oneform, the closure shuttle 1420 includes a pair of proximally-protrudinghooks 1421 that are configured for attachment to the attachment pin 516(FIG. 2) that is attached to the closure linkage assembly 514 of thehandle assembly 500. Thus, when the hooks 1421 are hooked over the pin516, actuation of the closure trigger 512 will result in the axialmovement of the closure shuttle 1420 and ultimately, the closureassembly 1406 on the spine assembly 1500. A closure spring (not shown)may also be journaled on the closure assembly 1406 and serves to biasthe closure member assembly 1406 in the proximal direction “PD” whichcan serve to pivot the closure trigger 512 into the unactuated positionwhen the tool assembly 1000 is operably coupled to the handle assembly500. In use, the closure member assembly 1406 is translated distally(direction DD) to close the anvil 1130, for example, in response to theactuation of the closure trigger 512.

The closure linkage 514 may also be referred to herein as a “closureactuator” and the closure linkage 514 and the closure shuttle 1420 maybe collectively referred to herein as a “closure actuator assembly”. Aproximal end 1482 of the proximal closure member 1480 is coupled to theclosure shuttle 1420 for relative rotation thereto. For example, aU-shaped connector 1485 is inserted into an annular slot 1484 in theproximal end 1482 of the proximal closure member 1480 and is retainedwithin vertical slots 1422 in the closure shuttle 1420. See FIG. 6. Sucharrangement serves to attach the proximal closure member 1480 to theclosure shuttle 1420 for axial travel therewith while enabling theclosure assembly 1406 to rotate relative to the closure shuttle 1420about the shaft axis SA.

As indicated above, the illustrated interchangeable surgical toolassembly 1000 includes an articulation joint 1200. As can be seen inFIG. 4, upper and lower tangs 1415, 1416 protrude distally from a distalend of the intermediate closure member 1410 to be movably coupled to thedistal closure member 1430. As can be seen in FIG. 4, the distal closuremember 1430 includes upper and lower tangs 1434, 1436 that protrudeproximally from a proximal end thereof. The intermediate closure member1410 and the distal closure member 1430 are coupled together by an upperdouble pivot link 1220. The upper double pivot link 1220 includesproximal and distal pins that engage corresponding holes in the uppertangs 1415, 1434 of the proximal closure member 1410 and distal closuremember 1430, respectively. The intermediate closure member 1410 and thedistal closure member 1430 are also coupled together by a lower doublepivot link 1222. The lower double pivot link 1222 includes proximal anddistal pins that engage corresponding holes in the lower tangs 1416 and1436 of the intermediate closure member 1410 and distal closure member1430, respectively. As will be discussed in further detail below, distaland proximal axial translation of the closure assembly 1406 will resultin the closing and opening of the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel1102.

As mentioned above, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000further includes a firing member assembly 1600 that is supported foraxial travel within the spine assembly 1500. In the illustratedembodiment, the firing member assembly 1600 includes a proximal firingshaft segment 1602, an intermediate firing shaft segment 1610 and adistal cutting portion or distal firing bar 1620. The firing memberassembly 1600 may also be referred to herein as a “second shaft” and/ora “second shaft assembly”. As can be seen in FIG. 6, the proximal firingshaft segment 1602 may be formed with a distal mounting lug 1604 that isconfigured to be received with a corresponding cradle or groove 1613 inthe proximal end 1612 of the intermediate firing shaft segment 1610. Aproximal attachment lug 1606 is protrudes proximally from a proximal endof the proximal firing shaft segment 1602 and is configured to beoperably received within the firing shaft attachment cradle 542 in thelongitudinally movable drive member 540 that is supported in the handleassembly 500. See FIG. 2.

Referring again to FIG. 6, a distal end 1616 of the intermediate firingshaft segment 1610 includes a longitudinal slot 1618 which is configuredto receive a tab (not shown) on the proximal end of the distal firingbar 1620. The longitudinal slot 1618 and the proximal end of the distalfiring bar 1620 can be sized and configured to permit relative movementtherebetween and can comprise a slip joint 1622. The slip joint 1622 canpermit the proximal firing shaft segment 1602 and the intermediatefiring shaft segment 1610 of the firing member assembly 1600 to move asa unit during the articulation action without moving, or at leastsubstantially moving, the distal firing bar 1620. Once the end effector1100 has been suitably oriented, the proximal firing shaft segment 1602and the intermediate firing shaft segment 1610 can be advanced distallyuntil a proximal end wall of the longitudinal slot 1618 comes intocontact with the tab on the distal firing bar 1620 to advance the distalfiring bar 1620 and fire the staple cartridge 1110 that is positionedwithin the elongate channel 1102. As can be further seen in FIG. 6, tofacilitate assembly, the proximal firing shaft segment 1602, theintermediate firing shaft segment 1610 and the distal firing bar 1620may be inserted as a unit into the proximal spine channel 1510 and a topspine cover 1527 may be engaged with the proximal spine channel 1510 toenclose those portions of the firing member assembly 1600 therein.

Further to the above, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000includes a clutch assembly 1640 which can be configured to selectivelyand releasably couple the articulation driver 1700 to the firing memberassembly 1600. In one form, the clutch assembly 1640 includes a rotarylock assembly that in at least one embodiment comprises a lock collar,or lock sleeve 1650 that is positioned around the firing member assembly1600. The lock sleeve 1650 is configured to be rotated between anengaged position in which the lock sleeve 1650 couples the articulationdriver 1700 to the firing member assembly 1600 and a disengaged positionin which the articulation driver 1700 is not operably coupled to thefiring member assembly 1600. When lock sleeve 1650 is in its engagedposition, distal movement of the firing member assembly 1600 can movethe articulation driver 1700 distally and, correspondingly, proximalmovement of the firing member assembly 1600 can move the articulationdriver 1700 proximally. When lock sleeve 1650 is in its disengagedposition, movement of the firing member assembly 1600 is not transmittedto the articulation driver 1700 and, as a result, the firing memberassembly 1600 can move independently of the articulation driver 1700. Invarious circumstances, the articulation driver 1700 can be held inposition by the articulation lock 1210 when the articulation driver 1700is not being moved in the proximal or distal directions by the firingmember assembly 1600.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 8 and 9, the lock sleeve 1650 comprises acylindrical, or an at least substantially cylindrical, body including alongitudinal aperture 1652 defined therein configured to receive theproximal firing shaft segment 1602 of the firing member assembly 1600.The lock sleeve 1650 also has two diametrically-opposed, inwardly-facinglock protrusions 1654 formed thereon. Only one lock protrusion 1654 canbe seen in FIGS. 8 and 9. The lock protrusions 1654 can be configured tobe selectively engaged with the proximal firing shaft segment 1602 ofthe firing member assembly 1600. More particularly, when the lock sleeve1650 is in its engaged position (FIG. 8), the lock protrusions 1654 arepositioned within a drive notch 1603 that is provided in the proximalfiring shaft segment 1602 such that a distal pushing force and/or aproximal pulling force can be transmitted from the firing memberassembly 1600 to the lock sleeve 1650. As can be seen in FIGS. 8 and 9,an articulation drive notch 1655 is provided in a distal end portion ofthe lock sleeve 1650 for attachment to a proximal end 1704 of theproximal articulation driver 1700. In the illustrated arrangement, forexample, the proximal end 1704 includes a driver notch 1706 that isconfigured to engage the drive notch 1655 in the lock sleeve 1650. Suchattachment arrangement enables the lock sleeve 1650 to be rotatedrelative to the proximal articulation driver 1700 while remainingattached thereto. When the lock sleeve 1650 is in an “articulation mode”or orientation (FIG. 8), a distal pushing force and/or a proximalpulling force that is applied to the proximal firing shaft segment 1602is also transmitted to the lock sleeve 1650 and the proximalarticulation driver 1700 that is coupled thereto. In effect, the firingmember assembly 1600, the lock sleeve 1650, and the proximalarticulation driver 1700 will move together when the lock sleeve 1650 isin the articulation mode. On the other hand, when the lock sleeve 1650is in its “firing mode” (FIG. 9), the lock protrusions 1654 are notpositioned within the drive notch 1603 in the proximal firing shaftsegment 1602 of the firing member assembly 1600. When in that position,a distal pushing force and/or a proximal pulling force applied to theproximal firing shaft segment 1602 is not transmitted to the lock sleeve1650 and the proximal articulation driver 1700. In such circumstances,the firing member assembly 1600 can move proximally and/or distallyrelative to the lock sleeve 1650 and the proximal articulation driver1700.

The illustrated clutch assembly 1640 further includes a switch drum 1660that interfaces with the lock sleeve 1650. The switch drum 1660comprises a hollow shaft segment that operably interfaces with a shiftplate assembly 1680 that is supported therein. The shift plate assembly1680 comprises a body portion 1681 that has a shift pin 1682 thatprotrudes laterally therefrom. The shift pin 1682 extends into a shiftpin slot 1662 that is provided through a wall portion of the shift drum1660. The body portion 1681 of the shift plate assembly 1680 has a slideslot 1683 formed therein that is sized and configured to interface witha slide boss 1656 that protrudes from a proximal end of the slide lock1650. The switch drum 1660 can further include openings 1664 whichpermit the inwardly extending mounting lugs 1308 that extend from thenozzle halves 1302, 1304 to extend therethrough to be seating receivedwithin the corresponding notches 1535 in the proximal spine mountingsegment 1530. See FIG. 5. Such arrangement facilitates rotation of theshaft assembly 1400 about the shaft axis SA by rotating the nozzle 1301.

Also in the illustrated embodiment, the switch drum 1660 includes amagnet support arm 1665 that supports an articulation magnet 1708 and afiring magnet 1611 therein. The articulation magnet 1708 and firingmagnet 1611 are configured to operably interface with a Hall effectsensor 1632 that interfaces with a slip ring assembly 1630 that isoperably mounted to the chassis 1800. The slip ring assembly 1630 isconfigured to conduct electrical power to and/or from theinterchangeable surgical shaft assembly 1000 and/or communicate signalsto and/or from the interchangeable shaft assembly 1000 components backto the microcontroller 520 in the handle assembly 500 (FIG. 2) orrobotic system controller, for example. Further details concerning theslip ring assembly 1630 and associated connectors may be found in U.S.patent application Ser. No. 13/803,086 and U.S. patent application Ser.No. 15/019,196 which have each been herein incorporated by reference intheir respective entirety as well as in U.S. patent application Ser. No.13/800,067, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM,now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263552, which ishereby incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. Thearticulation magnet 1708 and the firing magnet 1611 cooperate with theHall effect sensor 1632 or other sensor arrangement to detect the rotaryposition of the switch drum 1660 and convey that information to themicrocontroller 520 which may serve to provide an indication orindications to the user in the various manners discussed in theaforementioned incorporated references. Other sensor arrangements mayalso be employed.

In various circumstances, the handle assembly 500 may be used to controla variety of different interchangeable surgical tool assemblies that areconfigured to perform various surgical procedures. As briefly mentionedabove, the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 may also beeffectively used in connection with robotic systems and automatedsurgical systems that each may be referred to herein as “controlsystems” or “control units”. Such control systems or control units mayoperably support firing systems and closure systems that are configuredupon actuation to move a firing actuation component or “firing actuator”(in the case of the firing system) and a closure actuation component or“closure actuator” (in the case of the closure system) a correspondingaxial distance to apply control motions to corresponding componentswithin the interchangeable tool assembly. In one arrangement, when aclosure system in the handle assembly (or robotic system) is fullyactuated, a closure actuator may move axially from an unactuatedposition to its fully actuated position. The axial distance that theclosure component moves between its unactuated position to its fullyactuated position may be referred to herein as its “closure strokelength” or a “first closure distance”. Similarly, when a firing systemin the handle assembly or robotic system is fully actuated, one of thefiring system components may move axially from its unactuated positionto its fully actuated or fired position. The axial distance that thefiring member component moves between its unactuated position and itsfully fired position may be referred to herein as its “firing strokelength” or “first firing distance”. For those surgical tool assembliesthat employ articulatable end effector arrangements, the handle assemblyor robotic system may employ articulation control components that moveaxially through an “articulation drive stroke length” or a “firstarticulation distance”. In many circumstances, the closure strokelength, the firing stroke length and the articulation drive strokelength are fixed for a particular handle assembly or robotic system.Thus, each of the interchangeable surgical tool assemblies that areconfigured to be used in connection with such control units or systemsmust be able to accommodate control movements of the closure, firingand/or articulation components/actuators through each of their entirestroke lengths without placing undue stress on the surgical toolcomponents which might lead to damage or catastrophic failure ofsurgical tool assembly. Examples of surgical tool assemblies that havearrangements for reducing the axial closure stroke of an actuator systemare disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 15/019,245, filed Feb.9, 2016, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH CLOSURE STROKE REDUCTIONARRANGEMENTS, the entire disclosure of which is hereby incorporated byreference herein. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/574,478, entitledSURGICAL INSTRUMENT SYSTEMS COMPRISING AN ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTOR ANDMEANS FOR ADJUSTING THE FIRING STROKE OF A FIRING MEMBER disclosesarrangements for adjusting the firing stroke of a firing member.

Depending upon the jaw arrangement of the end effector portion of theinterchangeable surgical tool assembly that is operably coupled to thehandle assembly 500, the closure drive system 510 in the handle assembly500, when fully actuated, may generate a closure stroke or first axialclosure distance that is too long for such a jaw arrangement. Theillustrated embodiment of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly1000 employs a closure stroke reduction assembly generally designated as1720 to reduce the amount of closure stroke that is applied to the endeffector when the closure drive system 510 is fully actuated. Forexample, the closure drive system 510 in one form of the handle assembly500 may generate axial closure motions so as to move the closureactuator (e.g., the closure linkage 514—FIG. 2) or closure actuatorassembly (e.g., the closure linkage 514, and the closure shuttle 1420)axially forward and backward about 0.240″-0.260″. Such axial controltravel may be well-suited for surgical end effectors that are equippedwith an anvil or jaw arrangement that moves distally relative to thechannel or jaw arrangements to which they are attached. Because the jawsare pivotally coupled together about a fixed jaw axis JA, they may bebetter suited for a shorter closure stroke. Stated another way, theanvil 1130 does not move distally relative to the elongate channel 1102.For example, such arrangement may be better suited for a closure strokerange of approximately 0.1″-0.150″. As will be discussed in furtherdetail below, upon full actuation of the closure drive system 510 in thehandle assembly 500, the closure shuttle 1420 and the proximal closuremember 1480 may move approximately the 0.260″ in the distal direction DD(“first closure stroke distance”). However, the closure stroke reductionassembly 1720 reduces the amount of closure stroke that is applied tothe intermediate closure member 1410 and ultimately to the distalclosure member 1430 (“second closure stroke distance”). In somearrangements, for example, the closure stroke reduction assembly 1720may reduce the magnitude of the closure stroke that is applied to theintermediate closure member 1410 and distal closure member 1430 toapproximately 0.1″, for example. It will be appreciated that otheramounts of closure stroke reduction could conceivably be achieved.

Referring now to FIGS. 12A and 12B, in one form, the closure strokereduction assembly 1720 includes a closure reduction linkage 1730 thatis attached to a closure member mounting member or mounting ring 1740.As can be seen in FIGS. 6, 12A and 12B, the intermediate closure member1410 has a proximal attachment flange 1414 that is formed on a proximalend portion 1412. The mounting ring 1740 is sized to slidably movewithin the proximal closure member 1480 and includes a mounting groove1742 for receiving the attachment flange 1414 therein. Such arrangementserves to attach the mounting ring 1740 to the intermediate closuremember 1410. In the illustrated embodiment, the closure reductionlinkage 1730 comprises a proximal link 1732 and a distal link 1734 thatare pivotally attached together by an actuator pin 1736. The proximallink 1732 is pivotally pinned to an upstanding attachment wall 1518 thatis formed on the proximal spine channel 1510. The distal link 1734 ispivotally pinned to the mounting ring 1740. The closure reductionlinkage 1730 is actuated by axially moving the proximal closure member1480. In at least one arrangement, for example, the actuator pin 1736 isslidably journaled in a cam slot 1486 that is provided in the proximalclosure member 1480. The actuator pin 1736 also extends inwardly to beslidably received within a slide track 1658 that is formed on a proximalend portion of the lock sleeve 1650. Thus, when the proximal closuremember 1480 is moved to its distal-most position, the actuator pin 1736is in the proximal end of the cam slot 1486 such that the closurereduction linkage 1730 is in its fully extended position as shown inFIGS. 12B and 14. When the proximal closure member 1480 is in itsproximal-most position, the closure reduction linkage 1730 is in itsretracted position (FIGS. 12A and 13).

As was briefly discussed above, the shift plate assembly 1680 comprisesa body portion 1681 that has a shift pin 1682 that laterally protrudestherefrom. The shift pin 1682 extends into a shift pin slot 1662 that isprovided through a wall portion of the switch drum 1660. The shift pin1682 also extends through a cam opening 1490 that is provided in theproximal closure member 1480. See FIGS. 10 and 11. The cam opening 1490in the illustrated arrangement includes a travel portion 1492 that issufficiently long enough so as to permit a predetermined amount of axialtravel of the proximal closure member assembly 1480 relative to theshift pin 1682 and a firing portion 1494. In at least one arrangement,the shift plate 1680 is constrained to only rotate a short distancearound the shaft axis SA and is constrained not to move axially withinthe switch drum 1660. This rotary travel of the shift plate 1680 and theshift pin 1682 may be observed from reference to FIGS. 8-11.

FIGS. 8, 10 and 12A illustrate the clutch assembly 1640 in thearticulation mode and FIGS. 9, 11 and 12B, illustrate the clutchassembly 1640 in the firing mode. The clutch assembly 1640 is moved fromthe articulation mode to the firing mode by moving the proximal closuremember 1480 to it distal-most position which corresponds to a “fullyclosed” position of the end effector jaws (elongate channel 1102 andanvil 1130). The proximal closure member 1480 is moved distally bydepressing the closure trigger 512 on the handle assembly 500. Asdiscussed above, when the closure trigger 512 is depressed, the closureshuttle 1420 is advanced distally. Because the proximal closure member1480 is supported in the closure shuttle 1420, the proximal closuremember 1480 moves distally as well. When the clutch assembly 1640 is inthe articulation mode, the shift pin 1682 is located about midway(lengthwise) within the travel portion 1492 of the cam opening 1490 inthe proximal closure member 1480. Thus, the proximal closure member 1480can be moved back and forth axially (by means of depressing and at leastpartially releasing the closure trigger 512) a short distance toeffectively move the jaws (anvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102) betweenopen and closed positions without moving the clutch assembly 1640 intothe firing mode. Thus, the clinician can use the jaws to grasp andmanipulate tissue without moving the jaws to a fully closed position andwithout shifting the clutch assembly 1640 to the firing mode. However,when the clinician desires to fully close the jaws, the clinician fullydepresses the closure trigger 512 to the fully actuated position. Thisaction causes the proximal closure member 1480 to move to itsdistal-most axial position. See FIGS. 9, 11 and 12B. When the proximalclosure member 1480 moves to this position, the proximal cam wall 1491of the cam opening 1490 contacts the shift pin 1682 and cams the shiftpin 1682 (and the shift plate 1680) to the firing orientation shown inFIGS. 9 and 11. In the illustrated embodiment, a torsional shift spring1667 is journaled on the switch drum 1660 and is configured to bias theswitch drum 1660 into the position corresponding to the articulationmode. See FIG. 10. The shift pin 1682 is in the bottom of the shift pinslot 1662 in the switch drum 1660 and is thereby moved to thearticulation position shown in FIG. 10. To apply the torsional biasingforce to the switch drum 1660, one end 1668 of the torsion spring 1667is attached to the switch drum 1660 and the other end 1669 is attachedto nozzle 1301. Further details concerning the operation of the clutchassembly 1640 and the closure stroke reduction assembly 1720 areprovided below.

FIG. 12A illustrates the positions of the closure stroke reductionassembly 1730 and the intermediate closure member 1410 when the proximalclosure member 1480 is in an unactuated position. This “unactuated”position may correspond to the orientations of the jaws of the surgicalend effector when the jaws are in their respective “fully opened”positions. For reference purposes, the unactuated position of theproximal closure member 1480 is represented by a starting witness lineSWL_(p) and the unactuated position of the intermediate closure member1410 is represented by starting witness line SWL_(i). FIG. 12Billustrates the positions of the of the closure stroke reductionassembly 1730 and the intermediate closure member 1410 when the proximalclosure member 1480 is in a fully actuated position which may correspondto the orientations of the jaws of the surgical end effector when thejaws are in their respective “fully closed” positions. As was brieflydiscussed above, when the proximal closure member 1480 is in the fullyactuated position, actuation of the firing trigger 532 will cause thefiring member assembly 1600 to be advanced distally. For referencepurposes, the fully actuated position of the proximal closure segment1480 is represented by an ending witness line EWL_(p). The fullyactuated position of the intermediate closure member 1410 is representedby a ending witness line EWL_(i). The axial distance that the proximalclosure member 1480 traveled between the unactuated position and thefully actuated position is represented by distance D₁. In one example,D₁ may be approximately 0.260″. The axial distance that the intermediateclosure member 1410 (and ultimately the distal closure member 1430)traveled between the unactuated position and the fully actuated positionis represented by distance D₂. As can be seen in FIGS. 12A and 12B,D₁>D₂. In the above-referenced example, D₂ may be approximately 0.1″.Thus, the intermediate closure member 1410 and the distal closure member1430 traveled a shorter axial distance than did the proximal closuremember 1480. Such arrangement permits the jaw arrangements of thesurgical end effector 1100 to better utilize the closure motionsgenerated by the closure drive system 510 in the handle assembly 500 andavoid potential damage that might otherwise result if the full range ofclosure motions were applied to the end effector.

Referring again to FIGS. 2 and 6, the chassis 1800 includes at leastone, and preferably two, tapered attachment portions 1802 that areformed thereon and are adapted to be received within correspondingdovetail slots 507 that are formed within the distal end portion of theframe 506 of the handle assembly 500. As can be further seen in FIG. 2,a shaft attachment lug 1606 is formed on the proximal end of theproximal firing shaft segment 1602. As will be discussed in furtherdetail below, when the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 iscoupled to the handle assembly 500, the shaft attachment lug 1606 isreceived in a firing shaft attachment cradle 542 that is formed in thedistal end of the longitudinal drive member 540. See FIG. 2.

The interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 employs a latch system1810 for removably coupling the interchangeable surgical tool assembly1000 to the frame 506 of the handle assembly 500. As can be seen in FIG.5, for example, in at least one form, the latch system 1810 includes alock member or lock yoke 1812 that is movably coupled to the chassis1800. In the illustrated embodiment, for example, the lock yoke 1812 hasa U-shape and includes two downwardly extending legs 1814. The legs 1814each have a pivot lug (not shown) formed thereon that is adapted to bereceived in corresponding holes 1816 that are formed in the chassis1800. Such arrangement facilitates pivotal attachment of the lock yoke1812 to the chassis 1800. See FIG. 6. The lock yoke 1812 may include twoproximally protruding lock lugs 1818 that are configured for releasableengagement with corresponding lock detents or grooves 509 in the distalend of the frame 506 of the handle assembly 500. See FIG. 2. In variousforms, the lock yoke 1812 is biased in the proximal direction by aspring or biasing member 1819. Actuation of the lock yoke 1812 may beaccomplished by a latch button 1820 that is slidably mounted on a latchactuator assembly 1822 that is mounted to the chassis 1800. The latchbutton 1820 may be biased in a proximal direction relative to the lockyoke 1812. The lock yoke 1812 may be moved to an unlocked position bybiasing the latch button 1820 the in distal direction which also causesthe lock yoke 1812 to pivot out of retaining engagement with the distalend of the frame 506. When the lock yoke 1812 is in “retainingengagement” with the distal end of the frame 506, the lock lugs 1818 areretainingly seated within the corresponding lock detents or grooves 509in the distal end of the frame 506.

In the illustrated arrangement, the lock yoke 1812 includes at least oneand preferably two lock hooks 1824 that are adapted to contactcorresponding lock lug portions 1426 that are formed on the closureshuttle 1420. When the closure shuttle 1420 is in an unactuatedposition, the lock yoke 1812 may be pivoted in a distal direction tounlock the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 from the handleassembly 500. When in that position, the lock hooks 1824 do not contactthe lock lug portions 1426 on the closure shuttle 1420. However, whenthe closure shuttle 1420 is moved to an actuated position, the lock yoke1812 is prevented from being pivoted to an unlocked position. Statedanother way, if the clinician were to attempt to pivot the lock yoke1812 to an unlocked position or, for example, the lock yoke 1812 was inadvertently bumped or contacted in a manner that might otherwise causeit to pivot distally, the lock hooks 1824 on the lock yoke 1812 willcontact the lock lugs 1426 on the closure shuttle 1420 and preventmovement of the lock yoke 1812 to an unlocked position. See FIG. 5.Further details concerning the latching system may be found in U.S.Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263541.

Attachment of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 to thehandle assembly 500 will now be described with reference to FIG. 2. Tocommence the coupling process, the clinician may position the chassis1800 of the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 above oradjacent to the distal end of the frame 506 such that the taperedattachment portions 1802 formed on the chassis 1800 are aligned with thedovetail slots 507 in the frame 506. The clinician may then move thesurgical tool assembly 1000 along an installation axis IA that isperpendicular to the shaft axis SA to seat the tapered attachmentportions 1802 in “operable engagement” with the corresponding dovetailreceiving slots 507 in the distal end of the frame 506. In doing so, theshaft attachment lug 1606 on the proximal firing shaft segment 1602 willalso be seated in the cradle 542 in the longitudinally movable drivemember 540 and the portions of pin 516 on the closure link 514 will beseated in the corresponding hooks 1421 in the closure shuttle 1420. Asused herein, the term “operable engagement” in the context of twocomponents means that the two components are sufficiently engaged witheach other so that upon application of an actuation motion thereto, thecomponents may carry out their intended action, function and/orprocedure.

Referring again to FIG. 4, the distal firing bar 1620 may comprise alaminated beam structure that includes at least two beam layers. Suchbeam layers may comprise, for example, stainless steel bands that areinterconnected by, for example, welding or pinning together at theirproximal ends and/or at other locations along their length. Inalternative embodiments, the distal ends of the bands are not connectedtogether to allow the laminates or bands to splay relative to each otherwhen the end effector is articulated. Such arrangement permits thedistal firing bar 1620 to be sufficiently flexible to accommodatearticulation of the end effector. Various laminated knife bararrangements are disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser. No.15/019,245. As can also be seen in FIG. 4, a middle support member 1614is employed to provide lateral support to the distal firing bar 1620 asit flexes to accommodate articulation of the surgical end effector 1100.Further details concerning the middle support member and alternativeknife bar support arrangements are disclosed in U.S. patent applicationSer. No. 15/019,245.

After the interchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 has been operablycoupled to the handle assembly 500 (FIG. 1), the clinician may operatethe surgical tool assembly 10 as follows. As discussed above, when theclosure drive system 510 is in its unactuated position (i.e., theclosure trigger 512 has not been actuated), the torsion spring 1667 hasbiased the clutch assembly 1640 and, more particularly, the switch pin1682 and the lock sleeve 1650 into the articulation position. See FIGS.8, 10 and 12A. As can be seen in FIG. 8, when in that position, the lockprotrusions 1654 in the lock sleeve 1650 are received within the drivenotch 1603 in the proximal firing shaft segment 1602. As can be seen inFIG. 10, when in that mode, the articulation magnet 1708 is in positionrelative to the Hall effect sensor 1632 so as to indicate to themicrocontroller 520 that the tool assembly 1000 is in the articulationmode. When the clinician actuates the firing trigger 512, the motordrives the proximal firing shaft segment 1602 distally. As mentionedabove, however, the slip joint 1622 facilitates movement of the proximalfiring shaft segment 1602 and the intermediate firing shaft segment 1610without moving, or at least substantially moving, the distal firing bar1620. Because the lock sleeve 1650 is in operable engagement with theproximal firing shaft segment 1602 and the proximal articulation driver1700 is in engagement with the lock sleeve 1650, actuation of theproximal firing shaft segment 1602 results in the distal movement of thearticulation driver 1700. Distal movement of the articulation driver1700 causes the surgical end effector 1000 to articulate around thearticulation axis B-B. During this time, the clinician can alsopartially close the jaws of the end effector 1100 by partiallydepressing the closure trigger. Such axial movement of the proximalclosure member 1480 without automatically shifting the clutch assembly1640 to the firing mode is accommodated by the travel portion 1492 ofthe cam opening 1490 in the proximal closure member 1480. See FIG. 10.This feature enables the clinician to use the jaws to grasp andmanipulate tissue prior to clamping onto the target tissue.

Once the clinician has articulated the end effector 1100 into a desiredposition and the jaws have been positioned in a desired orientationrelative to the target tissue, the clinician releases the firing trigger532 which will discontinue the motorized movement of the proximal firingshaft segment 1602 as well as the proximal articulation driver 1700. Thearticulation lock 1210 will lock the proximal articulation driver 1700in that position to prevent further articulation of the end effector1100. The clinician may clamp the target tissue between the jaws bydepressing the closure trigger 512 to the fully depressed position. Suchaction moves the proximal closure member 1480 distally. Such distalmovement of the proximal closure member 1480 causes the switch pin 1682to rotate downward within the cam opening 1490 as it is contacted by thecam wall 1491. See FIG. 11. Referring now to FIG. 11, movement of theshift pin 1682 downwardly within cam opening 1490 causes the shift plate1680 to rotate the lock sleeve 1650 to rotate to a disengaged positionwith the proximal firing shaft segment 1602. When in that position, thelock protrusions 1654 have disengaged from the drive notch 1603 in theproximal firing shaft segment 1602. Thus, the proximal firing shaftsegment 1602 can move axially without moving the lock sleeve 1650 andthe proximal articulation driver 1700. As the proximal closure member1480 is moved distally to the fully actuated position (by depressing theclosure trigger 512), the closure stroke reduction assembly 1730 movesthe intermediate closure member 1410 distally a reduced axial distanceas was discussed above. This axial motion is applied to the distalclosure member 1430 and ultimately moves the jaws to the fully closedposition. When in this position, the closure drive system 510 system inthe handle assembly 500 may be locked and the clinician can release theclosure trigger 512. When the clutch assembly 1640 has been moved tothis firing mode, the firing magnet 1611 is in communication with theHall effect sensor 1632 to indicate the position of the clutch assembly1640 to the microcontroller 520. See FIG. 11. The microcontroller 520may provide the clinician with an indication of the position of thedistal firing bar 1620 as it is advanced distally through the targettissue that is clamped between the end effector jaws. Once the distalfiring bar 1620 and, more specifically, the firing member or knifemember attached thereto has been advanced to a fully fired position, themicrocontroller 520, by means of sensor arrangements, detects theposition of a portion of the firing member assembly 1600 and may thenreverse the motor to retract the distal firing bar 1620 to its startingposition. This action may be automatic or the clinician may have todepress the firing trigger 532 during the retraction process. Once thedistal firing bar 1620 has been fully retracted to its startingposition, the microcontroller 520 may provide the clinician with anindication that the distal firing bar 1620 has been fully retracted andthe closure trigger 512 may be unlocked to enable the closure assembly1406 to be returned to the unactuated position which thereby moves thejaws to the open position.

In the embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the anvil assembly1130 includes an anvil body portion 1132 and an anvil mounting portion1134. The anvil mounting portion 1134 comprises a pair of anvil mountingwalls 1136 that are separated by a slot 1138 (FIG. 4). The anvilmounting walls 1136 are interconnected or bridged by an upstanding tabportion 1139. As discussed above, the end effector mounting assembly1230 is pivotally attached to the proximal end 1103 of the elongatechannel 1102 by a pair of laterally extending jaw attachment pins 1235that are rotatably received within jaw pivot holes 1104 that areprovided in the proximal end 1103 of the elongate channel 1102. The jawattachment pins 1235 define a fixed jaw pivot axis JA that issubstantially traverse to the shaft axis SA. See FIG. 4. Each of theanvil mounting walls 1136 has a mounting hole 1140 extendingtherethrough to enable the anvil mounting portion 1134 to be pivotallyjournaled on the jaw attachment pins 1235. Thus, in such arrangement,the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102 are independently pivotableabout the fixed jaw pivot axis JA. Such arrangement may permit the anvil1130 and elongate channel 1102 (the “jaws”) to be opened to positionsthat may be wider than those open positions that may be attained by thejaws of other end effector arrangements wherein only one of the jawsmoves relative to the other jaw.

Still referring to FIGS. 15A and 15B, the distal closure member 1430includes two inwardly extending jaw opening pins 1432 that are adaptedto extend through corresponding channel opening cam slots 1106 providedin the proximal end 1103 of the elongate channel 1102. Each jaw openingpin 1432 is configured to engage a corresponding anvil opening camsurface 1142 that is formed on each anvil mounting wall 1136. As can beseen in FIGS. 15A and 15B, the anvil opening cam surfaces 1142 areopposed or arranged in an opposite configuration as the correspondingchannel opening cam slots 1106. Stated another way, the channel openingcam slots 1106 and the anvil opening cam surfaces 1142 curve in oppositedirections from each other.

FIG. 15A illustrates the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102 (the“jaws”) in the fully closed position. As the distal closure member 1430is advanced distally, the distal end 1431 of the distal closure member1430 travels up closure cam surfaces 1137 formed on each of the anvilmounting walls 1136 as well as up closure cam surfaces 1108 formed onthe proximal end 1103 of the elongate channel 1102. As the distal end1431 of the distal closure member 1430 cammingly contacts the closurecam surfaces 1137, 1108, the anvil 1130 as well as the elongate channel1102 are both pivoted about the jaw pivot axis JA to the closed positionat which point the distal end 1431 of the distal closure member 1430contacts a ledge portion 1133 that is formed between the anvil mountingportion 1134 and the anvil body portion 1132 as well as a ledge 1145 onthe elongate channel. See FIG. 15A. When the closure member assembly1400 is locked in position, the distal closure member 1430 retains theanvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102 in that closed position. When theclinician desires to move the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102to the open position, the distal closure member 1430 is moved in theproximal direction PD. As the distal closure member 1430 is moved in theproximal direction PD, the jaw opening pins 1432 engage thecorresponding channel opening cam slots 1106 and the anvil opening camsurfaces 1142 and pivots the anvil 1130 and elongate channel about thefixed jaw axis JA to the open position shown in FIG. 15B. Such use ofpins of features on the distal closure member to effectuate movement ofboth jaws from a fully closed position to a fully open position may bereferred to herein as “positive jaw opening” features. Other positivejaw opening arrangements are disclosed in U.S. patent application Ser.No. 14/742,925, entitled SURGICAL END EFFECTORS WITH POSITIVE JAWOPENING ARRANGEMENTS, which has been incorporated by reference in itsentirety herein.

FIGS. 16-21 Illustrate an alternative distal closure member 1430′ thatemploys alternative positive jaw opening features in the form of, forexample, movable jaw opening cams 1440 that are attached to the distalclosure member 1430′ in place of the jaw opening pins. At least one andpreferably two jaw opening cams 1440 are movably attached to the distalclosure member 1430′ by a corresponding stretchable coupler 1450. In theillustrated embodiment, the coupler 1450 comprises a cam or tensionspring. In the illustrated arrangement, the tension spring 1454comprises flat spring to save space. A proximal end of each tensionspring 1450 has a hook 1452 formed thereon that extends through anopening 1442 in the distal closure member 1430′. An end of each hook1452 may be seated in a corresponding slot or groove 1444 that is formedin the distal closure member 1430′ as shown in FIG. 16. A distal end1455 of each tension spring 1454 is attached to the corresponding jawopening cam 1440. The proximal end 1103 of the elongate channel 1102includes a pair of spring clearance slots 1106′ and channel opening camsurfaces 1107 that are configured to be engaged by the jaw opening cams1440. In alternative arrangements, the spring could include maximumextension features that only allow a predetermined amount of complianceand then assure jaw opening that is proportionate to the remainingclosure trigger travel and therefore closure shuttle motion. Asindicated above, each of the anvil mounting walls 1136 has an anvilopening cam surface 1142 formed thereon. As can be seen in FIG. 19, theanvil opening cam surfaces 1142 are opposed or arranged in an oppositeconfiguration as the corresponding channel opening cam surface 1107.Stated another way, the channel opening cam surface 1107 and the anvilopening cam surfaces 1142 are arcuate and curve in opposite directions.

FIGS. 20 and 21 illustrate the anvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102 intheir respective fully opened positions. As can be seen in each of thoseFigures, the jaw opening cams 1440 are oriented between thecorresponding anvil opening cam surface 1142 and the channel opening camsurface 1107 and are in their proximal-most positions. When in the fullyopened positions, the jaw opening cams 1440 are located distal to thedistal end of the distal closure member 1430′. As can be seen in FIGS.19 and 20, the jaw opening cams 1440 may be wedge-shaped. In at leastone arrangement, the wedge geometry has a gradual cam surface on theproximal side to prevent biding between the jaws. When in that fullyopen position, the tension springs 1454 are in their starting positionwherein the tension springs 1454 are applying their smallest amount ofbiasing force to each of the jaw opening cams 1440. Upon commencement ofthe closing process, the distal closure member 1430′ is advanceddistally in the various manners described herein. As the distal closuremember 1430′ is advanced distally, the distal end 1431 contacts theclosure cam surfaces 1137 on the anvil mounting portion 1134 and closurecam surfaces 1108 that are formed on the proximal end 1103 of theelongate channel 1102 to pivot the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel1102 toward each other about the pivot jaw axis JA. As the anvil 1130and the elongate channel 1102 are pivoted toward each other, the jawopening cams 1440 that are riding on cam surfaces 1142 and 1104 aredriven in the distal direction. As the jaw opening cams 1440 are drivendistally, the tension springs 1454 are elongated and “loaded”.

FIGS. 18 and 19 depict the anvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102 in theirfully closed positions. When the clinician desires to return the anvil1130 and elongate channel 1102 to their fully open positions (FIGS. 20and 21), the distal closure member 1430′ is withdrawn in the proximaldirection which permits the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102 topivot away from each other about the pivot jaw axis JA. Because thetension springs 1454 are elongated and loaded, they draw each of the jawopening cams 1440 in the proximal direction. As the jaw opening cams1440 move in the proximal direction PD between the cam surfaces 1142 and1107, the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102 are positively movedto the fully opened position and retained therein by the jaw openingcams 1440. The more that the distal closure member is moved proximally,the more the jaws are urged away from each other. Such compliantpositive jaw opening arrangements may assure direct one-to-one finalpull open to provide more opening force if stuck.

FIGS. 22-25 Illustrate an alternative distal closure member 1430″ thatemploys jaw opening tabs as well as at least one jaw opening spring 1460to move the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102′ into theirrespective fully opened positions. As can be seen in FIGS. 24 and 25,the distal closure member 1430″ is similar to distal closure member 1430as described above, except that distal closure member 1430″ additionallyincludes an anvil open tab 1435 and a channel open tab 1437. As shown inFIG. 24, when the distal closure member 1430″ has been moved to itsproximal most position corresponding to the fully opened position, theanvil open tab 1435 is in contact with the tab 1139 on the anvilmounting portion 1134 and the channel opening tab is in contact with achannel tab 1109 protruding from the underside of the proximal endportion 1103 of the elongate channel 1102′.

The embodiment depicted in FIGS. 22, 24 and 25 also employs a positivejaw opening member which may comprise a jaw opening spring 1460. As canbe seen in FIG. 23, in the illustrated arrangement, the jaw openingspring 1460 includes an anvil opening leg 1462 and a channel opening leg1464 that are attached by a bridge portion 1463. The spring 1460 may bejournaled on the jaw attachment pins 1235 as shown in FIGS. 22, 24 and25 such that the anvil opening leg 1462 bears on a bottom surface of theanvil mounting portion 1134 and the channel opening leg 1464 bears on abottom surface of the proximal end 1103 of the elongate channel 1102′.Thus, the jaw opening spring 1460 serves to apply biasing forces to theanvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102′ to pivot them away from eachother to open positions. FIG. 25 illustrates the anvil 1130 and theelongate channel 1102′ in the fully closed position. As can be seen inFIG. 25, the jaw opening spring 1460 is in its fully compressed state.To open the anvil and channel 1102′, the distal closure member 1430″ ismoved in the proximal direction PD in the various manners disclosedherein. As the distal closure member 1430″ moves proximally, the jawopening spring 1460 positively biases the anvil 1130 and the elongatechannel 1102′ away from each other about the pivot axis JA to the fullyopen position wherein the anvil opening tab 1435 engages the tab 1139 onthe anvil mounting portion 1134 and the channel opening tab 1437 engagesthe channel tab 1109. See FIG. 24. In at least one arrangement, the jawopening spring is mounted proximal to the firing member parking area(i.e., the area where the firing member resides when in the startingposition).

FIGS. 26-29 Illustrate an alternative distal closure member 1470 thatemploys slot arrangements in the elongate channel and closure memberthat are configured to move an anvil 1130″ between a fully open positionand a fully closed position. In the illustrated arrangement, the distalclosure member 1470 is similar to distal closure member 1430 asdescribed above, except for the differences discussed below. In thisarrangement, however, only the anvil 1130″ moves relative to theelongate channel 1102″. As can be seen in FIGS. 26-29, the anvilmounting portion 1134 of the anvil 1130″ includes two outwardlyextending anvil pins 1150 that extend through corresponding channelslots 1472 provided in the proximal end 1103 of the elongate channel1102″. Each anvil pin 1150 also extends into corresponding closure slots1474 in the distal closure member 1470. In the illustrated arrangement,each of the channel slots 1472 extends along a vertical axis VA. Theanvil pins 1150 define a pivot axis PA about which the anvil 1130″ maypivot. Because the anvil pins 1150 are constrained to only move withinthe vertically extending channel slots 1472, the pivot axis PA isconstrained to only move along the vertical axis VA. Each closure slot1474 has a proximal portion 1476 and a distal portion 1478. The proximalportion 1476 lies along a first horizontal axis HA₁ and the distalportion 1478 lies along a second horizontal axis HA₂ that is offset fromthe first horizontal axis HA₁. See FIG. 26. Vertical axis VA istransverse to the first and second horizontal axes HA₁ and HA₂.

FIG. 26 illustrates the positions of the anvil 1130″ and the elongatechannel 1102″ when in the fully open position. As can be seen in FIG.26, when in that position, the anvil pins 1150 are located at the topend of the channel slot 1472 (“first vertical positions”) as well as inthe distal portion 1478 of the closure slots 1474. FIG. 27 illustratesthe positions of the anvil 1130″ and the elongate channel 1102″ afterthe closure process has been commenced. As can be seen in FIG. 27, thedistal closure member 1470 has begun to move distally so that the anvilpins 1150 are just about to enter the proximal portion 1476 of theclosure slots and the pins have begun to move downward in the channelslots 1472. In FIG. 28, the distal closure member 1470 has moveddistally to a point wherein the anvil pins 1150 are at the bottom endsof the channel slots 1472 and the anvil pins 1150 have now entered theproximal portions 1476 of the closure slots 1474. Thus the anvilmounting portion 1134 has moved downward toward the elongate channel1102″. FIG. 29 illustrates the anvil 1130″ and the elongate channelanvil 1102″ in their fully closed positions. As can be seen in FIG. 29,the anvil pins 1150 are retained in the bottom ends of the channel slots1472 (“second vertical positions”) and are also received within theproximal portions 1476 of the closure slots 1474. The anvil 1130″ andelongate channel 1102″ are retained in that fully closed position whilethe distal closure member 1470 is retained in that position. As can beseen in FIG. 29, such arrangement facilitates the vertical travel of theanvil mounting portion 1134 relative to the channel 1102″ therebyincreasing the distance between the underside of the anvil and thecartridge deck when in the fully opened position. Such redundant linkagearrangement may allow for the adjustment of the proximal distancebetween the anvil and the cartridge deck adjacent the tissue stops.Another cartridge embodiment may include a metallic camming terminationfeature proximal to the sled start location. Such metallic feature maysupport or hold the sled in the “ready-to-use” position while preventingthe collapse of the tail.

FIGS. 30-32 illustrate one form of a firing member 1760 that may beemployed with the interchangeable tool assembly 1000. In one exemplaryform, the firing member 1760 comprises a body portion 1762 that includesa proximally extending connector member 1763 that is configured to bereceived in a correspondingly shaped connector opening 1624 (FIG. 4) inthe distal end of the distal firing bar 1620. The connector 1763 may beretained within the connector opening 1624 by friction and/or welding orsuitable adhesive, etc. In use, the body portion 1762 protrudes throughan elongate slot 1160 in the elongate channel 1102. A laterallyextending foot tab 1764 extends from each lateral side of the bodyportion 1762. Each foot tab 1764 includes a proximal end 1765 that has athickness PE_(f) and a distal end 1767 that has a thickness DE_(f). Suchconfiguration also defines an upper foot surface 1768 and a lower footsurface 1769. In the illustrated reference the upper foot surface 1768and the lower foot surface 1769 angle away from each other. In FIG. 31,the upper foot surface 1768 is parallel to the upper axis U_(A) and thelower foot surface 1769 is parallel to lower axis U_(L) with an angleA_(F) therebetween. Stated another way, the distal thickness DE_(f)>theproximal thickness PE_(f). Thus, each of the foot tabs 1764 taper inthickness from their respective distal end 1767 to their proximal end1765 with the proximal end being thinner.

Still referring primarily to FIG. 31, the illustrated firing member 1760also includes a pair of laterally extending top tabs 1770. Each top tab1770 includes a proximal end 1772 that has a thickness PE_(T) and adistal end 1774 that has a thickness DE_(T). Such configuration alsodefines a top surface 1776 and a bottom surface 1778. In the illustratedreference the top surface 1776 and the bottom surface 1778 angle awayfrom each other. In FIG. 31, the top surface 1776 is parallel to anupper axis T_(A) and the bottom surface 1778 is parallel to a bottomaxis B_(L) with an angle A_(T) therebetween. Stated another way, adistal thickness DE_(T) of each top tab 1770 is greater than proximalthickness PE_(T) thereof. Thus, each of the top tabs 1770 taper inthickness from their respective distal end 1774 to their proximal end1772 with the proximal end 1772 being thinner. In the illustratedarrangement angle A_(F) may be approximately equal to angle A_(T). Inaddition, the top surface 1776 of each of the top tabs 1770 may be adistance H_(F) from the lower foot surface 1769 of each correspondingfoot tab 1764 between the distal ends 1774, 1765, respectively and alsobe a distance H_(R) from each other at their respective proximal ends1772, 1767. In the illustrated arrangement, H_(F)>H_(R). Thus, the topsurface 1776 of each top tab 1770 angles away from the shaft axis SA andeach lower foot surface 1769 of each foot tab 1764 angles away from theshaft axis SA. The illustrated firing member 1760 further includeslaterally protruding central lock lugs 1780 which will be discussed infurther detail below. The body portion 1762 of the firing member 1760further includes a tissue cutting edge or feature 1766 that is disposedbetween a distally protruding bottom portion 1771 and a distallyprotruding top nose portion 1773.

In the illustrated example, the cartridge body 1111 operably supportstherein a plurality of staple drivers that are aligned in rows on eachside of a centrally disposed slot 1114. FIGS. 33A-33C illustrate oneexample of a staple driver 1170 that may be employed to support stapleson one side of a surgical staple cartridge. The drivers located on theopposite side of the centrally disposed slot 1114 may comprise mirrorimages of drivers 1170. Other staple driver configurations may also beeffectively employed as well. As can be seen in FIGS. 33A-33C, one formof a staple driver 1700 comprises a staple driver body 1172. The driverbody 1172 includes a first or innermost staple support portion 1174 thatis configured to support a staple (not shown) thereon. A second orcentral staple support portion 1176 is configured to support anotherstaple (not shown) thereon and a third support portion 1870 that isconfigured to support a third staple (not shown) thereon. The firststaple support portion 1174, the second staple support portion 1176 andthe third staple support portion 1178 are all coupled together by aconnector portion 1180. In at least one arrangement, the connectorportion 1180 is formed with a centrally disposed opening or aperture1182 that is configured to slidably receive a corresponding first driverguide (not shown) that is formed in the cartridge body. The connectorportion 1180 includes a first cam portion 1184 that has a first cammingsurface or ramp 1186 formed thereon. The connector portion 1180 alsoincludes a second cam portion 1188 that has a second a second cammingsurface 1190 formed thereon. The camming surfaces 1186, 1190 have thesame slope or angle or they may have different slopes/angles. In atleast one embodiment, each staple driver 1170 is integrally formed fromor molded from, for example, Ultem®, with no fill. However, othermaterials such as, for example, Ultem® with a glass or mineral fill orNylon or Nylon with a glass file could be used. In other arrangements,the various portions of the staple drivers 1170 may be separatelyfabricated from other materials and be attached together by adhesive,solder, etc. Further details concerning the staple drivers 1170 as wellas other driver embodiments that may be effectively employed with thevarious embodiments disclosed herein may be found in U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 14/843,243, filed Sep. 2, 2015, entitled SURGICALSTAPLE CONFIGURATIONS WITH CAMMING SURFACES LOCATED BETWEEN

PORTIONS SUPPORTING SURGICAL STAPLES, the entire disclosure of which ishereby incorporated by reference herein.

Turning next to FIGS. 33, 36 and 37, the firing member 1760 isconfigured to operably interface with a sled assembly 1120 that isoperably supported within the body 1111 of the surgical staple cartridge1110. The sled assembly 1120 is slidably displaceable within thesurgical staple cartridge body 1111 from a proximal starting positionadjacent the proximal end 1112 of the cartridge body 1111 to an endingposition adjacent the distal end 1113 of the cartridge body 1111. SeeFIG. 4. The centrally disposed slot 1114 enables the firing member 1760to pass therethrough and cut the tissue that is clamped between theanvil 1130 and the staple cartridge 1110. The drivers 1170 areassociated with corresponding pockets 1116 that open through the upperdeck surface 1115 of the cartridge body 1111. The sled assembly 1120includes a plurality of sloped or wedge-shaped cams 1122 wherein eachcam 1122 corresponds to a particular camming surface 1186, 1190 on thecorresponding drivers 1170 located on each side of the slot 1114. Whenthe firing member 1760 is fired or driven distally, the firing member1760 drives the sled assembly 1120 distally as well. As the firingmember 1760 moves distally through the cartridge 1110, the tissuecutting feature 1766 cuts the tissue that is clamped between the anvilassembly 1130 and the cartridge 1110 and the sled assembly 1120 drivesthe drivers 1170 upwardly in the cartridge which drive the correspondingstaples or fasteners into forming contact with the anvil assembly 1130.In the illustrated example, the body portion 1762 of the firing member1760 is configured to engage with the distal end of the sled assembly1120. In particular, in at least one example, as shown in FIG. 33, thedistal end of the body portion 1762 is oriented to simply contact theproximal end of the center portion of the sled 1120. In other firingmember arrangements, the firing member body 1762 may be uniquely shapedor configured to operably mesh, mate or operably interface with thecorresponding end portion of the sled assembly contained within acorresponding cartridge assembly so that should the user unwittinglyload the wrong cartridge into the elongate channel and thereafterattempt to fire the cartridge, the firing member and sled would notproperly interface to enable the distal advancement thereof.

In those embodiments wherein the firing member includes a tissue cuttingsurface, it may be desirable for the elongate shaft assembly to beconfigured in such a way so as to prevent the inadvertent advancement ofthe firing member unless an unspent staple cartridge is properlysupported in the elongate channel 1102 of the surgical end effector1100. If, for example, no staple cartridge is present at all and thefiring member is distally advanced through the end effector, the tissuewould be severed, but not stapled. Similarly, if a spent staplecartridge (i.e., a staple cartridge wherein at least some of the stapleshave already been fired therefrom) is present in the end effector andthe firing member is advanced, the tissue would be severed, but may notbe completely stapled, if at all. It will be appreciated that suchoccurrences could lead to undesirable catastrophic results during thesurgical procedure. U.S. Pat. No. 6,988,649 entitled SURGICAL STAPLINGINSTRUMENT HAVING A SPENT CARTRIDGE LOCKOUT, U.S. Pat. No. 7,044,352entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING A SINGLE LOCKOUT MECHANISMFOR PREVENTION OF FIRING, and U.S. Pat. No. 7,380,695 entitled SURGICALSTAPLING INSTRUMENT HAVING A SINGLE LOCKOUT MECHANISM FOR PREVENTION OFFIRING, and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/742,933, entitledSURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH LOCKOUT ARRANGEMENTS FOR PREVENTINGFIRING SYSTEM ACTUATION WHEN A CARTRIDGE IS SPENT OR MISSING eachdisclose various firing member lockout arrangements. Each of thosereferences is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety herein.

An “unfired”, “unspent”, “fresh” or “new” cartridge 1110 means hereinthat the cartridge 1110 has all of its fasteners in their“ready-to-be-fired positions”. When in that position, the sled assembly1120 is located in its starting position. The new cartridge 1110 isseated within the elongate channel 1102 and may be retained therein bysnap features on the cartridge body that are configured to retaininglyengage corresponding portions of the elongate channel 1102. FIG. 36illustrates a portion of the surgical end effector 1100 with a new orunfired surgical staple cartridge 1110 seated therein. As can be seen inFIG. 36, the sled assembly 1120 is in the starting position. To preventthe firing system from being activated and, more precisely, to preventthe firing member 1760 from being distally driven through the endeffector 1110 unless an unfired or new surgical staple cartridge hasbeen properly seated within the elongate channel 1102, the illustratedinterchangeable surgical tool assembly 1000 employs a firing memberlockout system generally designated as 1790.

Referring now to FIGS. 33-37, in one form, the firing member lockoutsystem 1790 includes movable lock member 1792 that is configured toretainingly engage the firing member 1760 when an unspent surgicalstaple cartridge 1110 is not properly seated within the elongate channel1102. The lock member 1792 comprises a pair of lateral spring arms 1793that are interconnected by a central mount tab feature 1794. The centralmount tab feature 1794 has a mounting hook 1795 formed therein that isconfigured to be hooked over a retaining pin 1238 in the anvil mountingassembly 1230 as can be seen in FIGS. 35-37. When installed, the mounttab 1794 is configured to bias the lock member 1792 upward. In addition,the lock member 1792 includes two lateral anvil spring arms 1796 thatangle upward to engage the bottom surface of a corresponding anvilmounting wall 1136 on the anvil mounting portion 1134 to bias the lockmember 1792 downward when the anvil 1130 is closed. A firing memberalignment tab 1797 extends upward from each of the lateral spring arms1793 to maintain alignment between the firing member 1760 and the lockmember 1792. As can be most particularly seen in FIG. 33, the distalportion of each lateral spring arm 1793 includes a laterally extendingforward arm 1798 that terminates in a sled tab 1799 that corresponds toa sled boss 1124 that is formed on the outermost wedge-shaped cams 1122on the sled 1120. Each of the lateral spring arms 1793 includes a locknotch 1850 therein that is configured to lockingly engage acorresponding one of the central lock lugs 1780 therein. Those ofordinary skill in the art will appreciate that different numbers andarrangements of sled bosses may be employed in the sleds of differentstaple cartridge arrangements. The number of, and arrangement of, thesled boss(es) may be configured to only interact with corresponding sledtabs of the lock member of the proper instrument with which the staplecartridge is intended to be used. Thus, the sled bosses may function asa “key” to only actuate the lock member of the proper device. Sucharrangement may therefore prevent the user from actuating the devicewhen the wrong surgical staple cartridge has been loaded into theelongate channel.

FIG. 35 illustrates the end effector 1100 with the anvil 1130 and theelongate channel 1102 in their fully opened position without a surgicalstaple cartridge installed therein. As can be seen in FIG. 35, the anvilspring arms 1796 are in contact with the underside of the mounting walls1136, but they are not “loaded”. Such position enables the surgicalstaple cartridge 1110 to be seated into the elongate channel 1102. Ifone were to close the anvil 1130 when in that position, the anvil springarms 1796 will bias the spring arms 1793 downwardly to cause the centrallugs 1780 to be lockingly received within the corresponding lock notch1850 in the spring arm 1793. When in that position, the firing member1760 cannot be distally advanced. FIG. 36 illustrates a fresh surgicalstaple cartridge 1110 properly seated within the elongate channel 1102when the anvil 1130 is in the fully closed position. As can be seen inFIG. 36, the sled 1120 is in its starting position. When in thatposition, the sled bosses 1124 engage the sled tabs 1799 and bias thespring arms 1793 upward to positions wherein the lock notches 1850 donot engage the central tabs 1780. Thus, the firing member 1760 is freeto be distally advanced. FIG. 37 illustrates the position of the firingmember 1760 after it has been advanced distally from its startingposition. As can be seen in FIG. 37, the firing member 1760 is distal tothe lock spring and out of engagement therewith. The anvil spring arms1796 have biased the lock member downwardly to an unlocked position.

FIGS. 38 and 39 illustrate the position of the firing member 1760 andthe lock member 1792 after the firing member 1760 has been initiallyretracted in the proximal direction. In the illustrated arrangement,each of the central lock lugs 1780 includes a chamfered proximal endportion 1782. See FIGS. 30 and 31. As the firing member 1760 isretracted to the position shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the chamferedproximal ends 1782 of the central lock lugs 1780 contact thecorresponding forward arms 1798 of the lock member 1792 and bias thespring arms laterally outwardly (arrow L in FIG. 39). FIGS. 40 and 41illustrate the position of the firing member 1760 and the lock member1792 after the firing member 1760 has been fully retracted back into itsstarting position. When in that position, each of the central lock lugs1780 is lockingly received within the lock notches 1850 in thecorresponding spring arm 1793. When in that position, the firing member1760 cannot be distally advanced.

FIG. 42 illustrates an alternative lock member 1792′. In thisembodiment, the mount tab 1794 biases the lock member 1792′ downwardlywithout the use of anvil spring arms. Thus, the central lock lugs 1780remain in locking engagement with the spring arms 1793 during opening ofthe anvil 1130 and elongate jaw 1102 and loading of the surgical staplecartridge 1110 therein.

As discussed above, the cartridge body 1111 has a plurality of anvilpockets 1116 that are serially arranged in lines on both sides of thecentral slot 1114. Housed within these pockets 1116 are staple driversthat operably support one or more surgical staples or fasteners thereon.When the target tissue is clamped between the anvil 1130 and the staplecartridge deck surface 1115, the target tissue must be so positioned sothat the tissue that is severed is stapled on each side of the cut line.To avoid the target tissue from being positioned proximal of theproximal most staples or fasteners, the anvil typically containsdownwardly extending walls commonly referred to as “tissue stops” whichserve to block the target tissue from getting too far proximal betweenthe anvil and cartridge. As the anvil is closed toward the cartridge,the tissue stops extend downward past the cartridge deck surface toprevent the tissue from being positioned too far proximal between theanvil and cartridge. In at least one of the end effector embodimentsdescribed herein, the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102 both canmove about the pivot jaw axis JA. Such arrangement may permit the anvil1130 and the elongate channel 1102 to be opened further than other endeffector arrangements wherein only one of the anvil or elongate channelcan move or pivot. Stated another way, the distance between theundersurface of the anvil body 1132 and the cartridge deck surface 1115of a staple cartridge 1110 that is seated in the elongate channel 1102of the end effector 1110 described herein when both the anvil 1130 andelongate channel 1102 are in their respective fully open positions isgenerally larger than the distance between the underside of the anviland the deck surface of a cartridge that is seated in an elongatechannel of an end effector wherein only one of the anvil and channelmove relative to the other. Thus, at least one form of the end effector1100 is configured to employ a staple cartridge arrangement with atleast one “active” tissue stop or “expandable” tissue stop. In theillustrated arrangement, two active tissue stops generally designated as1250 are employed.

Turning now to FIGS. 45, 47 and 48, as discussed above, the staplecartridge body 1111 includes a plurality of staple pockets 1116 locatedon each side of the elongate slot 1114 that is configured to accommodatethe firing member 1760 as it is distally advanced through the cartridge.Depending upon the configuration number and arrangement of the staplepockets 1116, one or more staple driver configurations may be operablysupported therein that each supports one or more surgical staplesthereon. Some pockets located at the proximal end of the cartridge bodymay not contain drivers and staples. For example, in the illustratedarrangement, the staple pockets 1116 contain drivers (not shown) andstaples (not shown). The proximal most pockets that support a driver anda staple are labeled 1116P. Although additional “unused” pockets(labeled 1117), none of those pockets contain drivers and staples. Inthe illustrated arrangement, all of the staple pockets 1116 on bothsides of the elongate slot 1114 that are to the proximal most pockets1116P contain drivers and surgical staples. The active tissue stops 1250are therefore configured to prevent tissue from being clamped betweenthe anvil 1130 and the cartridge 1110 in a position that is proximal tothe proximal staple pockets 1116P to prevent the tissue from being cutwithout first being stapled.

In one arrangement, the surgical staple cartridge 1110 alone and/or incombination with the elongate channel 1102 may be referred to herein asthe “first jaw” and the anvil 1130 may be referred to as the “secondjaw”. The proximal end 1112 of the staple cartridge 1110 may be referredto as the “first proximal end” or the proximal end of the first jaw. Thedeck surface 1115 may be referred to as the ‘first jaw surface”. In theillustrated arrangement, the anvil body 1132 includes a staple formingundersurface 1135 that faces the cartridge deck and serves to form thestaples as they are driven into contact therewith. The staple formingundersurface 1135 (FIG. 3) may also be referred to herein as the “secondjaw surface”.

In the illustrated arrangement, the active tissue stops 1250 areoperably attached to the cartridge body 1111. However, otherarrangements are contemplated wherein the active tissue stops areattached to portions of the elongate channel 1102.

Turning to FIG. 45, in at least one arrangement, two active orexpandable tissue stops 1250 are employed—one tissue stop on each sideof the elongate slot 1114. As can be seen in FIG. 47, an active tissuestop 1250 comprises a bifurcated lower tissue stop portion 1260 thatcomprises two cam walls 1262 that are separated by a space 1264 and areinterconnected by a connector 1265. Movably supported within the space1264 is an upper tissue stop portion 1270. As can be seen in FIG. 45, astop bridge 1266 is provided between the walls 1260 at the upper portionof their distal ends. The stop bridge 1266 cooperates with a stop tab1272 formed on the upper tissue stop portion 1270 to prevent the uppertissue stop portion 1270 from extending completely out of the space1264. Mounting holes 1267 are provided through the walls 1260 to enablethe lower tissue stop portion 1260 to be pivotally journaled on acorresponding stop pin 1118 that protrudes laterally out of the sides1113 of the cartridge body 1111. As can also be seen in FIG. 45, each ofthe upper stops 1270 includes a spring mounting hole 1274 that isconfigured to receive a leg portion 1282 of a biasing member or stopspring 1280 therein. See FIG. 46.

The upper tissue stop portion 1270 is slidably received within the space1264 of the corresponding lower tissue stop portion 1260 to create theactive or expandable tissue stop 1250. The upper and lower tissue stopportions 1260, 1270, along with the corresponding biasing member or stopspring 1280, are pivotally journaled on the corresponding stop pin 1118.Each active tissue stop assembly 1250 is free to pivot about a tissuestop axis TSA that is defined by the stop pins 1118. As can be seen inFIG. 45, the tissue stop axis TSA is transverse to the elongate slot1114 in the cartridge body 1111. A second leg 1284 of the stop spring1280 bears upon a corresponding ledge or portion 1119 of the cartridgebody 1111 such that when journaled on the stop pin 1118, the stop spring1280 serve to bias the upper tissue stop portion 1270 upward within thespace 1264 until the stop tab 1272 contains the stop bridge 1266. Atthat point, the biasing member or stop spring 1280 serves to bias theentire active tissue stop assembly 1250 upward about the tissue stopaxis TSA until the upper tissue stop portion 1270 contacts acorresponding stop ledge 1121 formed on the cartridge body 1111.

Thus, in the illustrated arrangement, each of the active tissue stopassemblies 1250 are attached to a corresponding lateral side 1113 of thecartridge body 1110. As can be seen in FIG. 45, each side wall 1126 ofthe elongate channel 1102 has a tissue stop notch 1128 formed therein toreceive an active tissue stop assembly 1250 therein when the jaws 1130,1110 are in their fully closed positions. FIG. 49 illustrates the anvil1130 and elongate channel 1102 and cartridge 1110 in their “fullyclosed” positions. The orientations of the active tissue stop assemblies1250 when the anvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102 or surgical cartridge1110 are in their fully closed positions may be referred to as their“fully compressed” orientations. In certain embodiments the anvilassembly 1130 may also have fixed tissue stops 1144 formed thereon whichare proximal to the active tissue stop assemblies 1250. See FIGS. 43 and44. FIGS. 47 and 50 illustrate the orientation of an active tissue stopassembly 1250 when the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102 are intheir respective fully opened positions. The orientations of the activetissue stop assemblies 1250 when the anvil 1130 and elongate channel1102 or surgical cartridge 1110 are in their fully open positions may bereferred to as their “fully deployed” or “fully expanded” orientations.When in their fully deployed position, the active tissue stops 1250serve to prevent tissue from significantly advancing proximally past theproximal most staple pockets 1116P. FIG. 49 illustrates the anvil 1130and elongate channel 1102 clamping tissue therebetween in theirrespective fully closed positions. Prior to being installed within theelongate channel 1102, the tissue stop assemblies may be retained in thecollapsed orientation shown in FIG. 49 by a removably staple cover thatis removably attached to the cartridge deck. Once the cartridge isinstalled in the elongate channel, the staple cover maybe removed fromthe cartridge deck.

FIGS. 51-53 illustrate another tissue stop arrangement that comprisescooperating tissue stops on the anvil as well as the cartridge. Forexample, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 51-53, a pair of upstandingcartridge tissue stops 1290 that extend upward from the cartridge decksurface 1115. When the anvil 1130 and the elongate channel 1102 are intheir fully closed positions, the upper ends 1292 of the cartridgetissue stops 1290 extend into holes or cavities 1293 provided in theanvil body 1132. The upper ends 1292 of the cartridge tissue stops 1290are angled so that when the anvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102 arefully closed, the upper ends 1292 do not protrude beyond the outersurface of the anvil body 1132. See FIG. 53. In addition, the anvil 1130includes downwardly extending distal tissue stops 1296 that do notextend below the cartridge deck surface 1115 when the anvil 1130 and theelongate channel 1102 are in their fully closed positions and a pair ofproximal tissue stops 1298 that extend downwardly below the deck surface1115 of the cartridge 1110 when the anvil 1130 and elongate channel 1102are in their fully closed position. See FIG. 53. In an alternativearrangement, an elastic band may be placed around the exterior of thejaws such that the distal edge of the band is at the desired locationfor the tissue stops. As the jaws are opened, the band stretches butserves as a tissue stop. The band can rest in recesses in the anvil andelongate channel that circumscribe the anvil/channel so that the endeffector can pass through standard trocar arrangements.

In the illustrated example, the cartridge body 1111 operably supportstherein a plurality of staple drivers that are aligned in rows on eachside of a centrally disposed slot 1114. FIGS. 33A-33C illustrate oneexample of a staple driver 1170 that may be employed to support stapleson one side of a surgical staple cartridge. The drivers located on theopposite side of the centrally disposed slot 1114 may comprise mirrorimages of drivers 1170. Other staple driver configurations may also beeffectively employed as well. As can be seen in FIGS. 33A-33C, one formof a staple driver 1700 comprises a staple driver body 1172. The driverbody 1172 includes a first or innermost staple support portion 1174 thatis configured to support a staple (not shown) thereon. A second orcentral staple support portion 1176 is configured to support anotherstaple (not shown) thereon and a third support portion 1870 that isconfigured to support a third staple (not shown) thereon. The firststaple support portion 1174, the second staple support portion 1176 andthe third staple support portion 1178 are all coupled together by aconnector portion 1180. In at least one arrangement, the connectorportion 1180 is formed with a centrally disposed opening or aperture1182 that is configured to slidably receive a corresponding first driverguide (not shown) that is formed in the cartridge body. The connectorportion 1180 includes a first cam portion 1184 that has a first cammingsurface or ramp 1186 formed thereon. The connector portion 1180 alsoincludes a second cam portion 1188 that has a second a second cammingsurface 1190 formed thereon. The camming surfaces 1186, 1190 have thesame slope or angle or they may have different slopes/angles. In atleast one embodiment, each staple driver 1170 is integrally formed fromor molded from, for example, Ultem®, with no fill. However, othermaterials such as, for example, Ultem® with a glass or mineral fill orNylon or Nylon with a glass file could be used. In other arrangements,the various portions of the staple drivers 1170 may be separatelyfabricated from other materials and be attached together by adhesive,solder, etc. Further details concerning the staple drivers 1170 as wellas other driver embodiments that may be effectively employed with thevarious embodiments disclosed herein may be found in U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 14/843,243, filed Sep. 2, 2015, entitled SURGICALSTAPLE CONFIGURATIONS WITH CAMMING SURFACES LOCATED BETWEEN PORTIONSSUPPORTING SURGICAL STAPLES, the entire disclosure of which is herebyincorporated by reference herein.

The staple cavities 1116 are angularly oriented relative to the shaftaxis SA. More specifically, the staple cavities 1116 are oriented atoblique angles relative to the shaft axis SA and form a herringbonepattern in the deck surface 1115. Various alternative patterns forstaple cavities in a staple cartridge body are described herein.

Variations to the arrangement and/or geometry of staples in a stapleline can affect the flexibility and sealing properties of the stapleline. For example, a staple line comprised of linear staples can providea limited amount of flexibility or stretch because the staple line canflex or stretch between the linear staples. Consequently, a limitedportion of the staple line (e.g., the portion between staples) isflexible. A staple line comprised of angularly-oriented staples can alsoflex or stretch between the staples. However, the angularly-orientedstaples are also able to rotate, which provides an additional degree ofstretch within the staple line. A staple line comprised ofangularly-oriented staples can stretch in excess of 60%, for example. Incertain instances, a staple line comprised of angularly-oriented staplescan stretch at least 25% or at least 50%, for example. The arrangementof staples includes the relative orientation of the staples and thespacing between the staples, for example. The geometry of the staplesincludes the size and shape of the staples, for example. The flexibilityand sealing properties of a staple line can change at longitudinaland/or lateral positions based on the arrangement and/or geometry of thestaples. In certain instances, it is desirable to alter the flexibilityand/or sealing properties of a staple line at one or more locationsalong the staple line. For example, it can be desirable to maximize theflexibility of the staple line or a portion thereof. Additionally oralternatively, it can be desirable to minimize the flexibility of thestaple line or a portion thereof. It can also be desirable to maximizethe sealing properties of the staple line or a portion thereof.Additionally or alternatively, it can be desirable to minimize thesealing properties of the staple line or a portion thereof.

The arrangement of staple cavities in a staple cartridge corresponds tothe arrangement of staples in a staple line generated by the staplecartridge. For example, the spacing and relative orientation of staplecavities in a staple cartridge corresponds to the spacing and relativeorientation of staples in a staple line generated by the staplecartridge. In various instances, a staple cartridge can include anarrangement of staples cavities that is selected and/or designed tooptimize the flexibility and/or sealing properties of the resultantstaple line. A surgeon may select a staple cartridge having a particulararrangement of staple cavities based on the surgical procedure to beperformed and/or the properties of the tissue to be treated during thesurgical procedure, for example.

In certain instances, it can be desirable to generate a staple line withdifferent staple patterns. A staple line can include a first pattern ofstaples for a first portion thereof and a second pattern of staples fora second portion thereof. The first pattern and the second pattern canbe longitudinally offset. For example, the first pattern can bepositioned at the proximal or distal end of the staple line. In otherinstances, the first pattern and the second pattern can be laterallyoffset and, in still other instances, the first pattern and the secondpattern can be laterally offset and longitudinally offset. A staple linecan include at least two different patterns of staples.

In certain instances, the majority of staples in a staple line can forma major pattern and other staples in the staple line can form one ormore minor patterns. The major pattern can span a significant portion ofthe staple line and can include a longitudinally-repetitive sub-pattern.In certain instances, the minor pattern, or irregularity, can deviatefrom the major pattern. The minor pattern can be an anomaly at one ormore locations along the length of the staple line, for example. Thedifferent patterns in a staple line can be configured to producedifferent properties at predefined locations. For example, the majorpattern can be a highly flexible or elastic pattern, which can permitextensive stretching of the stapled tissue, and the minor pattern can beless flexible or less elastic. It can be desirable for the majority ofthe staple line to be highly flexible and for one or more limitedportions to be less flexible, for example. In other instances, the minorpattern can be more flexible than the major pattern. In certaininstances, because the minor pattern extends along a shorter portion ofthe staple line, the flexibility of the minor pattern may not impact, ormay not significantly impact, the overall flexibility of the entirestaple line.

Referring now to FIGS. 54-57, a staple cartridge body 3000 for use witha surgical end effector is depicted. The staple cartridge body 3000includes a deck 3002 and a slot 3004, which extends through the deck3002 from a proximal end 3006 toward a distal end 3008 of the cartridgebody 3000. The slot 3004 extends along the longitudinal axis LA (FIG.56) of the cartridge body 3000. Staple cavities 3010 are defined in thecartridge body 3000 and each staple cavity 3010 defines an opening 3012in the deck 3002.

The majority of the staple cavities 3010 are arranged in a firstpattern, or major pattern, 3020. The first pattern 3020 is alongitudinally-repetitive pattern of angularly-oriented staple cavities3010. Longitudinally-repetitive patterns are patterns in which asub-pattern or arrangement is longitudinally repeated. For example, anarrangement of three staple cavities on each side of the slot 3004 (aninner staple cavity, an intermediate staple cavity, and an outer staplecavity) can be repeated along at least a portion of the length of thestaple cartridge body 3000. Various longitudinally-repetitive patternsof angularly-oriented staples cavities are described in U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 14/498,145, filed Sep. 26, 2014, now U.S. PatentApplication Publication No. 2016/0089142, entitled METHOD FOR CREATING AFLEXIBLE STAPLE LINE, which is incorporated by reference herein in itsentirety. The openings 3012 of the staple cavities 3010 in the firstpattern 3020 form a herringbone pattern having six rows ofangularly-oriented staple cavity openings 3012 in the cartridge deck3002. An inner row 3014 a, an intermediate row 3014 b, and an outer row3014 c of staple cavities 3010 are positioned on each side of the slot3004.

Each staple cavity opening 3012 has a proximal end 3016 and a distal end3018. The proximal end 3016 and the distal end 3018 of the staplecavities 3010 in the first pattern 3020 are laterally offset. Stateddifferently, each staple cavity 3010 in the first pattern 3020 isangularly oriented relative to the longitudinal axis LA (FIG. 56). Acavity axis CA (FIG. 56) extends between the proximal end 3016 and thedistal end 3018 of each opening 3012. The cavity axes CA are obliquelyoriented relative to the slot 3004. More specifically, the openings 3012in the inner rows 3014 a of staple cavities 3010 and the outer rows 3014c of staple cavities 3010 are oriented at 45 degrees, or about 45degrees, relative to the longitudinal axis LA, and the openings 3012 inthe intermediate rows 3014 b of staple cavities 3010 are oriented at 90degrees, or about 90 degrees, relative to the openings 3012 of the innerrows 3014 a and the outer rows 3014 a.

Certain staple cavities 3010 in the cartridge body 3000 are oriented atan angle that is anomalous or irregular with respect to the staplecavities 3010 in the first pattern 3020. More specifically, the angularorientation of proximal staple cavities 3010 a, 3010 b, 3010 c, and 3010d and distal staples cavities 3010 e, 3010 f, 3010 g, and 3010 h doesnot conform to the herringbone arrangement of the staple cavities 3010in the first pattern 3020. Rather, the proximal staple cavities 3010a-3010 d and the distal staple cavities 3010 e-3010 h are angularlyoffset from the staple cavities 3010 in the first pattern 3020. Theproximal staple cavities 3010 a, 3010 b, 3010 c, and 3010 d areobliquely oriented relative to the staples cavities 3010 in the firstpattern 3020, and the distal staple cavities 3010 e, 3010 f, 3010 g, and3010 h are also obliquely oriented relative to the staples cavities 3010in the first pattern 3020. The proximal and distal staple cavities 3010a-3010 h are oriented parallel to the slot 3004 and to the longitudinalaxis LA.

The proximal staple cavities 3010 a-3010 d form a proximal pattern 3022that is distinct from the first pattern 3020, and the distal staplecavities 3010 e-3010 h form a distal pattern 3024 that is also distinctfrom the first pattern 3020. In the depicted arrangement, the proximalpattern 3022 includes a first pair of parallel, longitudinally-alignedstaple cavities 3010 a, 3010 b on a first side of the slot 3004 and asecond pair of parallel, longitudinally-aligned staple cavities 3010 c,3010 d on a second side of the longitudinal slot 3004. The distalpattern 3024 also includes a first pair of parallel,longitudinally-aligned staple cavities 3010 e, 3010 f on the first sideof the longitudinal slot 3004 and a second pair of parallel,longitudinally-aligned staple cavities 3010 g, 3010 h on the second sideof the longitudinal slot 3004. In other instances, the distal pattern3024 can be different from the proximal pattern 3022.

The proximal pattern 3022 and the distal pattern 3024 are symmetricrelative to the longitudinal axis LA. In other instances, the proximalpattern 3022 and/or the distal pattern 3024 can be asymmetric relativeto the longitudinal axis LA. For example, the staple cavities 3010 e and3010 f can be longitudinally offset from the staple cavities 3010 g and3010 h and/or the staple cavities 3010 a and 3010 b can belongitudinally offset from the staple cavities 3010 c and 3010 d.Additionally or alternatively, in certain instances, the staplecartridge body 3000 can include either the proximal pattern 3022 or thedistal pattern 3024. In other instances, the staple cavities 3010defined in the staple cartridge body 3000 can include additional and/ordifferent patterns of staple cavities 3010.

Referring primarily to FIG. 54, atraumatic extenders 3030 extend orprotrude from the deck 3002 around a portion of the staple cavities 3010in the first pattern 3020. The atraumatic extenders 3030 surround theproximal and distal ends 3016 and 3018, respectively, of the openings3012 of the staple cavities 3010 in the first pattern 3020. Theatraumatic extenders 3030 may be configured to grip tissue that isclamped by the end effector. Additionally or alternatively, in certaininstances, the tips of the staple legs can protrude from the cartridgebody 3000. In such instances, the atraumatic extenders 3030 may beconfigured to extend flush with and/or beyond the tips of the staplelegs to prevent the tips from prematurely penetrating tissue.Consequently, larger staples, e.g., staples having longer legs, can bepositioned in the staple cavities 3010 having atraumatic extenders 3030positioned therearound. For example, referring again to FIG. 54, largerstaples can be positioned in the staple cavities 3010 in the firstpattern 3020 than the staples in the staple cavities in the proximalpattern 3022 and the distal pattern 3024 without risking prematurepiercing of tissue by the longer staple legs. In certain instances,atraumatic extenders 3030 can be positioned around staples cavities 3010in the proximal pattern 3022 and/or the distal pattern 3024, and largerstaples can be positioned in one of more of those staple cavities 3010a-3010 h, as well.

The staple cartridge body 3000 can be configured to generate a stapleline having different properties along the length thereof. A staple line3040 generated by the staple cartridge body 3000 and embedded in tissueT is depicted in FIG. 58. The staple line 3040 is comprised of staples3042, and an exemplary staple 3042 for use with various staplecartridges described herein is depicted in FIG. 59. The staple 3042 canbe comprised of a bent wire, for example. The wire can have a diameterof 0.0079 inches, or approximately 0.0079 inches. In other instances,the wire can have a diameter of 0.0089 inches, or approximately 0.0089inches. In still other instances, the wire can have a diameter of0.0094, or approximately 0.0094 inches. In certain instances, the wirecan have a diameter of less than 0.0079 inches or more than 0.0094inches. The reader will appreciate that the diameter of the wire candictate the diameter of the staple. The staple 3042 is a substantiallyU-shaped staple having a base 3050, a first leg 3052 extending from afirst end of the base 3050, and a second leg 3054 extending from asecond end of the base 3050. The first leg 3052 is substantiallyparallel to the second leg 3054 and substantially perpendicular to thebase 3050. When implanted in tissue T, the angular orientation of thebase 3050 corresponds to the angular orientation of the staple cavityopening 3012 from which the staple 3042 was fired.

Another exemplary staple 3142 for use with various staple cartridgesdescribed herein is depicted in FIG. 60. The staple 3142 is asubstantially V-shaped staple having a base 3150, a first leg 3152extending from a first end of the base 3050, and a second leg 3154extending from a second end of the base 3150. The first leg 3152 isobliquely oriented relative to the second leg 3154 and the base 3150.When implanted in tissue T, the orientation of the base 3150 correspondsto the orientation of the staple cavity opening 3012 from which thestaple 3142 was fired. The reader will appreciate that staples havingdifferent geometries can also be fired from the staple cartridgesdescribed herein.

Referring again to FIG. 58, the staple line 3040 includes a firstportion 3044, a proximal portion 3046, and a distal portion 3048. Thefirst portion 3044 is generated from the first pattern, or majorpattern, 3020 and extends along a substantial portion of the staple line3040. Owing to the angular orientation of the staples 3042 in the firstportion 3044, the first portion 3044 is substantially flexible orcompliant. For example, because the angularly-oriented staples 3042 canrotate within the stapled tissue T while minimizing trauma to the tissueT, the first portion 3044 is configured to stretch or extendlongitudinally and/or laterally as the stapled tissue stretches.

The proximal portion 3046 is generated from the proximal pattern 3022and forms the proximal end of the staple line 3040. The distal portion3048 is generated from the distal pattern 3024 and forms the distal endof the staple 3040. Owing to the parallel orientation of the staples3042 in the proximal portion 3046 and the distal portion 3048 of thestaple line 3040, the proximal portion 3046 and the distal portion 3046of the staple line 3040 can be less flexible than the first portion3044. However, the reduced flexibility of the proximal portion 3046 andthe distal portion 3048 may not impact, or not substantially impact, theoverall flexibility of the staple line 3040. Moreover, as describedherein, the proximal portion 3046 and the distal portion 3048 may notextend adjacent to the cutline and, in certain instances, the proximalportion 3046 may be absent or missing from the staple line 3040.

A firing element, such as the firing member 1760 (FIG. 4), is configuredto move along at least a portion of the slot 3004 to fire the staples3042 from the staple cavities 3010. The firing element can includeand/or engage one of more wedge sleds and/or camming surfaces, such asthe sled assembly 1120 having wedge-shaped cams 1122 (FIG. 4). The camsof the sled are configured to drive the staples upward toward astaple-forming surface, such as into forming pockets in the anvil 1130(FIGS. 1, 3 and 4), for example. Referring to FIG. 55, the staplecartridge body 3000 includes a plurality of channels 3036 along a bottomsurface 3034 through which the wedge-shaped cams can move during afiring stroke.

In use, target tissue is clamped between the staple cartridge body 3000and an anvil, such as the anvil 1130 (FIGS. 1, 3 and 4). The tissueoverlapping the staple cavities 3010 is stapled. If tissue is notpositioned over certain staple cavities 3010, staples fired from thosestaple cavities 3010 may not engage the tissue. An anvil typicallycontains downwardly extending sidewalls commonly referred to as “tissuestops”. The tissue stops are configured to block the target tissue fromgetting too far proximal between the anvil and cartridge. For example,referring to the end effector 1100 in FIG. 4, the anvil 1130 includestissue stops 1131, which extend toward the staple cartridge 1110. Whenthe anvil 1130 is closed toward the cartridge 1110, the tissue stops1131 on either side of the anvil 1130 extend downward past the cartridgedeck surface 1115 and form a wall or barrier, which prevents tissue frombeing positioned too far proximal between the anvil 1130 and cartridge1110. The distal ends of the tissue stops 1131 define a proximalstarting point for the cutline. A proximal axis PA corresponding to thedistal ends of the tissue stops 1131 is depicted in FIG. 56. Becausetarget tissue is not positioned proximal to the proximal axis PA, thestaples that are fired from the staple cavities located proximal to theproximal axis PA, i.e., the proximal staple cavities 3010 a-3010 d, arenot fired into the target tissue. In such instances, staples fired fromthe proximal pattern 3022 do not form a part of the staple line.

A cutting element 3028 (FIG. 56) is also configured to move along thelongitudinal slot 3004. In various instances, the cutting element 3028can be an integral part of the firing element, such as the tissuecutting feature 1766 on the firing member 1760 (FIG. 4), for example.The cutting element 3028 has a distal cutting edge 3029 that isconfigured to incise tissue clamped by the end effector and stapled bythe staples 3042. Referring primarily to FIG. 56, the cutting edge 3029of the cutting element 3028 is configured to move between a proximalposition near the proximal end portion 3006 of the cartridge body 3000and a distal position near the distal end portion 3008 of the cartridgebody 3000. The distal-most position of the cutting edge 3029 is definedby a distal termination point for the cutline. A distal axis DAcorresponding to the distal termination point of the cutting edge 3029is depicted in FIG. 56. Tissue positioned distal to the distal axis DAis not incised by the cutting element 3028 during the firing stroke.

The first pattern 3020 of staple cavities 3010 extends between theproximal axis PA and the distal axis DA. Moreover, at least one staplecavity 3010 in the first pattern 3020 overlaps the proximal axis PA andthe distal axis DA. In other instances, more than onelongitudinally-repetitive pattern of staple cavities 3010 can bepositioned between the proximal axis PA and the distal axis DA. Theproximal pattern 3022 is positioned proximal to the proximal axis PA,and the distal pattern 3024 is positioned distal to the distal axis DA.In such instances, staples fired from the distal staple cavities 3010e-3010 h are not configured to staple incised tissue. Moreover, staplesfired from the proximal staple cavities 3010 a-3010 d are not configuredto staple the target tissue. Accordingly, such staples may not impactthe flexibility and/or sealing quality of the resultant staple line.

In certain instances, it can be desirable to generate a staple linehaving a first flexibility adjacent to the cutline and a differentflexibility proximal to and/or distal to the cutline. For example, astaple line that includes at least two parallel staples on each side ofthe cutline and positioned distal to the distal end of the cutline, mayprovide certain advantages. In certain instances, a staple arrangementthat provides less flexibility may prevent and/or limit the propagationof the cutline and/or tearing of the tissue. Additionally, the tissueadjacent to an uncut portion may experience less stress and/or strainthan the tissue adjacent to the cutline and, thus, may require lessflexibility to prevent and/or limit tissue trauma. More specifically,tissue adjacent to the cutline may experience more forces during thecutting stroke and, thus, increased flexibility may prevent trauma tothe tissue. Additionally, the tissue adjacent to the cutline may stretchas it heals and thus, increased flexibility may facilitate the healingprocess. For tissue that experiences fewer forces, such as the tissuedistal to the cutline, for example, the reduced flexibility mayreinforce or strengthen the staple line and prevent distal propagationof the cutline.

In the depicted arrangement, the proximal pattern 3022 includes twoirregular staple cavities on each side of the knife slot 3004 adjacentto the proximal end of the first pattern 3020 and the distal pattern3024 includes two irregular staple cavities on each side of the knifeslot 3004 adjacent to the distal end of the first pattern 3020. In otherinstances, the proximal pattern 3022 and/or the distal pattern 3024 canconsist of a single irregular staple cavity on one or both sides of theknife slot 3004. In still other instances, the proximal pattern 3022and/or the distal pattern 3024 can include three or more irregularstaple cavities on one or both sides of the knife slot 3004. Theproximal pattern 3022 and/or the distal pattern 3024 can includelongitudinally repetitive sub-patterns. For example, the proximalpattern 3022 and/or the distal pattern 3024 can include multiple columnsof parallel staple cavity openings 3012. In certain instances, thestaple cartridge body 3000 can have a single irregular pattern, whichcan be positioned at either the proximal end or distal end of the firstpattern 3020.

In certain instances, one or more staple cavities in the proximalpattern 3022 and/or the distal pattern 3024 can be non-parallel to theknife slot 3004. For example, such staple cavities can be orientedperpendicular to the knife slot 3004 or at an oblique angle relative tothe knife slot 3004. Additionally or alternatively, certain staplecavities in the proximal pattern 3022 and/or the distal pattern 3024 canbe non-parallel to each other

Referring primarily to FIG. 57, staple drivers 3060 are positioned inthe staple cavities 3010 of the cartridge body 3000. The staple drivers3060 are positioned to support the staples 3042 (FIGS. 58 and 59)therein and to drive the staples 3042 from the staple cavities 3010during a firing stroke. Owing to the different patterns of staplecavities 3010 in the cartridge body 3000, e.g., the patterns 3020, 3022and 3024, the staple drivers 3060 can have different geometries and/ororientations. For example, the staple drivers 3060 positioned in thestaple cavities 3010 of the first pattern 3020 may include connecteddrivers as described in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/498,145,filed Sep. 26, 2014, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No.2016/0089142, entitled METHOD FOR CREATING A FLEXIBLE STAPLE LINE, whichis incorporated by reference herein in its entirety. Each connecteddriver can include an inner driver positioned in a staple cavity 3010 inthe inner row 3014 a, an intermediate driver positioned in a staplecavity 3010 in the intermediate row 3014 b, and an outer driverpositioned in a staple cavity 3010 in the outer row 3014 c. A connectingflange can connect the intermediate driver to at least one inner driverand at least one outer driver. In other instances, the staple driverspositioned in the staple cavities in the first pattern 3020 may includeindividual drivers, wherein each driver drives a single staple. In stillother instances, the staples can be direct-drive staples, which can bedriven by direct contact with a wedge sled and/or camming surfaces, asdescribed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/138,475, filed on Dec.23, 2013, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2015/0173749,entitled SURGICAL STAPLES AND STAPLE CARTRIDGES and U.S. patentapplication Ser. No. 14/498,145, which are incorporated by referenceherein in their respective entireties.

The drivers 3060 positioned in the staple cavities 3010 are dimensionedand positioned for driving engagement by the sled and camming surfacesthereof. For example, the drivers 3060 are positioned in the staplecavities 3010 of the first pattern 3020. Proximal drivers 3060 a, 3060b, 3060 c, and 3060 d are positioned in the staple cavities 3010 a, 3010b, 3010 c, and 3010 d, respectively, of the proximal pattern 3022, anddistal drivers 3060 e, 3060 f, 3060 g, and 3060 h are positioned in thestaple cavities 3010 e, 3010 f, 3010 g, and 3010 h, respectively, of thedistal pattern 3024. Referring again to FIG. 4, the sled assembly 1120and the wedge-shaped cams 1122 thereof can be configured to lift thedrivers 3060 in the staple cavities 3010. In such instances, the cams1122 are configured to drivingly engage the drivers 3060 along thelength of the cartridge body 3000. More specifically, the cams 1122initially engage and drive the proximal drivers 3060 a, 3060 b, 3060 c,and 3060 d to fire the staples in the proximal pattern 3022, then engageand drive the drivers 3060 to fire the staples in the first pattern3022, and finally engage and drive the distal drivers 3060 e, 3060 f,3060 g, and 3060 h to fire the staples in the distal pattern 3024.Although the proximal drivers 3060 a, 3060 b, 3060 c, and 3060 d and/orthe distal drivers 3060 e, 3060 f, 3060 g, and 3060 h have a differentgeometry than the drivers 3060 in the first pattern 3020 of staplecavities 3010, the sled and camming surfaces thereof are compatible withthe different drivers in the cartridge body 3000.

Referring again to FIG. 4, the sled assembly 1120 includes four cammingsurfaces 1122. A first pair of camming surfaces 1122 are positioned fordriving engagement with the staple drivers on the first side of thelongitudinal axis LA, and a second pair of camming surfaces 1122 arepositioned for driving engagement with the staple drivers on the secondside of the longitudinal axis LA. The camming surfaces 1122 in each pairare longitudinally offset. In other instances, the camming surfaces 1122can be longitudinally aligned. Each pair of camming surfaces 1122 isconfigured to lift a triple driver (see, e.g., the driver 1170 in FIGS.33A-33C), i.e., a connected driver supporting a staple in the inner row3014 a of staple cavities 3010, a staple in the intermediate row 3014 bof staple cavities 3010, and a staple in the outer row 3014 c of staplecavities 3010. The camming surfaces 1122 are also configured to lift theproximal drivers 3060 a, 3060 b, 3060 c, and 3060 d and the distaldrivers 3060 e, 3060 f, 3060 g, and 3060 h. In other instances, the sledassembly 1120 can include more than or less than four camming surfaces.

The proximal drivers 3060 a-3060 d and the distal drivers 3060 e-3060 hare connected drivers 3058. An exemplary connected driver 3058 isdepicted in FIGS. 62-65. The connected driver 3058 includes the firstdriver 3060 a and the second driver 3060 b. A connecting flange 3068extends between the two drivers 3060 a and 3060 b. Because the first andsecond drivers 3060 a and 3060 b are connected, the staples supported bythe first and second drivers 3060 a, 3060 b are fired simultaneously bythe sled assembly. Each driver 3060 a and 3060 b also includes a cradle3070 for supporting the base of the staple. A guide 3062 a and 3062 bextends laterally from each driver 3060 a and 3060 b, respectively. Thefirst guide 3062 a extends in a first direction and forms an outsideportion of the connected driver 3058 and the second guide 3062 b extendsin a second, opposite direction and forms an inside portion of theconnected driver 3058. Ramped surfaces 3064 a and 3064 b on the guides3062 a and 3062 b, respectively, are positioned for driving contact withthe camming surfaces of the sled assembly. The guides 3062 a and 3062 bare driven upward in the channels 3036 (FIG. 55) of the cartridge body3000 when moved to a fired position by the sled assembly. The channels3036 form a vertical support structure through which the guides 3062 a,3062 b are driven by the camming surfaces. As described herein, thecamming surfaces can be longitudinally offset. In such instances, theramped surfaces 3064 a, 3064 b are correspondingly offset, as depictedin FIGS. 63 and 65. In other instances, the ramped surfaces 3064 a and3064 b can be aligned.

In other instances, the proximal drivers and/or the distal drivers in astaple cartridge may not be connected. For example, referring to FIG.61, a staple cartridge 4800 is depicted. The staple cartridge body 4800is similar in many aspects to the staple cartridge body 3000. Forexample, the staple cartridge body 4800 includes a first pattern 4820 ofangularly-oriented staple cavities, which are arranged in a herringbonepattern. A slot 4804 extends along the longitudinal axis LA of thecartridge body 4800. The staple cartridge body 4800 also includesproximal staple cavities arranged in a proximal pattern 4822 and distalstaple cavities arranged in a distal pattern 4824. The proximal pattern4822 includes a first pair of parallel, longitudinally-aligned staplecavities on a first side of the slot 4804 and a second pair of parallel,longitudinally-aligned staple cavities on a second side of thelongitudinal slot 4804. The distal pattern 4824 also includes a firstpair of parallel, longitudinally-aligned staple cavities on the firstside of the slot 4804 and a second pair of parallel,longitudinally-offset staple cavities on the second side of thelongitudinal slot 4804. The proximal pattern 4822 and the distal pattern4824 are symmetric relative to the longitudinal axis LA. In otherinstances, the proximal pattern 4822 and/or the distal pattern 4824 canbe asymmetric relative to the longitudinal axis LA.

Drivers 4860 are positioned in the staple cavities 4810 of the firstpattern 4820. The drivers 4860 in the staple cavities 4810 of the firstpattern 4820 are triple drivers, as described herein. Proximal drivers4860 a, 4860 b, 4860 c, and 4860 d are positioned in the staple cavitiesof the proximal pattern 4822, and distal drivers 4860 e, 4860 f, 4860 g,and 4860 h are positioned in the staple cavities of the distal pattern4824. The proximal drivers 4860 a-4860 d and the distal drivers 4860e-4860 h are single drivers. Exemplary single drivers 4860 a and 4860 bare depicted in FIGS. 66 and 67.

Each driver 4860 a and 4860 b includes a cradle 4870 for supporting thebase of the staple. A guide 4862 a and 4862 b extends laterally fromeach driver 4860 a and 4860 b, respectively. The first guide 4862 aextends in a first direction and forms an outside portion of the firstdriver 4860 a and the second guide 4862 b extends in a second, oppositedirection and forms an outside portion of the second driver 4860 b.Ramped surfaces 4864 a and 4864 b on the guides 4862 a and 4862 b,respectively, are positioned for driving contact with the cammingsurfaces of a sled assembly. The guides 4862 a and 4862 b are drivenupward in channels in the cartridge body 4800, such as the channels 3036in the cartridge 3000 (FIG. 55), when the drivers 4860 a and 4860 b aremoved to a fired position by the sled assembly. The channels form avertical support structure through which the guides 4862 a and 4862 bare driven by the camming surfaces. Such channels can stabilize theguides 4862 a and 4862 b and, thus, stabilize the individual drivers4860 a and 4860 b, respectively, during deployment. As described herein,the camming surfaces can be longitudinally offset. In such instances,the ramped surfaces 4864 a, 4864 b are correspondingly offset, asdepicted in FIG. 67. In other instances, the ramped surfaces 4864 a and4864 b can be aligned.

Because the first and second drivers 4860 a, 4860 b are separate, thestaples supported by the first and second drivers 4860 a, 4860 b can befired independently. In certain instances, the first driver 4860 a andthe second driver 4860 b can be fired sequentially. It can beadvantageous to fire an inner staple before an outer staple, forexample, which can be accomplished with the separate drivers 4860 a and4860 b. In other instances, an outer staple can be fired before an innerstaple with the separate drivers 4860 a and 4860 b. The firing order canbe modified by adjusting the relationship between the camming surfacesand the ramped surfaces 3864 a and 4864 b, for example.

In various instances, the staple cavities in a distal pattern and/or aproximal pattern may not be longitudinally-aligned and/or may not beparallel. For example, referring now to FIGS. 68 and 69, a staplecartridge body 4600 is depicted. The staple cartridge body 4600 issimilar in many aspects to the staple cartridge body 3000. For example,the staple cartridge body 4600 includes a first pattern 4620 ofangularly-oriented staple cavities 4610, which are arranged in aherringbone pattern. A slot 4604 extends through a deck 4602 of thestaple cartridge body 4600 along the longitudinal axis LA of thecartridge body 4600. The staple cartridge body 4600 also includesproximal staple cavities 4610 a-4610 d arranged in a proximal pattern4622 and distal staple cavities 4610 e-4610 h arranged in a distalpattern 4624. The proximal pattern 4622 includes a first pair ofparallel, longitudinally-offset staple cavities 4610 a, 4610 b on afirst side of the slot 4604 and a second pair of parallel,longitudinally-offset staple cavities 4610 c, 4610 d on a second side ofthe longitudinal slot 4604. The distal pattern 4624 also includes afirst pair of parallel, longitudinally-offset staple cavities 4610 e,4610 f on the first side of the slot 4604 and a second pair of parallel,longitudinally-offset staple cavities 4610 g, 4610 h on the second sideof the longitudinal slot 4604. The proximal pattern 4622 and the distalpattern 4624 are symmetric relative to the longitudinal axis LA. Inother instances, the proximal pattern 4622 and the distal pattern 4624can be asymmetric relative to the longitudinal axis LA.

Connected drivers 4658 are positioned in the proximal and distal staplecavities 4610 a-4610 h. An exemplary connected driver 4658 is depictedin FIGS. 70-73. The connected driver 4658 includes the first driver 4660a and the second driver 4660 b. A connecting flange 4668 extends betweenthe two offset drivers 4660 a and 4660 b. Because the drivers 4660 a and4660 b are connected, the staples supported by the drivers 4660 a, 4660b are fired simultaneously by the sled assembly. Each driver 4660 a and4660 b includes a cradle 4670 for supporting the base of the staple. Aguide 4662 a and 4662 b extends laterally from each driver 4660 a and4660 b, respectively. The first guide 4662 a extends in a firstdirection and forms an outside portion of the connected driver 4658 andthe second guide 4662 b extends in a second, opposite direction andforms an inside portion of the connected driver 4658. Ramped surfaces4664 a and 4664 b on the guides 4662 a and 4662 b, respectively, arepositioned for driving contact with the camming surfaces of a sledassembly. The guides 4662 a and 4662 b are driven upward in channels inthe cartridge body 4800, such as the channels 3036 in the staplecartridge 3000 (FIG. 55), for example, when the drivers 4660 a, 4660 bare moved to a fired position by the sled assembly. The channels form avertical support structure through which the guides 4662 a, 4662 b aresupported as they are driven by the camming surfaces. As describedherein, the camming surfaces can be longitudinally offset. In suchinstances, the ramped surfaces 4664 a, 4664 b are correspondinglyoffset, as depicted in FIGS. 71 and 73. In other instances, the rampedsurfaces 4664 a and 4664 b can be aligned.

Referring now to FIGS. 74 and 75, a staple cartridge body 4700 isdepicted. The staple cartridge body 4700 is similar in many aspects tothe staple cartridge body 3000. For example, the staple cartridge body4700 includes a first pattern 4720 of angularly-oriented staple cavities4710, which are arranged in a herringbone pattern. A slot 4704 extendsthrough a deck 4702 of the staple cartridge body 4700 along thelongitudinal axis LA of the cartridge body 4700. The staple cartridgebody 4700 also includes proximal staple cavities 4710 a-4710 f arrangedin a proximal pattern 4722. The proximal pattern 4722 includes innerstaple cavities 4710 c and 4710 d, which are oriented parallel to thelongitudinal axis LA. The proximal pattern 4722 also includesangularly-oriented outer staple cavities 4710 a and 4710 f, andangularly-oriented intermediate cavities 4710 b and 4710 e. The outerstaple cavities 4710 a and 4710 f and the intermediate staple cavities4710 b and 4710 e are oriented at oblique angles relative to thelongitudinal axis LA. The angularly-oriented outer staple cavities 4710a and 4710 f are also oriented at oblique angles relative to the cavityaxes of the staple cavities 4710 in the first pattern 4720. The outerstaple cavities 4710 a and 4710 f are less angled than the staplecavities 4710 in the first pattern 4720. In other words, the outerstaple cavities 4710 a and 4710 f are oriented at an angle that iscloser to parallel with the longitudinal axis LA than the staplecavities 4710 in the first pattern 4720. In such instances, the proximalpattern 4722 can be less flexible than the first pattern 4720.

The intermediate staple cavities 4710 b and 4710 e are oriented parallelto certain staple cavities 4710 in the first pattern 4020. For example,the intermediate staple cavities 4710 b and 4710 e are oriented parallelto the staple cavities 4710 in an inner row in the first pattern 4720.Though certain staple cavities in the proximal pattern 4722 are notangularly offset from the staple cavities in the first pattern 4020, theproximal pattern 4722, when considered as a whole, is different than thefirst pattern 4020 and is different than the longitudinally-repetitivesub-patterns within the first pattern 4020.

The proximal pattern 4722 includes three staple cavities positioned oneach side of the slot 4704. In other instances, less than three staplecavities or more than three staple cavities can be arranged in theproximal pattern 4722 on one or both sides of the slot 4704. Theproximal pattern 4722 does not include a longitudinally-repetitivesub-pattern. In other instances, the proximal pattern 4722 can belongitudinally repetitive. Additionally, the proximal pattern 4722 issymmetric relative to the longitudinal axis LA. In other instances, theproximal pattern 4722 can be asymmetric relative to the longitudinalaxis LA.

Drivers 4760 are positioned in the staple cavities 4710 in the cartridgebody 4700. The drivers 4760 in the staple cavities 4710 of the firstpattern 4720 are triple drivers, as described herein. Proximal drivers4760 a, 4760 b, 4760 c, 4760 d, 4710 e, and 4710 f are positioned in theproximal staple cavities 4710 a, 4710 b, 4710 c, 4710 d, 4710 e, and4710 f respectively, of the proximal pattern 4722. The proximal drivers4760 a-4760 f are single drivers. In certain instances, the proximaldrivers 4760 c and 4760 d in the inner cavities 4710 c and 4710 d,respectively, can be single drivers, the proximal drivers 4760 a and4760 b can be connected drivers, and the proximal drivers 4760 e and4760 f can be connected drivers. In still other instances, the proximaldrivers 4760 a, 4760 b, and 4760 c can comprise a first connecteddriver, and the distal drivers 4760 d, 4760 e, and 4760 f can comprise asecond connected driver.

The reader will appreciate that the various patterns of staple cavitiesdescribed herein can be combined and/or interchanged. In certaininstances, one or more irregular patterns of staple cavities can bedefined at the proximal and/or distal end of a staple cartridge body.Additionally or alternatively, one or more irregular patterns, or minorpatterns, can be sandwiched or inserted within a major pattern.

The angular orientation of staples in a staple line can influence theflexibility or compliance of the stapled tissue along the staple line.For example, the flexibility of a staple line can increase when staplesare oriented at an oblique angle relative to the longitudinal axisand/or cutline. Such an angular orientation can provide flexibility orextendibility, within certain limits, in response to forces, such astension and/or torsion, along and/or adjacent to the cutline. Morespecifically, the flexibility in the staple line can permit stretching,buckling, folding, and/or twisting of the stapled tissue. Generally, asthe angular orientation of a staple approaches 45 degrees or 135 degreesrelative to the longitudinal axis of the staple line and/or the cutline,the flexibility of the stapled tissue increases. A staple line comprisedof angularly-oriented staples can be considered a compliant or elasticstaple line, for example.

In certain instances, the flexibility of a staple line can varylaterally relative to the cutline. For example, one or more staples in afirst portion of the staple line can be oriented at a first anglerelative to the cutline and one or more staples in a second portion ofthe staple line can be oriented at a different angle relative to thecutline. The first portion of the staple line can have a firstflexibility and the second portion of the staple line can have adifferent flexibility. In certain instances, the first portion can belaterally offset from the second portion. For example, the first portionof the staple line can include a first row of staples or portion of thefirst row, and the second portion of the staple line can include asecond row of staples or portion of the second row. In such instances,the flexibility of the staple line along the first row of staples can bedifferent than the flexibility of the staple line along the second rowof staples.

Referring now to FIG. 76, a portion of a staple cartridge body 3200 isdepicted. The staple cartridge body 3200 includes a deck 3202 and alongitudinal slot 3204. The longitudinal slot 3204 extends along thelongitudinal axis LA. Staple cavities 3210 are defined in the staplecartridge body 3200, and each staple cavity 3210 defines an opening 3212in the deck 3202. A staple 3242 is positioned in each staple cavity3210. The staple 3242 can be similar in many aspects to the staple 3042(FIG. 59) or the staple 3142 (FIG. 60). In certain instances, the legsof each staple 3242 can be biased against the inside wall of the staplecavity 3210. The reader will appreciate that the arrangement of staples3242 in the staple cavities 3210 corresponds to the arrangement ofstaples 3242 in a staple line when the staples 3242 are fired from thestaple cartridge body 3200 and into tissue. More specifically, the basesof each staple 3242 in a resultant staple line are collinear, orsubstantially collinear, with the cavities axes CA.

The staple cavity openings 3212 are arranged in three rows 3214 a, 3214b, and 3214 c on a first side of the longitudinal slot 3204. Inneropenings 3212 a define the perimeter of inner cavities 3210 a in theinner row 3214 a, intermediate openings 3212 b define the perimeter ofintermediate cavities 3210 b in the intermediate row 3214 b, and outeropenings 3212 c define the perimeter of outer cavities 3210 c in theouter row 3214 c. Inner staples 3242 a are positioned in the innercavities 3210 a, intermediate staples 3242 b are positioned in theintermediate cavities 3210 b, and outer staples 3242 c are positioned inthe outer cavities 3210 c. Although not shown in FIG. 76, in at leastone instance, the staple cavities 3210 on the opposing side of the slot3204 form a mirror image reflection of the staple cavities 3210 on thefirst side of the longitudinal slot 3204. Consequently, the arrangementof staples 3242 in a resultant staple line is symmetric relative to thecutline. In other instances, the staple line can be asymmetric relativeto the cutline.

Each staple cavity opening 3212 has a first end, or proximal end, 3216and a second end, or distal end, 3218. A cavity axis CA extends betweenthe proximal end 3216 and the distal end 3218 of each opening 3212. Thestaple cavity openings 3212 in each respective row are parallel. Forexample, the inner cavities 3210 a are oriented at an angle A relativeto the longitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g.,CA_(A1) and CA_(A2)) of the inner openings 3212 a are oriented at theangle A relative to the longitudinal axis LA. The intermediate cavities3210 b are oriented at an angle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA.Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g., CA_(B1) and CA_(B2)) of theintermediate openings 3212 b are oriented at the angle B relative to thelongitudinal axis LA. The outer cavities 3210 c are oriented at an angleC relative to the longitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, the cavityaxes (e.g., CA_(C1) and CA_(C2)) defined by the outer openings 3212 areoriented at the angle C relative to the longitudinal axis LA.

The angles A, B, and C are different. Consequently, the inner openings3212 a are obliquely oriented relative to the outer openings 3212 c.Because the cavity axes CA of the outer openings 3212 c (e.g., axesCA_(C1) and CA_(C2)) are not parallel to the cavity axes of the inneropenings 3212 a (e.g., axes CA_(A1) and CA_(A2)), the openings 3212 inthe staple cartridge body 3200 form a modified or skewed herringbonepattern. The cavity axes CA_(B1) and CA_(B2) of the intermediateopenings 3212 b can be oriented perpendicular, or substantiallyperpendicular, to either the inner openings 3212 a or the outer openings3212 c. For example, the angle B can be a supplementary angle to eitherangle A or angle C. In other instances, the angle B may not be asupplementary angle to either angle A or angle C.

Owing to the different angles A, B, and C, the widths W_(A), W_(B),W_(C) of the staple rows in the staple line can be different. Forexample, the inner staples 3242 a form a row of staples having a widthW_(A), the intermediate staples 3242 b form a row of staples having awidth W_(B), and the outer staples 3242 c form a row of staples having awidth W_(C). The widths W_(A) and W_(C) are different because the angleA is different than the angle C. In certain instances, the width W_(B)is different than the widths W_(A) and W_(C). In other instances, thewidth W_(B) can match one of the widths W_(A) or W_(C). For example, ifthe angle B is a supplementary angle to angle A, the width W_(B) matchesthe width W_(A). Similarly, if the angle B is a supplementary angle toangle C, the width W_(B) matches the width W_(C).

Furthermore, owing to the different angles A, B, and C, the longitudinallengths L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C) of the staples 3242 a, 3242 b, and 3242c, respectively, are different. For example, the inner staples 3242 ahave a longitudinal length L_(A), the intermediate staples 3242 b have alongitudinal length L_(B), and the outer staples 3242 c have alongitudinal length L_(C). The longitudinal lengths L_(A) and L_(C) aredifferent because the angle A is different than the angle C. Because thelongitudinal lengths L_(A) and L_(C) are different, the inner staples3242 a are at least partially longitudinally staggered or offsetrelative to the outer staples 3242 c. Stated differently, at least oneend of each inner staple 3242 a is not aligned with a corresponding endof an outer staple 3242 b. Because the ends are not aligned, thelongitudinal overlap and/or gap with respect to the intermediate staples3242 b differs between the inner staples 3242 a and the outer staples3242 c. In certain instances, the longitudinal length L_(B) is differentthan the lengths L_(A) and L_(C). In other instances, the longitudinallength L_(B) can match one of the longitudinal lengths L_(A) or L_(C).For example, if the angle B is a supplementary angle to angle A, thelongitudinal length L_(B) matches the longitudinal length L_(A).Similarly, if the angle B is a supplementary angle to angle C, thelongitudinal length L_(B) matches the longitudinal length L_(C).

The length of the staple bases may also impact the widths W_(A), W_(B),and W_(C) and the longitudinal lengths L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C). In thestaple cartridge body 3200, the inner staples 3242 a, the intermediatestaples 3242 b, and the outer staples 3242 c have the same length base.For example, identical staples can be positioned in each staple cavity3210. In other instances, as further described herein, staples havingdifferent geometries and/or sizes, such as bases of different lengths,for example, can be positioned in certain staple cavities in a cartridgebody.

Referring still to FIG. 76, the angular orientation of the staplecavities 3210 a, 3210 b, and 3210 c, and the corresponding widths W_(A),W_(B), and W_(C) and longitudinal lengths L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C),respectively, can impact the amount of lateral and longitudinal overlapin the staple line. The longitudinal and lateral overlap between thestaples 3242 also depends on the spacing of the staple cavities 3210.Generally, a greater overlap between adjacent staples corresponds toless direct fluid pathways, which can correspond to greater tissuesealing properties. A greater overlap can also decrease the flexibilityof the staple line because the tissue may be more constrained in theoverlapped region. Moreover, a greater overlap can correspond to lessspacing between the staples. In certain instances, it can be desirableto modify the degree of lateral and/or longitudinal overlap in a stapleline. As the overlap varies, the flexibility and sealing properties ofthe staple line can also vary.

The overlap or degree of overlap described herein can refer to apositive overlap or a negative overlap, for example. When staples and/orrows of staples define a negative overlap, the staples and/or rows ofstaples may be spaced apart such that they do not overlap and a gap isdefined therebetween. In still other instances, the staples or rows ofstaples can be aligned such that the overlap is equal to the diameter ofthe staples.

The reader will further appreciate that the degree of overlap withrespect to the staples or rows of staples in a staple cartridgecorresponds to the degree of overlap with respect to the staple cavitiesor rows of staple cavities in the staple cartridge. For example,relative differences in the lateral and/or longitudinal overlaps betweenstaples or rows of staples correspond to the relative differences in thelateral and/or longitudinal overlaps in the staple cavities or rows ofstaple cavities in the staple cartridge. In certain instances, at leasta portion of the staple legs can be positioned against and/or biasedinto the inside walls of the staple cavities at the proximal and distalends of the staple cavity. In such instances, a distance measured withrespect to the outside edges of the staples equal the distance measuredwith respect to the inside edges of the corresponding staple cavities.In other instances, the difference between such distances can be minimalor insignificant.

In certain instances, the degree of overlap can be minimized, such aswhen ends of the staples are aligned. When the ends of the staples arealigned, the overlap is equal, or substantially equal, to the diameterof the staples. For example, if the staples are comprised of a wirehaving a diameter of about 0.0079 inches, the overlap can be about0.0079 inches. In other instances, the overlap can be less than thediameter of staples. For example, the overlap can be less than about0.0079 inches. In still other instances, the degree of overlap can be anon-overlap or negative overlap, i.e., a space or gap between the endsof the staples. In still other instances, a minimized overlap can beequal to or less than one-third of the staple length. For example, theoverlap can be less 33% of the staple length. In other instances, theoverlap can be less than 25% or less than 10% of the staple length. Instill other instances, the overlap can be more than 33% of the staplelength, for example.

In certain instances, a staple line can include a first degree ofoverlap between the inner and intermediate rows of staples and a seconddegree of overlap between the intermediate and outer rows of staples.The second degree of overlap can be different from the first degree ofoverlap in a lateral and/or longitudinal direction. Consequently, aninner portion of the staple line can comprise a different flexibilitythan an outer portion of the staple line. Moreover, the tissue sealingproperties of the inner portion can be different than the tissue sealingproperties of the outer portion.

Referring again to FIG. 76, the angle A is less than the angle C.Consequently, the width W_(A) is less than the width W_(C) and thelength L_(A) is greater than the length L_(C). The angle A can be 35degrees to 40 degrees, for example, and the angle C can be 43 degrees to47 degrees, for example. In other instances, the angle A can be lessthan 35 degrees or more than 40 degrees and/or the angle C can be lessthan 43 degrees or more than 47 degrees. The difference between theangle A and the angle C can be between three degrees and twelve degrees.For example, the difference can be about eight degrees. In still otherinstances, the difference between the angle A and the angle C can beless than three degrees or more than twelve degrees.

Referring still to FIG. 76, the staples 3242 in each respective row arealigned. More specifically, the proximal ends of the inner staples 3242a are longitudinally aligned, the distal ends of the inner staples 3242a are longitudinally aligned, the proximal ends of the intermediatestaples 3242 b are longitudinally aligned, the distal ends of theintermediate staples 3242 b are longitudinally aligned, the proximalends of the outer staples 3242 c are longitudinally aligned, and thedistal ends of the outer staples 3242 c are longitudinally aligned. Thealigned staples 3242 in each row 3214 a, 3214 b, and 3214 c of staplecavities 3310 are configured to form rows of aligned staples 3242 in astaple line. Owing to the angular orientation of the staples 3242 andthe spacing therebetween, the rows of staples 3242 laterally overlap.The inner staples 3242 a laterally overlap the intermediate staples 3242b by a lateral overlap Y_(A/B) and the outer staples 3242 c laterallyoverlap the intermediate staples 3242 b by a lateral overlap Y_(B/C).The lateral overlap Y_(A/B) between the inner staples 3242 a and theintermediate staples 3242 b is greater than the lateral overlap Y_(B/C)between the outer staples 3242 c and the intermediate staples 3242 b. Insuch instances, the outer staples are positioned closer to theintermediate staples than the inner staples are positioned to theintermediate staples. In other instances, the lateral overlap Y_(A/B)can be less than or equal to the lateral overlap Y_(B/C).

The intermediate staples 3242 b are longitudinally staggered withrespect to the inner staples 3242 a and the outer staples 3242 c. Inparticular, each intermediate staple 3242 b is positioned longitudinallyequidistant between adjacent inner staples 3242 a and longitudinallyequidistant between adjacent outer staples 3242 c. Owing to the angularorientation of the staples 3242 and the spacing therebetween, thestaples 3242 do not longitudinally overlap. The inner staples 3242 a arespaced apart from the intermediate staples 3242 b by a longitudinal gapX_(A/B) and the outer staples 3242 c are spaced apart from theintermediate staples 3242 b by a longitudinal gap X_(B/C). Thelongitudinal gap X_(A/B) between the inner staples 3242 a and theintermediate staples 3242 b is less than the longitudinal gap X_(B/C)between the outer staples 3242 c and the intermediate staples 3242 b. Inother instances, the longitudinal gap X_(A/B) can be greater than orequal to the longitudinal gap X_(B/C). In certain instances, theintermediate staples 3242 b can longitudinally overlap the inner staples3242 a and/or the outer staples 3242 c.

The lateral overlaps and longitudinal gaps generated by the arrangementof staple cavities in FIG. 76 can be sufficient to sufficiently obstructthe fluid pathways across the staple line to seal the tissue. In variousinstances, the lateral and/or longitudinal overlaps and/or gaps can beconfigured to selectively optimize the sealing properties of the stapleline. Additionally or alternatively, the lateral and/or longitudinaloverlaps and/or gaps can be configured to selectively optimize theflexibility of the staple line. Moreover, the overlaps can be minimized.In certain instances, the lateral overlaps can be less than one-third ofthe staple length and, in at least one instance, can equal approximatelythe diameter of the staple.

Referring now to FIG. 77, a portion of a staple cartridge body 3300 isdepicted. The staple cartridge body 3300 includes a deck 3302 and alongitudinal slot 3304. The longitudinal slot 3304 extends along thelongitudinal axis LA. Staple cavities 3310 are defined in the staplecartridge body 3300, and each staple cavity 3310 includes an opening3312 in the deck 3302. A staple 3342 is positioned in each staple cavity3310. The staple 3342 can be similar in many aspects to the staple 3042(FIG. 59) or the staple 3142 (FIG. 60). In certain instances, the legsof each staple 3342 can be biased against the inside wall of the staplecavity 3310. The reader will appreciate that the arrangement of staples3342 in the staple cavities 3310 corresponds to the arrangement ofstaples 3342 in a staple line when the staples 3342 are fired from thestaple cartridge body 3300 and into tissue. More specifically, the basesof each staple 3342 in a resultant staple line are collinear, orsubstantially collinear, with the cavities axes CA.

The staple cavity openings 3312 are arranged in three rows 3314 a, 3314b, and 3314 c on a first side of the longitudinal slot 3304. Inneropenings 3312 a define the perimeter of inner cavities 3310 a in theinner row 3314 a, intermediate openings 3312 b define the perimeter ofintermediate cavities 3310 b in the intermediate row 3314 b, and outeropenings 3312 c define the perimeter of outer cavities 3310 c in theouter row 3314 c. Inner staples 3342 a are positioned in the innercavities 3310 a, intermediate staples 3342 b are positioned in theintermediate cavities 3310 b, and outer staples 3342 c are positioned inthe outer cavities 3310 c. Although not shown in FIG. 77, in at leastone instance, the staple cavities 3310 on the opposing side of the slot3304 form a mirror image reflection of the staple cavities 3310 on thefirst side of the longitudinal slot 3304. Consequently, the arrangementof staples 3342 in a resultant staple line is symmetric relative to thecutline. In other instances, the staple line can be asymmetric relativeto the cutline.

Each staple cavity opening 3312 has a first end, or proximal end, 3316and a second end, or distal end, 3318. A cavity axis CA extends betweenthe proximal end 3316 and the distal end 3318 of each opening 3312. Thestaple cavity openings 3312 in each respective row are parallel. Forexample, the inner cavities 3310 a are oriented at an angle A relativeto the longitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g.,CA_(A)) of the inner openings 3312 a are oriented at the angle Arelative to the longitudinal axis LA. The intermediate cavities 3310 bare oriented at an angle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA. Stateddifferently, the cavity axes (e.g., CA_(B)) of the intermediate openings3312 b are oriented at the angle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA.The outer cavities 3310 c are oriented at an angle C relative to thelongitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g., CA_(C))defined by the outer openings 3312 c are oriented at the angle Crelative to the longitudinal axis LA.

In the staple cartridge body 3300, the angle A is equal to the angle C,and the angle B is a supplementary angle to the angles A and C.Consequently, the inner openings 3312 a are parallel to outer openings3312 c and the intermediate openings 3312 b are perpendicular to theinner and outer openings 3312 a and 3312 c, respectively. The staplecavity openings 3312 in the staple cartridge body 3300 form aherringbone pattern. Moreover, referring still to FIG. 77, the staples3342 in each row 3314 a, 3314 b, 3314 c have the same length base BL.The widths of the staple rows are equal, and the longitudinal lengths ofthe staples 3342 are also equal.

Referring still to FIG. 77, the longitudinal overlap X_(A/B) between theinner staples 3342 a and the intermediate staples 3342 b is equal to thelongitudinal overlap X_(B/C) between the outer staples 3342 c and theintermediate staples 3342 b. Moreover, the lateral overlap Y_(A/B)between the inner staples 3342 a and the intermediate staples 3342 b isequal to the lateral overlap Y_(B/C) between the outer staples 3342 cand the intermediate staples 3342 b. In such instances, the intermediatestaples 3342 b are positioned equidistantly close to the inner staples3342 a and the outer staples 3342 c.

Referring still to FIG. 77, the spacing between the staple cavities 3310in the cartridge body 3300 is minimized. For example, the proximal anddistal ends 3316, 3318 of the staple cavity openings 3312 are positionedadjacent to other staple cavities 3312. In certain instances, adjacentstaple cavities can be in abutting contact. By minimizing the spacingbetween the staple cavities 3310, the density of the staple cavities3310 and the degree of overlap between the staple cavities 3310 in thearrangement of FIG. 77 is maximized. Although the degree of overlap ismaximized, because of the close proximity of the staple cavities, thelateral overlap is still less than one-third of the staple length.

In other instances, the angular orientation of the staple cavities in atleast one row of staple cavities can differ from the angular orientationof the staple cavities in other rows. Additionally or alternatively, thelength of the staple bases in at least one row of staple cavities candiffer from the length of the staple bases in at least one other row.Additionally or alternatively, the staple cavities may not beequidistantly staggered or offset from adjacent staple cavities in eachadjacent row. Such variations to the staple cartridge and staplestherein can generate staple lines with varying properties laterally withrespect to the cutline.

In certain instances, the staples in an inner portion of the stapleline, such as the staples fired from the inner rows of staple cavities,for example, can have a different base length than the staples in anouter portion of the staple line. For example, the staples in the innerrow of staple cavities on each side of a knife slot can have a longerbase than the staples in the other rows of staple cavities. The longerbases can provide greater sealing capabilities because more tissue canbe captured by the staples, for example. Additionally or alternatively,the longer bases can reinforce the staple line and reduce theflexibility thereof.

Referring now to FIG. 78, a portion of a staple cartridge body 3400 isdepicted. The staple cartridge body 3400 includes a deck 3402 and alongitudinal slot 3404. The longitudinal slot 3404 extends along thelongitudinal axis LA. Staple cavities 3410 are defined in the staplecartridge body 3400, and each staple cavity 3410 defines an opening 3412in the deck 3402. A staple 3442 is positioned in each staple cavity3410. The staple 3442 can be similar in many aspects to the staple 3042(FIG. 59) or the staple 3142 (FIG. 60). In certain instances, the legsof each staple 3442 can be biased against the inside wall of the staplecavity 3410. The reader will appreciate that the arrangement of staples3442 in the staple cavities 3410 corresponds to the arrangement ofstaples 3442 in a staple line when the staples 3442 are fired from thecartridge body 3400 and into tissue. More specifically, the bases ofeach staple 3442 in a resultant staple line are collinear, orsubstantially collinear, with the cavities axes CA.

The staple cavity openings 3412 are arranged in three rows 3414 a, 3414b, and 3414 c on a first side of the longitudinal slot 3404. Inneropenings 3412 a define the perimeter of inner cavities 3410 a in theinner row 3414 a, intermediate openings 3412 b define the perimeter ofintermediate cavities 3410 b in the intermediate row 3414 b, and outeropenings 3412 c define the perimeter of outer cavities 3410 c in theouter row 3414 c. Inner staples 3442 a are positioned in the innercavities 3410 a, intermediate staples 3442 b are positioned in theintermediate cavities 3410 b, and outer staples 3442 c are positioned inthe outer cavities 3410 c. Although not shown in FIG. 78, in at leastone instance, the staple cavities 3410 on the opposing side of the slot3404 form a mirror image reflection of the staple cavities 3410 on thefirst side of the longitudinal slot 3404. Consequently, the arrangementof staples 3442 in a resultant staple line is symmetric relative to thecutline. In other instances, the staple line can be asymmetric relativeto the cutline.

Each staple cavity opening 3412 has a first end, or proximal end, 3416and a second end, or distal end, 3418. A cavity axis CA extends betweenthe proximal end 3416 and the distal end 3418 of each opening 3412. Thestaple cavity openings 3412 in each row are parallel. For example, theinner cavities 3410 a are oriented at an angle A relative to thelongitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g., CA_(A))of the inner openings 3412 a are oriented at the angle A relative to thelongitudinal axis LA. The intermediate cavities 3410 b are oriented atan angle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, thecavity axes (e.g., CA_(B)) of the intermediate openings 3412 b areoriented at the angle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA. The outercavities 3410 c are oriented at an angle C relative to the longitudinalaxis LA. Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g., CA_(C)) defined bythe outer openings 3412 c are oriented at the angle C relative to thelongitudinal axis LA.

The angles A, B, and C are different. The inner openings 3412 a areobliquely oriented relative to the outer openings 3412 c. The angle A isless than the angle C. Because the axes of outer openings 3412 c (e.g.,axis CA_(C)) are not parallel to the axes of inner openings 3412 a(e.g., axis CA_(A)), the staple cavity openings 3412 in the staplecartridge body 3400 form a modified or skewed herringbone pattern. Thecavity axes CA_(B) of the intermediate openings 3412 b can be orientedperpendicular, or substantially perpendicular, to either the inneropenings 3412 a or the outer openings 3412 c. For example, the angle Bcan be a supplementary angle to either angle A or C. In other instances,the angle B may not be a supplementary angle to either angle A or C.

Referring still to FIG. 78, the inner staples 3442 a have a base lengthBL_(A), the intermediate staples 3442 b have a base length BL_(B), andthe outer staples 3442 c have a base length BL_(C). The base lengthBL_(A) is greater than the base length BL_(B) and the base lengthBL_(C). In other words, the inner staples 3442 a are longer than theintermediate staples 3442 b and the outer staples 3442 c. Moreover, thestaple cavities 3410 housing the inner staples 3442 a arecorrespondingly larger to accommodate the longer length base BL_(A).

The arrangement of staple cavities 3410 in the cartridge body 3400provides a longitudinal overlap X_(A/B) between inner staples 3442 a andthe intermediate staples 3442 b at both the proximal and distal ends ofthe intermediate staples 3442 b. The intermediate staples 3442 b areequidistantly spaced and longitudinally staggered between two adjacentinner staples 3442 a. The intermediate staples 3442 b are alsoequidistantly spaced and longitudinally staggered between two adjacentouter staples 3442 c. The proximal end of each outer staple 3442 c islongitudinally aligned with the distal end of an intermediate staple3442 b and the distal end of each outer staple 3442 c is longitudinallyaligned with the proximal end of another intermediate staple 3442 b. Inother words, such staples are longitudinally aligned and thelongitudinal overlap is equal to the diameter of the staples 3442. Thearrangement of staples cavities 3410 in the cartridge body 3400 alsoprovides a lateral gap Y_(A/B) between the inner row 3414 a and theintermediate row 3414 b and a lateral overlap Y_(B/C) between the outerrow 3414 c and the intermediate row 3414 b. In such instances, theintermediate staples 3442 b are positioned closer to the outer staples3442 c than to the inner staples 3442 a.

Referring still to FIG. 78, a staple line generated by the staplecartridge body 3400 can have different properties laterally with respectto the cutline. In particular, the staple line may have a greatersealing effectiveness along the cutline than laterally outward from thecutline. Furthermore, the staple line may have a greater flexibilitylaterally away from the cutline than inward toward the cutline. Forexample, because the bases BL_(A) of the inner staples 3442 a are longerthan the bases BL_(B) and BL_(C) of the intermediate staples 3442 b andthe outer staples 3442 c, respectively, an inner portion of the stapleline may have greater sealing effectiveness and/or less flexibility thanan outer portion of the staple line. Additionally or alternatively,because the inner staples 3442 a are oriented at an angle that is lessthan the outer staples 3442 c and is closer to a parallel orientationthan the outer staples 3442 c, an inner portion of the staple line mayhave greater sealing effectiveness and/or less flexibility than an outerportion of the staple line. Additionally or alternatively, because theintermediate staples 3442 b longitudinally overlap the inner staples3442 a but do not longitudinally overlap the outer staples 3442 c, aninner portion of the staple line may have greater sealing effectivenessand/or less flexibility than an outer portion of the staple line. Theamount of overlap can be minimized. For example, the overlap can be lessthan one-third of the staple length and, in at least one instance, canequal approximately the diameter of the staple.

In certain instances, the staples in an outer portion of the stapleline, such as the staples fired from the outer rows of staple cavities,for example, can have a different base length than the staples in aninner portion of the staple line. For example, the staples in the outerrow of staple cavities on each side of a knife slot can have a shorterbase than the staples in the other rows of staple cavities. The shorterbases can provide increased flexibility of the staple line, for example.

Referring now to FIG. 79, a portion of a staple cartridge body 3500 isdepicted. The staple cartridge body 3500 includes a deck 3502 and alongitudinal slot 3504. The longitudinal slot 3504 extends along thelongitudinal axis LA. Staple cavities 3510 are defined in the staplecartridge body 3500, and each staple cavity 3510 defines an opening 3512in the deck 3502. A staple 3542 is positioned in each staple cavity3510. The staple 3542 can be similar in many aspects to the staple 3042(FIG. 59) or the staple 3142 (FIG. 60). In certain instances, the legsof each staple 3542 can be biased against the inside wall of the staplecavity 3510. The reader will appreciate that the arrangement of staples3542 in the staple cavities 3510 corresponds to the arrangement ofstaples 3542 in a staple line when the staples 3542 are fired from thecartridge body 3500 and into tissue. More specifically, the bases ofeach staple 3542 in a resultant staple line are collinear, orsubstantially collinear, with the cavities axes CA.

The staple cavity openings 3512 are arranged in three rows 3514 a, 3514b, and 3514 c on a first side of the longitudinal slot 3504. Inneropenings 3512 a define the perimeter of inner cavities 3510 a in theinner row 3514 a, intermediate openings 3512 b define the perimeter ofintermediate cavities 3510 b in the intermediate row 3514 b, and outeropenings 3512 c define the perimeter of outer cavities 3510 c in theouter row 3514 c. Inner staples 3542 a are positioned in the innercavities 3510 a, intermediate staples 3542 b are positioned in theintermediate cavities 3510 b, and outer staples 3542 c are positioned inthe outer cavities 3510 c. Although not shown in FIG. 79, in at leastone instance, the staple cavities 3510 on the opposing side of the slot3504 form a mirror image reflection of the staple cavities 3510 on thefirst side of the longitudinal slot 3504. Consequently, the arrangementof staples 3542 in a resultant staple line is symmetric relative to thecutline. In other instances, the staple line can be asymmetric relativeto the cutline.

Each staple cavity opening 3512 has a first end, or proximal end, 3516and a second end, or distal end, 3518. A cavity axis CA extends betweenthe proximal end 3516 and the distal end 3518 of each opening 3512. Thestaple cavity openings 3512 in each row are parallel. For example, theinner cavities 3510 a are oriented at an angle A relative to thelongitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g., CA_(A))of the inner openings 3512 a are oriented at the angle A relative to thelongitudinal axis LA. The intermediate cavities 3510 b are oriented atan angle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, thecavity axes (e.g., CA_(B)) of the intermediate openings 3512 b areoriented at the angle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA. The outercavities 3510 c are oriented at an angle C relative to the longitudinalaxis LA. Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g., CA_(C)) defined bythe outer openings 3512 c are oriented at the angle C relative to thelongitudinal axis LA.

The angles A, B, and C may be different. The inner openings 3512 a areobliquely oriented relative to the outer openings 3512 c. The angle A isless than the angle C. Because the axes of the outer openings 3512 c(e.g., axis CA_(C)) are not parallel to the axes of the inner openings3512 a (e.g., axis CA_(A)), the staple cavity openings 3512 in thestaple cartridge body 3500 form a modified or skewed herringbonepattern. The cavity axes CA_(B) of the intermediate openings 3512 b canbe oriented perpendicular, or substantially perpendicular, to either theinner openings 3512 a or the outer openings 3512 c. For example, theangle B can be a supplementary angle to either angle A or C. In otherinstances, the angle B may not be a supplementary angle to either angleA or C.

The inner staples 3542 a have a base length BL_(A), the intermediatestaples 3542 b have a base length BL_(B), and the outer staples 3542 chave a base length BL_(C). The base length BL_(C) is less than the baselength BL_(B) and the base length BL_(A). In other words, the outerstaples 3542 c are shorter than the intermediate staples 3542 b and theinner staples 3542 a. Moreover, the staple cavities 3510 housing theouter staples 3542 c are correspondingly shorter to accommodate theshorter length base BL_(C).

The arrangement of staple cavities 3510 in the cartridge body 3500provides a longitudinal overlap X_(A/B) between the inner staples 3542 aand the intermediate staples 3542 b at both the proximal and distal endsof the intermediate staples 3542 b. The intermediate staples 3542 b areequidistantly spaced and longitudinally staggered between two adjacentinner staples 3542 a. The arrangement of staple cavities 3510 in thecartridge body 3500 also provides a longitudinal overlap X_(B/C) betweenthe intermediate staples 3542 b and the outer staples 3542 c at both theproximal and distal ends of the intermediate staples 3542 b. Theintermediate staples 3542 b are also equidistantly spaced andlongitudinally staggered between two adjacent outer staples 3542 c.Owing to the angular orientation and spacing of the staples 3542, thelongitudinal overlap X_(A/B) is greater than the longitudinal overlapX_(B/C). The arrangement of staples cavities 3510 in the cartridge body3500 also provides a lateral gap Y_(A/B) between the inner staples 3542a and the intermediate staples 3542 b and a lateral overlap Y_(B/C)between the outer staples 3542 c and the intermediate staples 3542 b. Insuch instances, the intermediate staples 3542 b are positioned closer tothe outer staples 3542 c than to the inner staples 3542 a.

Referring still to FIG. 79, a staple line generated by the staplecartridge body 3500 can have different properties laterally with respectto the cutline. In particular, the staple line may have a greatersealing effectiveness along the cutline than laterally outward from thecutline. Furthermore, the staple line may have a greater flexibilitylaterally away from the cutline than inward toward the cutline. Forexample, because the bases BL_(C) of the outer staples 3542 c areshorter than the bases BL_(A) and BL_(B) of the intermediate staples3542 b and the outer staples 3542 c, respectively, an inner portion ofthe staple line may have greater sealing effectiveness and/or lessflexibility than an outer portion of the staple line. Additionally oralternatively, because the inner staples 3542 a are oriented at an anglethat is less than the outer staples 3542 c and is closer to a parallelorientation than the outer staples 3542 c, an inner portion of thestaple line may have greater sealing effectiveness and/or lessflexibility than an outer portion of the staple line. Additionally oralternatively, because the intermediate staples 3542 b longitudinallyoverlap the inner staples 3542 a more than the intermediate staples 3542b longitudinally overlap the outer staples 3542 c, an inner portion ofthe staple line may have greater sealing effectiveness and/or lessflexibility than an outer portion of the staple line.

In various instances, the properties of the staple line can becustomized in each row of staples. The staples in each row of staplecavities on one side of a knife slot can have different base lengths.Additionally, the staples in each row of staple cavities on one side ofa knife slot can be oriented at different angles relative to the knifeslot. Moreover, the spacing between the cavities can be variedrow-to-row. For example, the size and orientation of the staples in eachrow can be selected to optimize the flexibility of the staple line andsealing properties in each row based on the row's position laterallyfrom the cutline toward the outer boundary of the staple line. Incertain instances, the sealing effectiveness can be maximized oremphasized along the cutline, for example, and the flexibility of thestaple line can be maximized or emphasized along the outer boundary ofthe staple line, for example. Alternatively, in certain instances, thesealing effectiveness can be maximized or emphasized along the outerboundary of the staple line and/or the flexibility of the staple linecan be maximized or emphasized along the cutline.

Referring now to FIG. 80, a portion of a staple cartridge body 3600 isdepicted. The staple cartridge body 3600 includes a deck 3602 and alongitudinal slot 3604. The longitudinal slot 3604 extends along thelongitudinal axis LA. Staple cavities 3610 are defined in the staplecartridge body 3600, and each staple cavity 3610 defines an opening 3612in the deck 3602. A staple 3642 is positioned in each staple cavity3610. The staple 3642 can be similar in many aspects to the staple 3042(FIG. 59) or the staple 3142 (FIG. 60). In certain instances, the legsof each staple 3642 can be biased against the inside wall of the staplecavity 3610. The reader will appreciate that the arrangement of staples3642 in the staple cavities 3610 corresponds to the arrangement ofstaples 3642 in a staple line when the staples 3642 are fired from thecartridge body 3600 and into tissue. More specifically, the bases ofeach staple 3642 in a resultant staple line are collinear, orsubstantially collinear, with the cavities axes CA.

The staple cavity openings 3612 are arranged in three rows 3614 a, 3614b, 3614 c on a first side of the longitudinal slot 3604. Inner openings3612 a define the perimeter of inner cavities 3610 a in the inner row3614 a, intermediate openings 3612 b define the perimeter ofintermediate cavities 3610 b in the intermediate row 3614 b, and outeropenings 3612 c define the perimeter of outer cavities 3610 c in theouter row 3614 c. Inner staples 3642 a are positioned in the innercavities 3610 a, intermediate staples 3642 b are positioned in theintermediate cavities 3610 b, and outer staples 3642 c are positioned inthe outer cavities 3610 c. Although not shown in FIG. 80, in at leastone instance, the staple cavities 3610 on the opposing side of the slot3604 form a mirror image reflection of the staple cavities 3610 on thefirst side of the longitudinal slot 3604. Consequently, the arrangementof staples 3642 in a resultant staple line is symmetric relative to thecutline. In other instances, the staple line can be asymmetric relativeto the cutline.

Each staple cavity opening 3612 has a first end, or proximal end, 3616and a second end, or distal end, 3618. A cavity axis CA extends betweenthe proximal end 3616 and the distal end 3618 of each opening 3612. Thestaple cavity openings 3612 in each row are parallel. For example, theinner cavities 3610 a are oriented at an angle A relative to thelongitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g., CA_(A))of the inner openings 3612 a are oriented at the angle A relative to thelongitudinal axis LA. The intermediate cavities 3610 b are oriented atan angle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, thecavity axes (e.g., CA_(B)) of the intermediate openings 3612 b areoriented at the angle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA. The outercavities 3610 c are oriented at an angle C relative to the longitudinalaxis LA. Stated differently, the cavity axes (e.g., CA_(C)) defined bythe outer openings 3612 c are oriented at the angle C relative to thelongitudinal axis LA.

The angles A, B, and C may be different. The inner openings 3612 a areobliquely oriented relative to the outer openings 3612 c. The angle A isless than the angle C. Because the axes of the outer openings 3612 c(e.g., axis CA_(C)) are not parallel to the axes of the inner openings3612 a (e.g., axis CA_(A)), the staple cavity openings 3612 in thestaple cartridge body 3600 form a modified or skewed herringbonepattern. The cavity axes CA_(B) of the intermediate openings 3612 b canbe oriented perpendicular, or substantially perpendicular, to either theinner openings 3612 a or the outer openings 3612 c. For example, theangle B can be a supplementary angle to either angle A or C. In otherinstances, the angle B may not be a supplementary angle to either angleA or C.

The inner staples 3642 a have a base length BL_(A), the intermediatestaples 3642 b have a base length BL_(B), and the outer staples 3642 chave a base length BL_(C). The base length BL_(C) is less than the baselength BL_(B), and the base length BL_(B) is less than the base lengthBL_(A). In other words, the length of the staples 3642 increaseslaterally toward the longitudinal slot 3604. Moreover, the staplecavities 3610 correspondingly increase in length laterally toward thelongitudinal slot 3604 to accommodate the larger staples.

The arrangement of staple cavities 3610 in the cartridge body 3600provides a longitudinal overlap X_(A/B) between the inner staples 3642 aand the intermediate staples 3642 b at both the proximal and distal endsof the intermediate staples 3642 b. The intermediate staples 3642 b areequidistantly spaced and longitudinally staggered between two adjacentinner staples 3642 a. The arrangement of staple cavities 3610 in thecartridge body 3600 also provides a longitudinal gap X_(B/C) between theintermediate staples 3642 b and the outer staples 3642 c at both theproximal and distal ends of the intermediate staples 3642 b. Theintermediate staples 3642 b are also equidistantly spaced andlongitudinally staggered between two adjacent outer staples 3642 c.Owing to the variations in the angular orientation of the staples, thespacing of the staples, and the length of the staples, the longitudinaloverlap X_(A/B) is greater than the longitudinal gap X_(B/C). In otherinstances, the longitudinal overlap X_(A/B) can be equal to or less thanthe longitudinal overlap X_(B/C). The arrangement of staples cavities3610 in the cartridge body 3600 also provides a lateral gap Y_(A/B)between the inner row 3614 a and the intermediate row 3614 b and alateral overlap Y_(B/C) between the outer row 3614 c and theintermediate row 3614 b.

Referring still to FIG. 80, a staple line generated by the staplecartridge body 3600 can have different properties laterally with respectto the cutline. In particular, the staple line may have a greatersealing effectiveness adjacent to the cutline than laterally outwardfrom the cutline. Furthermore, the staple line may have a greaterflexibility laterally away from the cutline than inward toward thecutline. For example, because the length of the bases BL_(A), BL_(B),and BL_(C) of the staples 3642 a, 3642 b, and 3642 c, respectively,increases laterally inward toward the cutline, an inner portion of thestaple line may have greater sealing effectiveness than an outer portionof the staple line. Additionally or alternatively, because the angularorientation of the staples 3642 a, 3642 b, and 3642 c increaseslaterally outward away from the cutline, an outer portion of the stapleline may have greater flexibility than an inner portion of the stapleline.

As described herein, staples are removably positioned in a staplecartridge and fired from the staple cartridge during use. In variousinstances, the staples can be driven out of staple cavities in thestaple cartridge and into forming contact with an anvil. For example, afiring element can translate through the staple cartridge during afiring stroke to drive the staples from the staple cartridge toward ananvil. In certain instances, the staples can be supported by stapledrivers and the firing element can lift the staple drivers to eject orremove the staples from the staple cartridge.

An anvil can include a staple-forming surface having staple-formingpockets defined therein. In certain instances, the staple-formingpockets can be stamped in the anvil. For example, the staple-formingpockets can be coined in a flat surface of the anvil. The reader willappreciate that certain features of the staple-forming pockets can be adeliberate consequence of a coining process. For example, a certaindegree of rounding at corners and/or edges of the staple-forming producecan be an intentional result of the coining process. Such features canalso be designed to better form the staples to their formedconfigurations, including staples that become skewed and/or otherwisemisaligned during deployment.

Each staple in the staple cartridge can be aligned with a staple-formingpocket of the anvil. In other words, the arrangement of staple cavitiesand staples in a staple cartridge for an end effector can correspond ormatch the arrangement of staple-forming pockets in an anvil of the endeffector. More specifically, the angular orientation of each staplecavity can match the angular orientation of the respectivestaple-forming pocket. For example, when the staple cavities arearranged in a herringbone pattern, the staple-forming pockets can alsobe arranged in a herringbone pattern.

When staples are driven from the staple cartridge and into formingcontact with the anvil, the staples can be formed into a firedconfiguration. In various instances, the fired configuration can be aB-form configuration, in which the tips of the staple legs are benttoward the staple base or crown to form a capital letter B havingsymmetrical upper and lower loops. In other instances, the firedconfiguration can be a modified B-form, such as a skewed B-formconfiguration, in which at least a portion of a staple leg torques outof plane with the staple base, or an asymmetrical B-form configuration,in which the upper and lower loops of the capital letter B areasymmetric. Tissue can be captured or clamped within the formed staple.

The arrangement of staples and/or staple cavities in a staple cartridgecan be configured to optimize the corresponding arrangement ofstaple-forming pockets in the forming surface of a complementary anvil.For example, the angular orientation and spacing of staples in a staplecartridge can be designed to optimize the forming surface of an anvil.In certain instances, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets in ananvil can be limited by the geometry of the anvil. In instances in whichthe staple-forming pockets are obliquely-oriented relative to alongitudinal axis, the width of the anvil can limit the size and spacingof the obliquely-oriented staple-forming pockets. For example, the widthof an intermediate row of staple-forming pockets can define a minimumdistance between a first row (e.g. an outer row) on one side of theintermediate row and a second row (e.g. an inner row) on the other sideof the intermediate row. Moreover, the rows of staple-forming pocketsare confined between an inside edge on the anvil, such as a knife slot,and an outside edge of the anvil.

In various instances, the pockets can be adjacently nested along astaple-forming surface of the anvil. For example, an intermediate pocketcan be nested between an inner pocket and an outer pocket. The angularorientation of the pockets can vary row-to-row to facilitate the nestingthereof. For example, the staple-forming pockets in an inner row can beoriented at a first angle, the staple-forming pockets in an intermediaterow can be oriented at a second angle, and the staple-forming pockets inan outer row can be oriented at a third angle. The first angle, thesecond angle, and the third angle can be different, which can facilitatethe close arrangement of the staple-forming pockets.

Referring again to the staple cartridges depicted in FIGS. 76-80, thevarying angles of the staples and the staple cavities in each row can beselected to optimize the nesting of the staple-forming pockets in acomplementary anvil. For each staple cartridge depicted in FIGS. 76-80,a complementary anvil can be configured to have a correspondingarrangement of staple-forming pockets. Moreover, the staple-formingpockets in the complementary anvils can be larger than the staplecavities depicted in FIGS. 76-80 to ensure that the staple legs land orfall within the staple-forming pockets. For example, the staple legs maybe biased outward, such as in the case of V-shaped staples (see FIG. 60)and the larger footprint of the staple-forming pockets can catch theoutwardly-biased staple legs during firing. In various instances, thestaple-forming pockets can be 0.005 inches to 0.015 inches longer thanthe corresponding staple cavities and/or staples. Additionally oralternatively, the staple-receiving cups of each staple-forming pocketcan be 0.005 inches to 0.015 inches wider than the corresponding staplecavities. In other instances, the difference in length and/or width canbe less than 0.005 inches or more than 0.015 inches.

In instances in which the size of the staples varies within a staplecartridge (see, e.g., FIGS. 78-80), the size of the staple-formingpockets can corresponding vary within a complementary anvil. Varying thesize of the staple-forming pockets can further facilitate the nestingthereof. For example, in instances in which staple-forming pockets in anintermediate row are shorter than the staple-forming pockets in an innerrow or an outer row, the width of the intermediate row of staple-formingpockets can be reduced, which can minimize the requisite spacing betweenthe inner row and the outer row.

The spacing of the staple-forming pockets can also be configured tooptimize the nesting thereof. For example, the pockets arranged in aninner row can be longitudinally staggered relative to the pocketsarranged in an outer row. Moreover, the pockets in the inner row canpartially longitudinally overlap the pockets in the outer row. Thepockets in an intermediate row can be longitudinally staggered relativeto the pockets in the inner row and the pockets in the outer row. Forexample, the pockets in the intermediate row can be equidistantlylongitudinally offset from the pockets in the outer row and the pocketsin the inner row.

Referring now to FIG. 129, an anvil 3700 is depicted. The anvil 3700 canbe complementary to the staple cartridge 3500 (FIG. 79). For example,the arrangement of staple-forming pockets 3706 in the anvil 3700 cancorrespond to the arrangement of staples 3542 and staple cavities 3510(FIG. 79) in the staple cartridge 3500. The anvil 3700 includes astaple-forming surface 3702 and a longitudinal slot 3704. Thelongitudinal slot 3704 extends along the longitudinal axis LA of theanvil 3700. In certain instances, a firing element and/or cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 3704 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. Staple-forming pockets 3706 are defined inthe staple-forming surface 3702. The staple-forming surface 3702 alsoincludes a non-forming portion 3708 that extends around the pockets3706. The non-forming portion 3708 extends entirely around each pocket3706 in FIG. 129. In other words, the non-forming portion 3708 surroundsthe staple-forming pockets 3706. In other instances, at least a portionof two or more adjacent pockets 3706 can be in abutting contact suchthat a non-forming portion 3708 is not positioned therebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 3702 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 3708 of the anvil 3700 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 3706. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 3706 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 3702 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 3706 depicted in FIG. 129 are arranged in three rows 3714 a,3714 b, 3714 c on a first side of the longitudinal slot 3704. The firstrow 3714 a is an inner row, the second row 3714 b is an intermediaterow, and the third row 3714 c is an outer row. Inner pockets 3706 a arepositioned in the inner row 3714 a, intermediate pockets 3706 b arepositioned in the intermediate row 3714 b, and outer pockets 3706 c arepositioned in the outer row 3714 c. The pockets 3706 are arranged in aherringbone arrangement along the staple-forming surface 3702 of theanvil 3700. Although not shown in FIG. 129, in at least one instance,the pockets 3706 on the opposing side of the slot 3704 can form a mirrorimage reflection of the pockets 3706 on the first side of thelongitudinal slot 3704. In other instances, the arrangement of pockets3706 in the staple-forming surface 3702 can be asymmetrical relative tothe slot 3704 and, in certain instances, the anvil 3700 may not includethe longitudinal slot 3704. In various instances, the pockets 3706 canbe arranged in less than or more than three rows on each side of theslot 3704.

Each pocket 3706 includes a perimeter 3716, which defines the boundaryof the pocket 3706 b. Each pocket 3706 also includes a proximal cup3720, a distal cup 3722, and a neck portion 3724 connecting the proximalcup 3720 and the distal cup 3722. When a staple is driven into formingcontact with the staple-forming surface 3702, the proximal cup 3720 isaligned with a proximal staple leg, and the distal cup 3722 is alignedwith a distal staple leg. The tips of the staple legs are positioned andconfigured to land in the respective cups 3720, 3722. Stateddifferently, the proximal cup 3720 is configured to receive a proximalstaple leg and the distal cup 3722 is configured to receive a distalstaple leg. The cups 3720 and 3722 are also configured to direct orfunnel the staple legs toward the pocket axis PA and a central portionof the pocket 3806, such as the neck portion 3724, and to deform thestaple legs into the formed configuration.

The geometry, spacing, and/or orientation of the pockets 3706 can varyrow-to-row. A pocket axis PA extends from the proximal cup 3720, throughthe neck portion 3724, and to the distal cup 3722 of each pocket 3706.The pockets 3706 in each row are parallel. For example, the innerpockets 3706 a are oriented at an angle A relative to the longitudinalaxis LA. Stated differently, the pocket axes (e.g., PA_(A)) of the innerpockets 3706 a are oriented at the angle A relative to the longitudinalaxis LA. The intermediate pockets 3706 b are oriented at an angle Brelative to the longitudinal axis LA. Stated differently, the pocketaxes (e.g., PA_(B)) of the inner pockets 3706 b are oriented at theangle B relative to the longitudinal axis LA. The outer pockets 3706 care oriented at an angle C relative to the longitudinal axis LA. Stateddifferently, the pocket axes (e.g., PA_(C)) of the inner pockets 3706 aare oriented at the angle C relative to the longitudinal axis LA.

The angles A, B, and C may be different. The inner pockets 3706 a areobliquely oriented relative to the outer pockets 3706 c. The angle A isless than the angle C. Because the axes of the outer pockets 3706 c(e.g., axis PA_(C)) are not parallel to the axes of the inner pockets3706 a (e.g., axis PA_(A)), the staple-forming pockets 3706 in the anvil3700 form a modified or skewed herringbone pattern. The pocket axesPA_(B) of the intermediate pockets 3706 b are obliquely orientedrelative to the inner pockets 3706 a and outer pockets 3706 c. In otherinstances, the pocket axes PA_(B) of the intermediate pockets 3706 b canbe oriented perpendicular, or substantially perpendicular, to either theinner pocket 3706 a or the outer pocket 3706 c. For example, the angle Bcan be a supplementary angle to either angle A or C.

The inner pockets 3706 a have a length L_(A), the intermediate pockets3706 b have a length L_(B), and the outer pockets 3706 c have a lengthL_(C). The length L_(C) is less than the length L_(B) and the lengthL_(A). In other words, the outer pockets 3706 c are shorter than theintermediate pockets 3706 b and the inner pockets 3706 a. In certaininstances, the lengths L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C) can be different. Inother instances, the lengths L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C) can be the same. Instill other instances, the length L_(B) can be less than the lengthL_(A) and/or L_(B), and/or the length L_(A) can be less than the lengthL_(A) and/or L_(C). The lengths L_(A), L_(B), and L_(C) can be selectedto optimize the nesting of the pockets 3706.

The spacing of the staple-forming pockets 3706 can also be configured tooptimize the nesting thereof. For example, the inner pockets 3706 a canbe longitudinally staggered relative to the outer pockets 3706 c.Moreover, the inner pockets 3706 a can partially longitudinally overlapthe outer pockets 3706 c. Referring to FIG. 129, a first end of theinner pocket 3706 a is longitudinally offset from the corresponding endof the outer pocket 3706 c by a distance X1 _(A/C). Moreover, a secondend of the inner pocket 3706 a is longitudinally offset from thecorresponding end of the outer pocket 3706 c by a distance X2 _(A/C).The distance X2 _(A/C) is less than the distance X1 _(A/C). In otherinstances, the distance X2 _(A/C) can be equal to or greater than thedistance X1 _(A/C). The intermediate pockets 3706 b are longitudinallystaggered relative to the inner pockets 3706 a and the outer pockets3706 c. More specifically, the intermediate pockets 3706 b areequidistantly longitudinally offset between adjacent inner pockets 3706a and between adjacent outer pockets 3706 c. In other instances, theintermediate pockets 3706 b may be non-equidistantly offset betweenadjacent inner pockets 3706 a and between adjacent outer pockets 3706 c.

The arrangement of pockets 3706 is configured to nest the pockets 3706such that the pockets 3706 fit within a predefined space. For example,in certain instances, the width of the anvil can be minimized orotherwise restrained to fit within a surgical trocar and/or within anarrow surgical field, and the arrangement of staple-forming pockets3706 (and the corresponding arrangement of staples and/or staplecavities) can fit within a narrow anvil.

Referring now to FIGS. 81-84C, staple-forming pockets 3806 in a portionof an anvil 3800 are shown. The anvil 3800 includes a staple-formingsurface 3802 and a longitudinal slot 3804. The longitudinal slot 3804extends along the longitudinal axis LA of the anvil 3800. In certaininstances, a firing element and/or cutting element can translate throughthe longitudinal slot 3804 during at least a portion of a firing stroke.The staple-forming pockets 3806 are defined in the staple-formingsurface 3802, which also includes a non-forming portion 3808 thatextends around the pockets 3806. The non-forming portion 3808 extendsentirely around each pocket 3806. In other words, the non-formingportion 3808 surrounds the staple-forming pockets 3806. In otherinstances, at least a portion of two or more adjacent pockets can be inabutting contact such that a non-forming portion is not positionedtherebetween. In certain instances, the non-forming portion 3808 canextend across one or more of the pockets 3806.

The “forming ratio” of the staple-forming surface 3802 (the ratio of thenon-forming portion 3808 to the forming portion, i.e., the pockets 3806)can be optimized. By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can beformed and/or formed to their desired configurations. In certaininstances, the surface area of the non-forming portion 3808 of the anvil3800 can be minimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 3806.Additionally or alternatively, the footprint of the staple-formingpockets 3806 can be extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of thestaple-forming surface 3802 that is designed to catch and form thestaples. Such arrangement, for example, may prevent inadvertentmalformed staples that, for whatever reason, miss or fall outside oftheir corresponding forming pocket during the firing process.

The pockets 3806 depicted in FIG. 81 are arranged in three rows 3814 a,3814 b, and 3814 c on a first side of the longitudinal slot 3804. Thefirst row 3814 a is an inner row, the second row 3814 b is anintermediate row, and the third row 3814 c is an outer row. Innerpockets 3806 a are positioned in the inner row 3814 a, intermediatepockets 3806 b are positioned in the intermediate row 3814 b, and outerpockets 3806 c are positioned in the outer row 3814 c. Although notshown in FIG. 81, in at least one instance, the pockets 3806 on theopposing side of the slot 3804 can form a mirror image reflection of thepockets 3806 on the first side of the longitudinal slot 3804. In otherinstances, the arrangement of pockets 3806 in the staple-forming surface3802 can be asymmetrical relative to the slot 3804 and, in certaininstances, the anvil 3800 may not include the longitudinal slot 3804. Invarious instances, the pockets 3806 can be arranged in less than or morethan three rows on each side of the slot 3804.

The pockets 3806 depicted in FIG. 81 are identical. Each pocket 3806defined in the staple-forming surface 3802 has the same geometry. Inother instances, the geometry of the pockets 3806 can vary row-to-rowand/or longitudinally along the length of the anvil 3800. For example,in certain instances, the depth of the pockets 3806 or portions thereofcan vary along the length of the anvil 3800 to accommodate forvariations in gap distance between the anvil and the staple cartridgealong the length of an end effector and/or tissue flow, as describedherein.

An exemplary pocket 3806 b is shown in FIGS. 82-84C. The pocket 3806 bhas a first end, or proximal end, 3810 and a second end, or distal end,3812. A pocket axis PA extends between the proximal end 3810 and thedistal end 3814 of the pocket 3806 b. Referring again to FIG. 81, thepockets 3806 in each respective row are parallel. For example, thepocket axes (e.g., PA_(A)) of the inner pockets 3806 a are parallel toeach other, the pocket axes (e.g., PA_(B)) of the intermediate pockets3806 b are parallel to each other, and the pocket axes (e.g., PA_(C)) ofthe outer pockets 3806 c are parallel to each other. The pocket axes PAare obliquely oriented relative to the slot 3804. Moreover, the axesPA_(B) of the intermediate pockets 3806 b are oriented perpendicular tothe axes PA_(A) and PA_(C) of the inner pockets 3806 a and the outerpockets 3806 c, respectively. As such, the pockets 3806 are arranged ina herringbone arrangement along the staple-forming surface 3802.

The pocket 3806 b includes a perimeter 3816, which defines the boundaryof the pocket 3806 b. The pocket 3806 b also includes a proximal cup3820, a distal cup 3822, and a neck portion 3824 connecting the proximalcup 3820 and the distal cup 3822. When a staple is driven into formingcontact with the staple-forming surface 3802, the proximal cup 3820 isaligned with a proximal staple leg, and the distal cup 3822 is alignedwith a distal staple leg. The tips of the staple legs are positioned andconfigured to land in the respective cups 3820, 3822. Stateddifferently, the proximal cup 3820 is configured to receive a proximalstaple leg and the distal cup 3822 is configured to receive a distalstaple leg. The cups 3820 and 3822 are also configured to direct orfunnel the staple legs toward the pocket axis PA and a central portionof the pocket 3806, such as the neck portion 3824, and to deform thestaple legs into the formed configuration.

The pockets 3806 include extended landing zones for the staple legs.Referring to the pocket 3806 b depicted in FIG. 82, the pocket 3806 bincludes a proximal extended landing zone 3830 and a distal extendedlanding zone 3832. The proximal extended landing zone 3830 is positionedin a proximal portion of the proximal cup 3820, and the distal extendedlanding zone 3832 is positioned in a distal portion of the distal cup3822. The extended landing zones 3830 and 3832 define a substantiallytriangular perimeter. Moreover, the extended landing zones 3830 and 3832terminate along the pocket axis PA at a point to form corners of thepocket 3806 b.

In other instances, the extended landing zones 3830 and 3832 can definestraight and/or contoured perimeters, for example, and may extendlaterally and/or longitudinally relative to the pocket axis PA. Ininstances where a staple or portion thereof is skewed during firing, theextended landing zones 3830, 3832 can salvage, or at least attempt tosalvage, the formation of the skewed staple.

Referring primarily to FIG. 83, each cup 3820, 3822 of the pocket 3806 bdefines an entrance ramp 3840 and an exit ramp 3842. The exit ramp 3842is steeper than the entrance ramp 3840. When forming a staple, the tipof a staple leg can enter the respective cup 3820, 3822 along theentrance ramp 3840 and exit the respective cup 3820, 3822 along the exitramp 3842. At an apex 3846 between the entrance ramp 3840 and the exitramp 3842, the tips of the staple legs are deformed toward the staplebase to assume the formed configuration, such as a B-form or modifiedB-form, for example. The proximal cup 3820 defines a proximal depth D₁at the apex 3846 thereof measured relative to the non-forming portion3808 of the staple-forming surface 3802, and the distal cup 3822 definesa distal depth D₂ at the apex 3846 thereof measured relative to thenon-forming portion 3808 of the staple-forming surface 3802. In thepocket 3806 b, the proximal depth D₁ and the distal depth D₂ are equal.In other instances, the proximal depth D₁ and the distal depth D₂ can bedifferent.

The pocket 3806 b also defines a bridge 3844 in the neck portion 3824between the proximal cup 3820 and the distal cup 3822. The bridge 3844is offset from the non-forming portion 3808 of the staple-formingsurface 3802. More specifically, the bridge 3844 is positioned below orrecessed relative to the non-forming portion 3808. In other instances,the bridge 3844 can be aligned with the non-forming portion 3808 and/orcan protrude away from the non-forming portion 3808 toward the opposingjaw of the end effector.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 84A-84C, the pocket 3806 b includessidewalls 3850. The sidewalls 3850 are oriented perpendicular to thenon-forming portion 3808 of the staple-forming surface 3802. Thesidewalls 3850 widen toward a central region 3821 of each cup 3820,3822, and narrow from the central region 3821 of each cup 3820, 3822toward the neck portion 3824. The widened central region 3821 providesan enlarged footprint for receiving the tip of a staple leg. Theextended landing zones 3830, 3832 also enlarge the footprint of therespective cups 3820, 3822 for receiving the staple tips. As the cups3820, 3822 narrow toward the neck portion 3824, the cups 3820, 3822 areconfigured to funnel and/or guide the tips of the staple legs towardand/or along the pocket axis PA and into a formed configuration. As thecups 3820 and 3822 widen and then narrow toward the neck portion 3824,the perimeter 3816 of the pocket 3806 b defines a contour or arcedprofile. In other instances, the perimeter 3816 of the pocket 3806 b canextend along linear, non-contoured profiles having non-rounded corners,for example.

The pocket 3806 b defines fillets 3852 (FIGS. 84A-84C) between thesidewalls 3850 and the bottom surface of the pocket 3806 b. The fillets3852 are configured to guide the staple legs along the desired path inthe pocket 3806 b. For example, if a staple leg lands along the fillet3852 or is diverted to the fillet 3852, the fillet 3852 can smoothlyguide the staple leg toward the pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 82, the pocket 3806 b is symmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 3816 of the pocket 3806 b issymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 3806 b issymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 3824 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 3816 ofeach pocket 3806 is symmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 3820 has the same geometry as the distal cup 3822.

In other instances, the proximal cup 3820 can be different than thedistal cup 3822. For example, referring again to FIG. 83, the distaldepth D₂ can be less than the proximal depth D₁. In various instances,the variation in the depth of a staple-forming pocket can accommodatefor variations in gap distance between the anvil and the staplecartridge along the length of an end effector when tissue is clampedtherebetween. For example, an anvil may bow or bend away from the staplecartridge as the anvil approaches the distal end of the end effector.Variations to the depth of the staple-forming pockets 3806 can beconfigured to ensure that an appropriate forming height is maintained inview of the anticipated or expected bowing or bending of the anvil 3800.

Additionally or alternatively, the variation in the depth of astaple-forming pocket can accommodate for tissue movement or flowrelative to the end effector. More specifically, when tissue is clampedbetween the jaws of the end effector, fluid in the clamped tissue canflow or move toward adjacent, unclamped tissue. The tissue can flowlaterally toward the longitudinal sides of the anvil 3800, distallytoward the distal end of the anvil 3800, and/or proximally toward theproximal end of the anvil 3800. In certain instances, tissue can flowrelative to the anvil 3800 when the cutting edge is advanced distallythrough the tissue. In such instances, tissue may flow laterally,distally, and/or proximally, but it primarily flows distally due to thedistal movement of the cutting edge. In instances where the cutting edgemoves proximally to incise tissue, the movement or flow of the tissuewould be generally proximal during the cutting stroke. Different depthsD₁ and D₁ in the pocket 3806 can accommodate for the distal flow of thetissue, which can shift or skew the staple legs embedded thereindistally.

In various instances, tissue movement or flow at the distal end of anend effector can be larger than the tissue movement or flow at theproximal end of the end effector. Such instances can arise as a resultof the distal movement of the firing member within the end effector.Although the firing member is configured to progressively staple andincise the tissue as it is moved distally, the firing member can alsoplow or push the tissue distally. This pushing or plowing effect maybegin at the proximal end of the end effector and may compound as thefiring member is moved distally such that the largest pushing or plowingeffect is realized at the distal end of the end effector. Consequently,the tissue flow can be increased toward the distal end of the endeffector. To accommodate for such an increase in tissue flow, thegeometries of the staple pockets can vary longitudinally along thelength of a row. In instances where the proximal and distal cups of thestaple pockets are different to accommodate for tissue flow, a gradientin pocket asymmetries may be utilized within a row of pockets tocompensate for the gradient in tissue movement and staple shifting.

In certain instances, different staple geometries can be utilized withthe different pocket geometries. The use of different staples toaccommodate for tissue flow along the length of an end effector isdescribed in U.S. patent application Ser. No. 14/318,996, entitledFASTENER CARTRIDGES INCLUDING EXTENSIONS HAVING DIFFERENTCONFIGURATIONS, filed Jun. 30, 2014, which is hereby incorporated byreference herein in its entirety. In other instances, identical staplescan be utilized with different pocket geometries along the length of ananvil.

Referring again to FIG. 82, the neck portion 3824 defines a width W_(N)and the proximal and distal cups 3820 and 3822 define a width W_(C). Thewidth W_(N) is less than the width W_(C). Consequently, the centralportion of the pocket 3806 b is narrower than the proximal and distalcups 3820 and 3822. The narrowed perimeter 3816 of the pocket 3806 b atthe neck portion 3824 defines a receiving peninsula 3826 between aportion of the proximal cup 3820 and a portion of the distal cup 3822.Owing to the symmetry of the pocket 3806 b, symmetrical receivingpeninsulas 3826 are positioned on each side of the pocket 3806 b. Thereceiving peninsulas 3826 are bounded by the perimeter 3816 of thepocket 3806 b and a tangent axis (e.g., T_(A), T_(B1), T_(B2), andT_(C)), which is tangential to the widest portion of the proximal anddistal cups 3820 and 3822 on a side of the pocket 3806. A first tangentaxis T_(B1) is positioned on a first side of the pocket 3806 b and asecond tangent axis T_(B2) is positioned on the opposite side of thepocket 3806 b. The first and second tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2)depicted in FIG. 82 are parallel to the pocket axis PA_(B).

Referring again to FIG. 81, the perimeters 3816 of the pockets 3806 arenested or interlocked along the staple-forming surface 3802. Inparticular, each pocket 3806 extends into the receiving peninsula 3826of an adjacent pocket 3806. For example, the intermediate pockets 3806 bare nested between the inner pockets 3806 a and the outer pockets 3806c. Stated differently, the intermediate pockets 3806 b extend into thereceiving peninsula 3826 of an adjacent inner pocket 3806 a and into thereceiving peninsula 3826 of an adjacent outer pocket 3806 c. Moreover,the inner pockets 3806 a and the outer pockets 3806 b are nested withthe intermediate pockets 3806 b. More specifically, the inner pockets3806 a extend into the receiving peninsula 3826 of an adjacentintermediate pocket 3806 b, and the outer pockets 3806 c extend into thereceiving peninsula 3826 of an adjacent intermediate pocket 3806 b.

The distal cup 3822 of the intermediate pocket 3806 b extend across thetangent axis T_(A) and into the receiving peninsula 3826 of the adjacentinner pocket 3806 a. Moreover, the proximal cup 3820 of the intermediatepocket 3806 b extends across the tangent axis T_(C) and into thereceiving peninsula 3826 of the adjacent outer pocket 3806 c.Additionally, the distal cup 3822 of the inner pockets 3806 a extendsacross the tangent axis T_(B1) and into the receiving peninsula 3826 ofthe adjacent intermediate pocket 3806 b. Furthermore, the proximal cup3820 of the outer pockets 3806 c extends across the tangent axis T_(B2)and into the receiving peninsula 3826 of the adjacent intermediatepocket 3806 b. In various instances, the distal extended landing zone3832 of the intermediate pocket 3806 b is positioned in the receivingpeninsula 3826 of an inner pocket 3806 a, the proximal extended landingzone 3830 of the intermediate pocket 3806 b is positioned in thereceiving peninsula 3826 of an outer pocket 3806 c, the distal extendedlanding zone 3832 of an inner pocket 3806 a is positioned in thereceiving peninsula 3826 of an intermediate pocket 3806 b, and theproximal extended landing zone 3830 of the outer pocket 3806 c ispositioned in the receiving peninsula 3826 of an intermediate pocket3806 b.

The geometry of the pockets 3806 facilitates the nesting of the pockets3806 in the staple-forming surface 3802. For example, because thepockets 3806 include a narrowed neck portion 3824 between two enlargedcups 3820 and 3822, one of the enlarged cups 3820, 3822 of anotherpocket 3806 can be positioned adjacent to the narrowed neck portion3824. For example, one of the enlarged cups 3820, 3822 can be alignedwith and/or received by a portion of an adjacent pocket 3806. In suchinstances, the surface area of the staple-forming surface 3802 that iscovered by the pockets 3806 can be optimized. For example, the surfacearea of the staple-forming surface 3802 that is covered by the pockets3806 is maximized. The “forming ratio” of the staple-forming surface3802 is the ratio of the non-forming portion 3808 to the formingportion, i.e., the pockets 3806. The forming ratio is about 1.7:1. Inother instances, the forming ratio can be less than 1.7:1 or more than1.7:1. For example, in at least one instance, more than 50% of thestaple-forming surface 3802 can be covered with staple-forming pockets3806.

The nesting of staple-forming pockets discussed herein can refer to thenesting of adjacent pocket perimeters. For example, where a first pocketdefines an inward contour, i.e., a contour extending inward toward thepocket axis, an adjacent second pocket can protrude toward and/or intothe region adjacent to the inward contour. Additionally oralternatively, a portion of the second pocket, such as an end of thesecond pocket, can be aligned with the narrowed region of the firstpocket. Consequently, the second pocket can be positioned nearer to thepocket axis of the first pocket than if the end of the second pocket wasaligned with a wider region of the first pocket.

Referring now to FIGS. 85-88C, staple-forming pockets 3906 in a portionof an anvil 3900 are depicted. The anvil 3900 includes a staple-formingsurface 3902 and a longitudinal slot 3904. The longitudinal slot 3904extends along the longitudinal axis LA of the anvil 3900. In certaininstances, a firing element and/or cutting element can translate throughthe longitudinal slot 3904 during at least a portion of a firing stroke.The staple-forming pockets 3906 are defined in the staple-formingsurface 3902. The staple-forming surface 3902 also includes anon-forming portion 3908 that extends around the pockets 3906. Thenon-forming portion 3908 extends entirely around each pocket 3906 inFIG. 85. In other words, the non-forming portion 3908 surrounds thestaple-forming pockets 3906. In other instances, at least a portion oftwo or more adjacent pockets 3906 can be in abutting contact such that anon-forming portion 3908 is not positioned therebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 3902 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 3908 of the anvil 3900 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 3906. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 3906 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 3902 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 3906 depicted in FIG. 85 are arranged in three rows 3914 a,3914 b, 3914 c on a first side of the longitudinal slot 3904. The firstrow 3914 a is an inner row, the second row 3914 b is an intermediaterow, and the third row 3914 c is an outer row. Inner pockets 3906 a arepositioned in the inner row 3914 a, intermediate pockets 3906 b arepositioned in the intermediate row 3914 b, and outer pockets 3906 c arepositioned in the outer row 3914 c. Similar to the anvil 3800, thepockets 3906 are arranged in a herringbone arrangement along thestaple-forming surface 3902 of the anvil 3900. Although not shown inFIG. 85, in at least one instance, the pockets 3906 on the opposing sideof the slot 3904 can form a mirror image reflection of the pockets 3906on the first side of the longitudinal slot 3904. In other instances, thearrangement of pockets 3906 in the staple-forming surface 3902 can beasymmetrical relative to the slot 3904 and, in certain instances, theanvil 3900 may not include the longitudinal slot 3904. In variousinstances, the pockets 3906 can be arranged in less than or more thanthree rows on each side of the slot 3904.

The pockets 3906 depicted in FIG. 85 are identical. Each pocket 3906defined in the staple-forming surface 3802 has the same geometry. Inother instances, the geometry of the pockets 3906 can vary row-to-rowand/or longitudinally along the length of the anvil 3900. For example,in certain instances, the depth of the pockets 3906 or portions thereofcan vary along the length of the anvil 3900 to accommodate forvariations in gap distance between the anvil and the staple cartridgealong the length of an end effector and/or tissue flow, as describedherein.

An exemplary pocket 3906 b is shown in FIGS. 86-88C. The pocket 3906 bhas a first end, or proximal end, 3910 and a second end, or distal end,3912. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 86) extends between the proximal end 3910and the distal end 3912 of the pocket 3906 b. The pocket 3906 b includesa perimeter 3916, which defines the boundary of the pocket 3906. Thepocket 3906 b also includes a proximal cup 3920, a distal cup 3922, anda neck portion 3924 connecting the proximal cup 3920 and the distal cup3922. When a staple is driven into forming contact with thestaple-forming surface 3902, the proximal cup 3920 is aligned with aproximal staple leg, and the distal cup 3922 is aligned with a distalstaple leg. The cups 3920 and 3922 are configured to direct or funnelthe staple legs toward the pocket axis PA and a central portion of thepocket 3906, such as the neck portion 3924, and to deform the staplelegs into the formed configuration.

Referring primarily to FIG. 87, each cup 3920, 3922 of the pocket 3906 bdefines an entrance ramp 3940 and an exit ramp 3942. The exit ramp 3942is steeper than the entrance ramp 3940. When forming a staple, the tipof a staple leg can enter the respective cup 3920, 3922 along theentrance ramp 3940 and exit the respective cup 3920, 3922 along the exitramp 3942. At an apex 3946 between the entrance ramp 3940 and the exitramp 3942, the tips of the staple legs are deformed toward the staplebase to assume the formed configuration, such as a B-form or modifiedB-form, for example. The proximal cup 3920 defines a proximal depth D₁at the apex 3946 thereof measured relative to the non-forming portion3908 of the staple-forming surface 3902, and the distal cup 3922 definesa distal depth D₂ at the apex 3946 thereof measured relative to thenon-forming portion 3908 of the staple-forming surface 3902. In thepocket 3906, the proximal depth D₁ and the distal depth D₂ are equal. Inother instances, the proximal depth D₁ and the distal depth D₂ can bedifferent. The pocket 3906 b also defines a bridge 3944 in the neckportion 3924 between the proximal cup 3920 and the distal cup 3922. Thebridge 3944 is offset from the non-forming portion 3908 of thestaple-forming surface 3902. More specifically, the bridge 3944 ispositioned below or recessed relative to the non-forming portion 3908.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 88A-88C, the pocket 3906 b includessidewalls 3950. The sidewalls 3950 are oriented perpendicular to thenon-forming portion 3908 of the staple-forming surface 3902. Thesidewalls 3950 narrow linearly from the outer ends of each cup 3920,3922 toward the neck portion 3924. Consequently, the widest portion ofthe cups 3920, 3922 is at the proximal and distal ends 3910, 3912 of thepocket 3906 b, respectively. The profile 3916 of the pocket 3906 bdefines a bow-tie shape perimeter. The widened region at the proximaland distal ends 3910, 3912 provides an enlarged footprint for receivingthe tip of a staple leg. In various instances, the widened portions ofthe cups 3920 and 3922 define extended landing zones for receiving thestaple tips. As the cups 3920, 3922 narrow toward the neck portion 3924,the cups 3920, 3922 are configured to funnel and/or guide the tips ofthe staple legs toward and/or along the pocket axis PA into a formedconfiguration. The pocket 3906 b defines a chamfered edge 3954 along thesides of the pocket 3906 b. The chamfered edge 3954 serves to enlargethe footprint of the pocket 3906 b and guide the tips of the staple legstoward the pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 86, the pocket 3906 b is symmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 3916 of the pocket 3906 b issymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 3906 b issymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 3924 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 3916 ofthe pocket 3906 b is symmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 3920 has the same geometry as the distal cup 3922. In otherinstances, the proximal cup 3920 can be different than the distal cup3922. For example, referring again to FIG. 87, the distal depth D₂ canbe less than the proximal depth D₁ to accommodate for variations in gapdistance between the anvil and the staple cartridge and/or tissue flow,as described herein.

Referring again to FIG. 86, the width of the neck portion 3924 is lessthan the width of the cups 3920 and 3922. Consequently, the centralportion of the pocket 3906 b is narrower than the proximal and distalcups 3920 and 3922. The narrowed perimeter 3916 of the pocket 3906 b atthe neck portion 3924 defines a receiving peninsula 3926 between aportion of the proximal cup 3920 and a portion of the distal cup 3922.Owing to the symmetry of the pocket 3906 b, symmetrical receivingpeninsulas 3926 are positioned on each side of the pocket 3906 b. Thereceiving peninsulas 3926 are bounded by the perimeter 3916 of thepocket 3906 b and a tangent axis (e.g., T_(B1) and T_(B2)), which istangential to the widest portion of the proximal and distal cups 3920and 3922 on a side of the pocket 3906 b. A first tangent axis T_(B1) ispositioned on a first side of the pocket 3906 b and a second tangentaxis T_(B2) is positioned on the opposite side of the pocket 3906 b. Thefirst and second tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2) are parallel to thepocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 85, each pocket 3906 extends toward thereceiving peninsula 3926 of an adjacent pocket 3906. For example, theintermediate pockets 3906 b are aligned with the neck portions 3924 ofthe inner pockets 3906 a and the outer pockets 3906 c. Moreover, theinner pockets 3906 a and the outer pockets 3906 b extend toward thereceiving peninsula 3926 of one of the intermediate pockets 3906 b. Morespecifically, the pocket axes PA of the intermediate pockets 3906 b arealigned with the neck portions 3924 of adjacent inner and outer pockets3906 a and 3906 c, respectively, the pocket axes PA of the inner pockets3906 a are aligned with the neck portion 3924 of an adjacentintermediate pocket 3906 b, and the pocket axes PA of the outer pockets3906 c are aligned with the neck portion 3924 of an adjacentintermediate pocket 3906 b. In certain instances, a portion of one ormore of the pockets 3906 can extend into the receiving peninsula of anadjacent pocket 3906.

The geometry of the pockets 3906 facilitates the close arrangement ofthe pockets 3906 in the staple-forming surface 3902. For example,because the pockets 3906 include a narrowed neck portion 3924 betweentwo enlarged cups 3920 and 3922, the enlarged cup 3920, 3922 of anotherpocket 3906 can be positioned adjacent to the narrowed neck portion3924. For example, an enlarged cup 3920, 3922 can be aligned with and/orreceived by a portion of the adjacent pocket 3906. Consequently, thesurface area of the staple-forming surface 3902 that is covered by thepockets 3906 can be optimized. For example, the surface area of thestaple-forming surface 3902 that is covered by pockets 3906 ismaximized. The “forming ratio” is the ratio of the non-forming portion3908 to the forming portion, i.e., the pockets 3906. In variousinstances, the forming ratio can be at least 1:1, for example.

In certain instances, though the pockets 3906 are positioned in closeproximity to each other, because the neck portion 3924 narrows, there isspace for the non-forming portion 3908 between adjacent pockets 3906.For example, the non-forming portion 3908 can extend between the neckportion 3924 of an inner pocket 3906 a and the distal cup 3922 of anadjacent intermediate pocket 3906 b. The non-forming portion 3908between adjacent pockets 3906 can provide sufficient spacing betweenpockets 3906 to strengthen and/or reinforce the anvil 3900.

Referring now to FIGS. 89-92C, staple-forming pockets 4006 in a portionof an anvil 4000 are depicted. The pockets 4006 and arrangement thereofin the anvil 4000 are similar in many aspects to the pockets 3906 andarrangement thereof in the anvil 3900. For example, the anvil 4000includes a staple-forming surface 4002 and a longitudinal slot 4004. Thelongitudinal slot 4004 extends along the longitudinal axis LA of theanvil 4000. In certain instances, a firing element and/or cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 4004 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. The staple-forming pockets 4006 aredefined in the staple-forming surface 4002. The staple-forming surface4002 also includes a non-forming portion 4008 that extends around thepockets 4006. The non-forming portion 4008 extends entirely around eachpocket 4006 in FIG. 89. In other words, the non-forming portion 4008surrounds the staple-forming pockets 4006. In other instances, at leasta portion of two or more adjacent pockets 4006 can be in abuttingcontact such that a non-forming portion 4008 is not positionedtherebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 4002 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 4008 of the anvil 4000 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 4006. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 4006 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 4002 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 4006 are arranged in an inner row 4014 a, an intermediaterow 4014 b, and an outer row 4014 c on a first side of the longitudinalslot 4004. Inner pockets 4006 a are positioned in the inner row 4014 a,intermediate pockets 4006 b are positioned in the intermediate row 4014b, and outer pockets 4006 c are positioned in the outer row 4014 c.Similar to the anvil 3800, the pockets 4006 are arranged in aherringbone arrangement along the staple-forming surface 4002 of theanvil 4000. Although not shown in FIG. 89, in at least one instance, thepockets 4006 on the opposing side of the slot 4004 can form a mirrorimage reflection of the pockets 4006 on the first side of thelongitudinal slot 4004. In other instances, the arrangement of pockets4006 in the staple-forming surface 4002 can be asymmetrical relative tothe slot 4004 and, in certain instances, the anvil 4000 may not includethe longitudinal slot 4004. In various instances, the pockets 4006 canbe arranged in less than or more than three rows on each side of theslot 4004.

The pockets 4006 depicted in FIG. 89 are identical. Each pocket 4006defined in the staple-forming surface 4002 has the same geometry. Inother instances, the geometry of the pockets 4006 can vary row-to-rowand/or longitudinally along the length of the anvil 4000. For example,in certain instances, the depth of the pockets 4006 or portions thereofcan vary along the length of the anvil 4000 to accommodate forvariations in gap distance between the anvil and the staple cartridgealong the length of an end effector and/or tissue flow, as describedherein.

An exemplary pocket 4006 b is shown in FIGS. 90-92C. The pocket 4006 bhas a first end, or proximal end, 4010 and a second end, or distal end,4012. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 90) extends between the proximal end 4010and the distal end 4012 of the pocket 4006 b. The pocket 4006 b includesa perimeter 4016, which defines the boundary of the pocket 4006 b. Thepocket 4006 b also includes a proximal cup 4020, a distal cup 4022, anda neck portion 4024 connecting the proximal cup 4020 and the distal cup4022. When a staple is driven into forming contact with thestaple-forming surface 4002, the proximal cup 4020 is aligned with aproximal staple leg, and the distal cup 4022 is aligned with a distalstaple leg. The cups 4020 and 4022 are configured to direct or funnelthe staple legs toward the pocket axis PA and a central portion of thepocket 4006, such as the neck portion 4024, and to deform the staplelegs into the formed configuration.

Referring primarily to FIG. 91, each cup 4020, 4022 of the pocket 4006 bdefines an entrance ramp 4040 and an exit ramp 4042. When forming astaple, the tip of a staple leg can enter the respective cup 4020, 4022along the entrance ramp 4040 and exit the respective cup 4020, 4022along the exit ramp 4042. At an apex 4046 between the entrance ramp 4040and the exit ramp 4042, the tips of the staple legs are deformed towardthe staple base to assume the formed configuration, such as a B-form ormodified B-form, for example. The pocket 4006 b also defines a bridge4044 between the proximal cup 4020 and the distal cup 4022. The bridge4044 is offset from the non-forming portion 4008. More specifically, thebridge 4044 is positioned below or recessed relative to the non-formingportion 4008.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 92A-92C, the pocket 4006 b includessidewalls 4050, which are oriented perpendicular to the non-formingportion 4008 of the staple-forming surface 4002. The sidewalls 4050narrow from the outer ends of each cup 4020, 4022 toward the neckportion 4024. Consequently, the widest portion of the cups 4020, 4022 isat the proximal and distal ends 4010, 4012 of the pocket 4006 b,respectively. The profile 4016 of the pocket 4006 b defines a bow-tieshape perimeter. The widened region at the proximal and distal ends4010, 4012 provides an enlarged footprint for receiving the tip of astaple leg. In various instances, the widened portions of the cups 4020,4022 define extended landing zones for receiving the staple tips. As thecups 4020, 4022 narrow toward the neck portion 4024, the cups 4020, 4022are configured to funnel and/or guide the tips of the staple legs towardand/or along the pocket axis PA and into a formed configuration.

The pocket 4006 b defines a chamfered edge 4054 along the sides of thepocket 4006 b. Additionally, the pocket 4006 b includes a groove 4056 inthe bottom surface 4058 thereof. The groove 4056 extends from theproximal cup 4020 over the bridge 4024 and into the distal cup 4022. Thegroove 4056 is configured to constrain and guide the staple legs as theymove to the deformed configuration.

In various instances, the diameter of the groove 4056 can be less thanthe diameter of the staple engaged with the groove 4056. For example, astaple can have a diameter of at least 0.0079 inches, and the diameterof the groove 4056 can be less than 0.0079 inches. The diameter of thegroove 4056 can be about 0.007 inches, about 0.005 inches, or less than0.005 inches. In certain instances, the staple can have a diameter ofmore than 0.0079 inches, such as about 0.0089 inches or about 0.0094inches, for example. In various instances, the diameter of the staplecan be less than 0.0079 inches or more than 0.0094 inches. In endeffectors in which different staple geometries are utilized with thesame staple-forming pocket geometry, the width of the groove in thepocket can be less than the smallest diameter staple. In still otherinstances, the width of the groove 4056 can vary staple-to-staple withina row and/or row-to-row.

Referring again to FIG. 90, the pocket 4006 b is symmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4016 of the pocket 4006 b issymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 4006 b issymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 4024 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4016 ofthe pocket 4006 b is symmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 4020 has the same geometry as the distal cup 4022. In otherinstances, the proximal cup 4020 can be different than the distal cup4022. For example, referring again to FIG. 91, the distal depth D₂ canbe less than the proximal depth D₁ to accommodate for variations in gapdistance between the anvil and the staple cartridge and/or tissue flow,as described herein.

Referring again to FIG. 90, the neck portion 4024 of the pocket 4006 bis narrower than the proximal and distal cups 4020 and 4022. Thenarrowed perimeter 4016 of the pocket 4006 b defines a receivingpeninsula 4026 between a portion of the proximal cup 4020 and a portionof the distal cup 4022. Owing to the symmetry of the pocket 4006 b,symmetrical receiving peninsulas 4026 are positioned on each side of thepocket 4006 b. The receiving peninsulas 4026 are bounded by theperimeter 4016 of the pocket 4006 b and a tangent axis (e.g., T_(B1) andT_(B2)), which is tangential to the widest portion of the proximal anddistal cups 4020 and 4022 on a side of the pocket 4006 b. A firsttangent axis T_(B1) is positioned on a first side of the pocket 4006 band a second tangent axis T_(B2) is positioned on the opposite side ofthe pocket 4006 b. The first and second tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2)depicted in FIG. 90 are parallel to the pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 89, each pocket 4006 extends toward thereceiving peninsula 4026 of an adjacent pocket 4006. For example, theintermediate pockets 4006 b are aligned with the neck portions 4024 ofthe inner pockets 4006 a and the outer pockets 4006 c. Moreover, theinner pockets 4006 a and the outer pockets 4006 b extend toward thereceiving peninsula 4026 of one of the intermediate pockets 4006 b. Morespecifically, the inner pockets 4006 a are aligned with the neck portion4024 of an adjacent intermediate pocket 4006 b, and the outer pockets4006 c are aligned with the neck portion 4024 of an adjacentintermediate pocket 4006 b. In certain instances, a portion of thepockets 4006 can extend into the receiving peninsula 4026 of an adjacentpocket 4006. Similar to the pockets 3906 in the anvil 3900, the geometryof the pockets 4006 facilitates the close arrangement of the pockets4006 in the staple-forming surface 4002. The “forming ratio” is theratio of the non-forming portion 4008 to the forming portion, i.e., thepockets 4006. In various instances, the forming ratio can be at least1:1, for example

Referring now to FIGS. 93-96C, staple-forming pockets 4106 in a portionof an anvil 4100 are depicted. The pockets 4106 and arrangement thereofin the anvil 4100 are similar in many aspects to the pockets 4006 andarrangement thereof in the anvil 4000. For example, the anvil 4100includes a staple-forming surface 4102 and a longitudinal slot 4104. Thelongitudinal slot 4104 extends along the longitudinal axis LA of theanvil 4100. In certain instances, a firing element and/or cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 4104 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. Staple-forming pockets 4106 are defined inthe staple-forming surface 4102. The staple-forming surface 4102 alsoincludes a non-forming portion 4108 that extends around the pockets4106. The non-forming portion 4108 extends entirely around each pocket4106 in FIG. 90. In other words, the non-forming portion 4108 surroundsthe staple-forming pockets 4106. In other instances, at least a portionof two or more adjacent pockets 4106 can be in abutting contact suchthat a non-forming portion 4108 is not positioned therebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 4102 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 4108 of the anvil 4100 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 4106. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 4106 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 4102 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 4106 depicted in FIG. 93 are arranged in an inner row 4114a, an intermediate row 4114 b, and an outer row 4114 c on a first sideof the longitudinal slot 4104. Inner pockets 4106 a are positioned inthe inner row 4114 a, intermediate pockets 4106 b are positioned in theintermediate row 4114 b, and outer pockets 4106 c are positioned in theouter row 4114 c. Similar to the anvil 3800, the pockets 4106 arearranged in a herringbone arrangement along the staple-forming surface4102 of the anvil 4100. Although not shown in FIG. 93, in at least oneinstance, the pockets 4106 on the opposing side of the slot 4104 canform a mirror image reflection of the pockets 4106 on the first side ofthe longitudinal slot 4104. In other instances, the arrangement ofpockets 4106 in the staple-forming surface 4102 can be asymmetricalrelative to the slot 4104 and, in certain instances, the anvil 4100 maynot include the longitudinal slot 4104. In various instances, thepockets 4106 can be arranged in less than or more than three rows oneach side of the slot 4104.

The pockets 4106 depicted in FIG. 93 are identical. Each pocket 4106defined in the staple-forming surface 4102 has the same geometry. Inother instances, the geometry of the pockets 4106 can vary row-to-rowand/or longitudinally along the length of the anvil 4100. For example,in certain instances, the depth of the pockets 4106 or portions thereofcan vary along the length of the anvil 4100 to accommodate forvariations in gap distance between the anvil and the staple cartridgealong the length of an end effector and/or tissue flow, as describedherein.

An exemplary pocket 4106 b is shown in FIGS. 94-96C. The pocket 4106 bhas a first end, or proximal end, 4110 and a second end, or distal end,4112. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 94) extends between the proximal end 4110and the distal end 4112 of the pocket 4106 b. The pocket 4106 b includesa perimeter 4116, which defines the boundary of the pocket 4106 b. Thepocket 4106 also includes a proximal cup 4120, a distal cup 4122, and aneck portion 4124 connecting the proximal cup 4120 and the distal cup4122. When a staple is driven into forming contact with thestaple-forming surface 4102, the proximal cup 4120 is aligned with aproximal staple leg, and the distal cup 4122 is aligned with a distalstaple leg. The cups 4120, 4122 are configured to direct or funnel thestaple legs toward the pocket axis PA and a central portion of thepocket 4106, such as the neck portion 4124, and to deform the staplelegs into the formed configuration.

Referring primarily to FIG. 95, each cup 4120, 4122 of the pocket 4106 bdefines an entrance ramp 4140 and an exit ramp 4142. The exit ramp 4142is steeper than the entrance ramp 4140. When forming a staple, the tipof a staple leg can enter the respective cup 4120, 4122 along theentrance ramp 4140 and exit the respective cup 4120, 4122 along the exitramp 4142. At an apex 4146 between the entrance ramp 4140 and the exitramp 4142, the tips of the staple legs are deformed toward the staplebase to assume the formed configuration, such as a B-form or modifiedB-form, for example. The pocket 4106 b also defines a bridge 4144 in theneck portion 4124 between the proximal cup 4120 and the distal cup 4122.The bridge 4144 is offset from the non-forming portion 4108. Morespecifically, the bridge 4144 is positioned below or recessed relativeto the non-forming portion 4108.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 96-96C, the pocket 4106 b includessidewalls 4150, which are oriented perpendicular to the non-formingportion 4108 of the staple-forming surface 4102. The sidewalls 4150narrow from the outer ends of each cup 4120, 4122 toward the neckportion 4124. Consequently, the widest portion of the cups 4120 and 4122is at the proximal and distal ends 4110 and 4112, respectively, of thepocket 4106 b. The profile 4116 of the pocket 4106 b defines a bow-tieshape perimeter. The widened region at the proximal and distal ends4110, 4112 provides an enlarged footprint for receiving the tip of astaple leg. In various instances, the widened portions of the cups 4120,4122 define extended landing zones for receiving the staple tips. As thecups 4120, 4122 narrow toward the neck portion 4124, the cups 4120, 4122are configured to funnel and/or guide the tips of the staple legs towardand/or along the pocket axis PA and into a formed configuration.

Referring again to FIG. 96A-96C, the pocket 4106 b defines a chamferededge 4154 along the sides of the pocket 4106 b. Additionally, the pocket4106 b includes a groove 4156 in the bottom surface 4158 thereof. Thegroove 4156 is defined in the proximal cup 4120 and the distal cup 4122.In the depicted embodiment, the groove 4156 does not extend across thebridge 4144 of the pocket 4106 b. The groove 4156 is configured toconstrain and guide the staple legs as they move to the deformedconfiguration. For example, the staple legs can slide through the groove4156 as the staples move along at least a portion of the entrance ramp4140 and the exit ramp 4142. In various instances, the diameter of thegroove 4156 can be less than the diameter of the staple engaged with thegroove 4156. In end effectors in which different staple geometries areutilized with the same staple-forming pocket geometry, the width of thegroove in the pocket can be less than the smallest diameter staple. Invarious instances, the staple legs are deformed toward the staple basebefore reaching the bridge 4144 and, thus, do not engage the bridge 4144of the pocket 4106 b.

Referring again to FIG. 94, the pocket 4106 b is symmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4116 of the pocket 4106 b issymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 4106 b issymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 4124 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4116 ofthe pocket 4106 b is symmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 4120 has the same geometry as the distal cup 4122. In otherinstances, the proximal cup 4120 can be different than the distal cup4122. For example, referring again to FIG. 91, the distal depth D₂ canbe less than the proximal depth D₁ to accommodate for variations in gapdistance between the anvil and the staple cartridge and/or tissue flow,as described herein.

Referring again to FIG. 94, the neck portion 4124 of the pocket 4106 bis narrower than the proximal and distal cups 4120 and 4122. Thenarrowed perimeter 4116 of the pocket 4106 b defines a receivingpeninsula 4126 between a portion of the proximal cup 4120 and a portionof the distal cup 4122. Owing to the symmetry of the pocket 4106 b,symmetrical receiving peninsulas 4126 are positioned on each side of thepocket 4106 b. The receiving peninsulas 4126 are bounded by theperimeter 4116 of the pocket 4106 b and a tangent axis (e.g., T_(B1) andT_(B2)), which is tangential to the widest portion of the proximal anddistal cups 4120 and 4122 on a side of the pocket 4106 b. A firsttangent axis T_(B1) is positioned on a first side of the pocket 4106 band a second tangent axis T_(B2) is positioned on the opposite side ofthe pocket 4106 b. The first and second tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2)depicted in FIG. 94 are parallel to the pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 93, each pocket 4106 extends toward thereceiving peninsula 4126 of an adjacent pocket 4106. For example, theintermediate pockets 4106 b are aligned with the neck portion 4124 ofthe inner pockets 4106 a and the outer pockets 4106 c. Moreover, theinner pockets 4106 a and the outer pockets 4106 b extend toward thereceiving peninsula 4126 of one of the intermediate pockets 4106 b. Morespecifically, the inner pockets 4106 a are aligned with the neck portion4124 of an adjacent intermediate pocket 4106 b, and the outer pockets4106 c are aligned with the neck portion 4124 of an adjacentintermediate pocket 4106 b. In certain instances, a portion of thepockets 4106 can extend into the receiving peninsula 4126 of an adjacentpocket 4106. Similar to the pockets 3906 in the anvil 3900, the geometryof the pockets 4106 facilitates the close arrangement of the pockets4106 in the staple-forming surface 4102. The “forming ratio” is theratio of the non-forming portion 4108 to the forming portion, i.e., thepockets 4106. In various instances, the forming ratio can be at least1:1, for example.

Referring now to FIGS. 97-100C, staple-forming pockets 4206 in a portionof an anvil 4200 are depicted. The pockets 4206 and arrangement thereofin the anvil 4200 are similar in many aspects to the pockets 4106 andarrangement thereof in the anvil 4100. For example, the anvil 4200includes a staple-forming surface 4202 and a longitudinal slot 4204. Thelongitudinal slot 4204 extends along the longitudinal axis LA of theanvil 4200. In certain instances, a firing element and/or cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 4204 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. The staple-forming pockets 4206 aredefined in the staple-forming surface 4202. The staple-forming surface4202 also includes a non-forming portion 4208 that extends around thepockets 4206. The non-forming portion 4208 extends entirely around eachpocket 4206 in FIG. 97. In other words, the non-forming portion 4208surrounds the staple-forming pockets 4206. In other instances, at leasta portion of two or more adjacent pockets 4206 can be in abuttingcontact such that a non-forming portion 4208 is not positionedtherebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 4202 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 4208 of the anvil 4200 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 4206. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 4206 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 4202 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 4206 depicted in FIG. 97 are arranged in an inner row 4214a, an intermediate row 4214 b, and an outer row 4214 c on a first sideof the longitudinal slot 4204. Inner pockets 4206 a are positioned inthe inner row 4214 a, intermediate pockets 4206 b are positioned in theintermediate row 4214 b, and outer pockets 4206 c are positioned in theouter row 4214 c. Similar to the anvil 3800, the pockets 4206 arearranged in a herringbone arrangement along the staple-forming surface4202 of the anvil 4200. Although not shown in FIG. 97, in at least oneinstance, the pockets 4206 on the opposing side of the slot 4204 canform a mirror image reflection of the pockets 4206 on the first side ofthe longitudinal slot 4204. In other instances, the arrangement ofpockets 4206 in the staple-forming surface 4202 can be asymmetricalrelative to the slot 4204 and, in certain instances, the anvil 4200 maynot include the longitudinal slot 4204. In various instances, thepockets 4206 can be arranged in less than or more than three rows oneach side of the slot 4204.

The pockets 4206 depicted in FIG. 97 are identical. Each pocket 4206defined in the staple-forming surface 4202 has the same geometry. Inother instances, the geometry of the pockets 4206 can vary row-to-rowand/or longitudinally along the length of the anvil 4200. For example,in certain instances, the depth of the pockets 4206 or portions thereofcan vary along the length of the anvil 4200 to accommodate forvariations in gap distance between the anvil and the staple cartridgealong the length of an end effector and/or tissue flow, as describedherein.

An exemplary pocket 4206 b is shown in FIGS. 98-100C. The pocket 4206 bhas a first end, or proximal end, 4210 and a second end, or distal end,4212. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 98) extends between the proximal end 4210and the distal end 4212 of each pocket 4206. The pocket 4206 b includesa perimeter 4216, which defines the boundary of the pocket 4206 b. Thepocket 4206 b also includes a proximal cup 4220, a distal cup 4222, anda neck portion 4224 connecting the proximal cup 4220 and the distal cup4222. When a staple is driven into forming contact with thestaple-forming surface 4202, the proximal cup 4220 is aligned with aproximal staple leg, and the distal cup 4222 is aligned with a distalstaple leg. The cups 4220, 4222 are configured to direct or funnel thestaple legs toward the pocket axis PA and a central portion of thepocket 4206, such as the neck portion 4224, and to deform the staplelegs into the formed configuration.

Referring primarily to FIG. 99, each cup 4220, 4222 of the pocket 4206 bdefines an entrance ramp 4240 and an exit ramp 4242. The exit ramp 4242is steeper than the entrance ramp 4240. When forming a staple, the tipof a staple leg can enter the respective cup 4220, 4222 along theentrance ramp 4240 and exit the respective cup 4220, 4222 along the exitramp 4242. At an apex 4246 between the entrance ramp 4240 and the exitramp 4242, the tips of the staple legs are deformed toward the staplebase to assume the formed configuration, such as a B-form or modifiedB-form, for example. The pocket 4206 b also defines a bridge 4244between the proximal cup 4220 and the distal cup 4222. The bridge 4244is offset from the non-forming portion 4208. More specifically, thebridge 4244 is positioned below or recessed relative to the non-formingportion 4208.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 100A-100C, the pocket 4206 b includessidewalls 4250, which are oriented perpendicular to the non-formingportion 4208 of the staple-forming surface 4202. The sidewalls 4250narrow toward the neck portion 4224. Consequently, the widest portion ofthe cups 4220, 4222 is at the proximal and distal ends of the sidewalls4250. The widened region provides an enlarged footprint for receivingthe tip of a staple leg. As the cups 4220, 4222 narrow toward the neckportion 4224, the cups 4220, 4222 are configured to funnel and/or guidethe tips of the staple legs toward and/or along the pocket axis PA andinto a formed configuration.

The cups 4220, 4222 also include extended landing zones 4230, 4232,respectively, which further enlarge the footprint of the cups 4220,4222. The proximal extended landing zone 4230 extends proximally alongthe pocket axis PA, and the distal extended landing zone 4232 extendsdistally along the pocket axis PA. In the pocket 4206 b, the extendedlanding zones 4230 and 4232 define a substantially triangular perimeter.Moreover, the extended landing zones 4230 and 4232 terminate along therespective pocket axis PA at a corner. In other instances, the extendedlanding zones 4230 and 4232 can define straight or contoured perimeters,for example, and can extend laterally and/or longitudinally from thecups 4220 and 4222, for example.

Additionally, the pocket 4206 b includes a trough 4256 in the bottomsurface thereof. The trough 4256 is configured to constrain and guidethe staple legs as they move to the deformed configuration. In thedepicted embodiment, the trough 4256 spans between the sidewalls 4250and defines the entire bottom surface of the pocket 4206 b. The trough4256 extends from the proximal cup 4220 over the bridge 4224 and intothe distal cup 4222. In other instances, the trough 4256 may not extendacross the bridge 4244 of the pocket 4206 b. The trough 4256 includestwo ramped surfaces 4256 a and 4256 b that extend downward away from thenon-forming portion 4208 and meet along the pocket axis PA (FIG. 98). Asdepicted in FIGS. 100A-100C, the trough 4256 defines a steeper gradientalong the bridge 4244 than in the cups 4220, 4222. In other instances,the gradient can be uniform along the length of the trough 4256 and/orcan be steeper in the cups 4220, 4222 than along the bridge 4244, forexample.

Still referring to FIGS. 100A-100C, the pocket 4206 b also defines achamfered edge 4254 along the sides of the pocket 4206 b. In the pocket4206 b, the chamfered edge 4254 defines the overall width of the pocket4206 b. The overall width of the pocket 4206 b is uniform. For example,the width W_(A) (FIG. 100A) is equal to the width W_(B) (FIG. 100B) andthe width W_(C) (FIG. 100C). In other instances, the widths W_(A),W_(B), and/or W_(C) may not be equal. Because the sidewalls 4250 narrowtoward the neck portion 4224, the width of the chamfered edge 4254correspondingly expands toward the neck portion 4224 to maintain thesame overall pocket width. The pocket 4206 b also includes projectionsor knobs 4258 which extend toward the pocket axis PA at the neck portion4224 of the pocket 4206 b. The knobs 4258 further narrow the neckportion 4224 to a width W_(N). The trough 4256 spans the bottom surfaceof the neck portion 4224 across the width W_(N).

Referring again to FIG. 98, the pocket 4206 b is symmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4216 of the pocket 4206 b issymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 4206 b issymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 4224 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4216 ofthe pocket 4206 b is symmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 4220 has the same geometry as the distal cup 4222. In otherinstances, the proximal cup 4220 can be different than the distal cup4222. For example, referring again to FIG. 99, the distal depth D₂ canbe less than the proximal depth D₁ to accommodate for variations in gapdistance between the anvil and the staple cartridge and/or tissue flow,as described herein.

Referring again to FIG. 97, each pocket 4206 extends toward the neckportion 4224 of an adjacent pocket 4206. For example, the intermediatepockets 4206 b are aligned with the neck portions 4224 of the innerpockets 4206 a and the outer pockets 4206 c. More specifically, theproximal landing zones 4230 of the intermediate pockets 4206 b arealigned with the neck portion 4224 of an adjacent outer staple 4206 c,and the distal landing zones 4232 of the intermediate pockets 4206 b arealigned with the neck portion 4224 of an adjacent inner staple 4206 a.Moreover, the inner pockets 4206 a and the outer pockets 4206 b extendtoward the neck portion 4224 of one of the intermediate pockets 4206 b.More specifically, the distal landing zones 4232 of the inner pockets4206 a are aligned with the neck portion 4224 of an adjacentintermediate pocket 4206 b, and the proximal landing zones 4230 of theouter pockets 4206 c are aligned with the neck portion 4224 of anadjacent intermediate pocket 4206 b.

Referring now to FIGS. 101-104C, staple-forming pockets 4306 in aportion of an anvil 4300 are depicted. The pockets 4306 and arrangementthereof in the anvil 4300 are similar in many aspects to the pockets3906 and arrangement thereof in the anvil 3900. For example, the anvil4300 includes a staple-forming surface 4302 and a longitudinal slot4304. The longitudinal slot 4304 extends along the longitudinal axis LAof the anvil 4300. In certain instances, a firing element and/or cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 4304 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. The staple-forming pockets 4306 aredefined in the staple-forming surface 4302. The staple-forming surface4302 also includes a non-forming portion 4308 that extends around thepockets 4306. The non-forming portion 4308 extends entirely around eachpocket 4306 in FIG. 101. In other words, the non-forming portion 4308surrounds the staple-forming pockets 4306. In other instances, at leasta portion of two or more adjacent pockets 4306 can be in abuttingcontact such that a non-forming portion 4308 is not positionedtherebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 4302 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 4308 of the anvil 4300 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 4306. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 4306 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 4302 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 4306 depicted in FIG. 101 are arranged in an inner row 4314a, an intermediate row 4314 b, and an outer row 4314 c on a first sideof the longitudinal slot 4304. Inner pockets 4306 a are positioned inthe inner row 4314 a, intermediate pockets 4306 b are positioned in theintermediate row 4314 b, and outer pockets 4306 c are positioned in theouter row 4314 c. Similar to the anvil 3800, the pockets 4306 arearranged in a herringbone arrangement along the staple-forming surface4302 of the anvil 4300. Although not shown in FIG. 101, in at least oneinstance, the pockets 4306 on the opposing side of the slot 4304 canform a mirror image reflection of the pockets 4306 on the first side ofthe longitudinal slot 4304. In other instances, the arrangement ofpockets 4306 in the staple-forming surface 4302 can be asymmetricalrelative to the slot 4304 and, in certain instances, the anvil 4300 maynot include the longitudinal slot 4304. In various instances, thepockets 4306 can be arranged in less than or more than three rows oneach side of the slot 4304.

The pockets 4306 depicted in FIG. 101 are identical. Each pocket 4306defined in the staple-forming surface 4302 has the same geometry. Inother instances, the geometry of the pockets 4306 can vary row-to-rowand/or longitudinally along the length of the anvil 4300. For example,in certain instances, the depth of the pockets 4306 or portions thereofcan vary along the length of the anvil 4300 to accommodate forvariations in gap distance between the anvil and the staple cartridgealong the length of an end effector and/or tissue flow, as describedherein.

An exemplary pocket 4306 b is shown in FIGS. 102-104C. The pocket 4306 bhas a first end, or proximal end, 4310 and a second end, or distal end,4312. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 102) extends between the proximal end 4310and the distal end 4312 of the pocket 4306 b. The pocket 4306 b includesa perimeter 4316, which defines the boundary of the pocket 4306 b. Theperimeter 4316 includes rounded corners at the proximal and distal endsof the pockets 4306. The pocket 4306 b also includes a proximal cup4320, a distal cup 4322, and a neck portion 4324 connecting the proximalcup 4320 and the distal cup 4322. When a staple is driven into formingcontact with the staple-forming surface 4302, the proximal cup 4320 isaligned with a proximal staple leg, and the distal cup 4322 is alignedwith a distal staple leg. The cups 4320, 4322 are configured to director funnel the staple legs toward the pocket axis PA and a centralportion of the pocket 4306, such as the neck portion 4324, and to deformthe staple legs into the formed configuration.

Referring primarily to FIG. 103, each cup 4320, 4322 of the pocket 4306b defines an entrance ramp 4340 and an exit ramp 4342. The exit ramp4342 is steeper than the entrance ramp 4340. When forming a staple, thetip of a staple leg can enter the respective cup 4320, 4322 along theentrance ramp 4340 and exit the respective cup 4320, 4322 along the exitramp 4342. At an apex 4346 between the entrance ramp 4340 and the exitramp 4342, the tips of the staple legs are deformed toward the staplebase to assume the formed configuration, such as a B-form or modifiedB-form, for example. The pocket 4306 b also defines a bridge 4344between the proximal cup 4320 and the distal cup 4322. The bridge 4344is offset from the non-forming portion 4308. More specifically, thebridge 4344 is positioned below or recessed relative to the non-formingportion 4308.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 104A-104C, the pocket 4306 b includessidewalls 4350, which are oriented perpendicular to the non-formingportion 4308 of the staple-forming surface 4302. The sidewalls 4350narrow between the outer ends of each cup 4320, 4322 and the neckportion 4324. More specifically, the sidewalls 4350 extend along aninward contour to define a contour in the perimeter 4316 of the pocket4306 b. The widest portion of the cups 4320, 4322 is at the proximal anddistal ends of the sidewalls 4350. The widened region provides anenlarged footprint for receiving the tip of a staple leg. As the cups4320, 4322 narrow toward the neck portion 4324, the cups 4320, 4322 areconfigured to funnel and/or guide the tips of the staple legs towardand/or along the pocket axis PA and into a formed configuration.

The pocket 4306 b defines a chamfered edge 4354 along the sides of thepocket 4306 b. In the pocket 4306 b, the chamfered edge 4354 defines theoverall width of the pocket 4306 b, which narrows toward the neckportion 4324. The pocket 4306 b also defines a fillet 4352 (FIGS.104A-104C) between the sidewalls 4350 and the bottom surface 4358 thepocket 4306 b. The fillets 4352 are configured to guide the staple legsalong the desired path in the pocket 4306 b. For example, if a stapleleg lands along the chamfer 4352, the fillet corner 4352 can smoothlyguide the staple leg toward the pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 102, the pocket 4306 b is symmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4316 of the pocket 4306 b issymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 4306 b issymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 4324 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4316 ofthe pocket 4306 b is symmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 4320 has the same geometry as the distal cup 4322. In otherinstances, the proximal cup 4320 can be different than the distal cup4322. For example, referring again to FIG. 103, the distal depth D₂ canbe less than the proximal depth D₁ to accommodate for variations in gapdistance between the anvil and the staple cartridge and/or tissue flow,as described herein.

Referring again to FIG. 102, the neck portion 4324 of the pocket 4306 bis narrower than the proximal and distal cups 4320 and 4322. Thenarrowed perimeter 4316 of the pocket 4306 b defines a receivingpeninsula 4326 between a portion of the proximal cup 4320 and a portionof the distal cup 4322. Owing to the symmetry of the pocket 4306 b,symmetrical receiving peninsulas 4326 are positioned on each side of thepocket 4306 b. The receiving peninsulas 4326 are bounded by theperimeter 4316 of the pocket 4306 b and a tangent axis (e.g., T_(B1) andT_(B2)), which is tangential to the widest portion of the proximal anddistal cups 4320 and 4322 on a side of the pocket 4306 b. A firsttangent axis T_(B1) is positioned on a first side of the pocket 4306 band a second tangent axis T_(B2) is positioned on the opposite side ofthe pocket 4306 b. The first and second tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2)depicted in FIG. 102 are parallel to the pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 101, each pocket 4306 extends toward thereceiving peninsula 4326 of an adjacent pocket 4306. For example, theintermediate pockets 4306 b are aligned with the neck portions 4324 ofthe inner pockets 4306 a and the outer pockets 4306 c. Moreover, theinner pockets 4306 a and the outer pockets 4306 b extend toward thereceiving peninsula 4326 of one of the intermediate pockets 4306 b. Morespecifically, the inner pockets 4306 a are aligned with the neck portion4324 of an adjacent intermediate pocket 4306 b, and the outer pockets4306 c are aligned with the neck portion 4324 of an adjacentintermediate pocket 4306 b. In certain instances, a portion of thepockets 4306 can extend into the receiving peninsula 4326 of an adjacentpocket 4306. Similar to the pockets 3906 in the anvil 3900, the geometryof the pockets 4306 facilitates the close arrangement of the pockets4306 in the staple-forming surface 4302. The “forming ratio” is theratio of the non-forming portion 4308 to the forming portion, i.e., thepockets 4306. In at least one instance, the forming ratio can be atleast 1:1, for example.

Referring now to FIGS. 105-108C, staple-forming pockets 4406 in aportion of an anvil 4400 are depicted. The pockets 4406 and arrangementthereof in the anvil 4400 are similar in many aspects to the pockets4306 and arrangement thereof in the anvil 4300. For example, the anvil4400 includes a staple-forming surface 4402 and a longitudinal slot4404. The longitudinal slot 4404 extends along the longitudinal axis LAof the anvil 4400. In certain instances, a firing element and/or cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 4404 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. The staple-forming pockets 4406 aredefined in the staple-forming surface 4402. The staple-forming surface4402 also includes a non-forming portion 4408 that extends around thepockets 4406. The non-forming portion 4408 extends entirely around eachpocket 4406 in FIG. 105. In other words, the non-forming portion 4408surrounds the staple-forming pockets 4406. In other instances, at leasta portion of two or more adjacent pockets 4406 can be in abuttingcontact such that a non-forming portion 4408 is not positionedtherebetween. Additionally, the non-forming portion 4406 extends througheach pocket 4406, as described herein.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 4402 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 4408 of the anvil 4400 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 4406. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 4406 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 4402 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 4406 depicted in FIG. 105 are arranged in an inner row 4414a, an intermediate row 4414 b, and an outer row 4414 c on a first sideof the longitudinal slot 4404. Inner pockets 4406 a are positioned inthe inner row 4414 a, intermediate pockets 4406 b are positioned in theintermediate row 4414 b, and outer pockets 4406 c are positioned in theouter row 4414 c. Similar to the anvil 3800, the pockets 4406 arearranged in a herringbone arrangement along the staple-forming surface4402 of the anvil 4400. Although not shown in FIG. 105, in at least oneinstance, the pockets 4406 on the opposing side of the slot 4404 canform a mirror image reflection of the pockets 4406 on the first side ofthe longitudinal slot 4404. In other instances, the arrangement ofpockets 4406 in the staple-forming surface 4402 can be asymmetricalrelative to the slot 4404 and, in certain instances, the anvil 4400 maynot include the longitudinal slot 4404. In various instances, thepockets 4406 can be arranged in less than or more than three rows oneach side of the slot 4404.

The pockets 4406 depicted in FIG. 105 are identical. Each pocket 4406defined in the staple-forming surface 4402 has the same geometry. Inother instances, the geometry of the pockets 4406 can vary row-to-rowand/or longitudinally along the length of the anvil 4400. For example,in certain instances, the depth of the pockets 4406 or portions thereofcan vary along the length of the anvil 4400 to accommodate forvariations in gap distance between the anvil and the staple cartridgealong the length of an end effector and/or tissue flow, as describedherein.

An exemplary pocket 4406 b is shown in FIGS. 106-108C. The pocket 4406 bhas a first end, or proximal end, 4410 and a second end, or distal end,4412. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 106) extends between the proximal end 4410and the distal end 4412 of the pocket 4406 b. The pocket 4406 b includesa perimeter 4416, which defines the boundary of the pocket 4406 b. Theperimeter 4416 includes rounded corners at the proximal and distal ends4410 and 4412 of the pocket 4406 b. The pocket 4406 b also includes aproximal cup 4420 and a distal cup 4422. A portion of the non-formingportion 4408 extends between the proximal cup 4420 and the distal cup4422. In other words, the pocket 4406 b includes two separate anddiscrete cups 4420 and 4422 in the staple-forming surface 4402. When astaple is driven into forming contact with the staple-forming surface4402, the proximal cup 4420 is aligned with a proximal staple leg, andthe distal cup 4422 is aligned with a distal staple leg. The cups 4420,4422 are configured to direct or funnel the staple legs toward thepocket axis PA and a central portion of the pocket 4406 and to deformthe staple legs into the formed configuration.

Referring primarily to FIG. 107, each cup 4420, 4422 of the pocket 4406b defines an entrance ramp 4440 and an exit ramp 4442. The exit ramp4442 is steeper than the entrance ramp 4440. When forming a staple, thetip of a staple leg can enter the respective cup 4420, 4422 along theentrance ramp 4440 and exit the respective cup 4420, 4422 along the exitramp 4442. At an apex 4446 between the entrance ramp 4440 and the exitramp 4442, the tips of the staple legs are deformed toward the staplebase to assume the formed configuration, such as a B-form or modifiedB-form, for example. The pocket 4406 b also defines a bridge 4444between the proximal cup 4420 and the distal cup 4422. The bridge 4444is aligned with the non-forming portion 4408. More specifically, thebridge 4444 is a planar extension of the non-forming portion 4408, whichextends between the proximal and distal cups 4420, 4422.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 108A-108C, the pocket 4406 b includessidewalls 4450, which are oriented at an angle relative to thenon-forming portion 4408 of the staple-forming surface 4402. Morespecifically, the sidewalls 4450 are obliquely oriented relative to thenon-forming portion 4408. Moreover, the angular orientation of thesidewalls 4450 is constant along the length of the cups. For example,the angles A, B, and C depicted in FIGS. 108A, 108B, and 108C,respectively, are equal. In other instances, one of more of the anglesA, B, and C can be different. The sidewalls 4450 narrow between theouter ends of each cup 4420, 4422 and inner ends of the cups 4420, 4422.More specifically, the sidewalls 4450 extend along an inward contour todefine a contour in the perimeter 4416 of the pocket 4406 b. The widestportion of the cups 4420, 4422 is at the proximal and distal ends of thepocket 4406 b. The widened region provides an enlarged footprint forreceiving the tip of a staple leg. As the cups 4420, 4422 narrow towardthe bridge 4444, the cups 4420, 4422 are configured to funnel and/orguide the tips of the staple legs toward and/or along the pocket axis PAand into a formed configuration.

The pocket 4406 b defines a fillet 4452 (FIGS. 108A-108C) between thesidewalls 4450 and the bottom surface 4458 of the pocket 4406 b. Thefillets 4452 are configured to guide the staple legs along the desiredpath in the pocket 4406 b. For example, if a staple leg lands along thefillet 4452, the fillet 4452 can smoothly guide the staple leg towardthe pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 106, the pocket 4406 b is symmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4416 of the pocket 4406 b issymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 4406 b issymmetric about a central axis CA between the proximal and distal cups4420 and 4422 and perpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, theperimeter 4416 of the pocket 4406 b is symmetric about the central axisCA, and the proximal cup 4420 has the same geometry as the distal cup4422. In other instances, the proximal cup 4420 can be different thanthe distal cup 4422. For example, referring again to FIG. 107, thedistal depth D₂ can be less than the proximal depth D₁ to accommodatefor variations in gap distance between the anvil and the staplecartridge and/or tissue flow, as described herein.

Referring again to FIG. 106, the central portion of the pocket 4406 b isnarrower than the proximal and distal ends 4410 and 4412 of the cups4420 and 4422, respectively. The narrowed perimeter 4416 of the pocket4406 b defines a receiving peninsula 4426 between a portion of theproximal cup 4420 and a portion of the distal cup 4422. Owing to thesymmetry of the pocket 4406 b, symmetrical receiving peninsulas 4426 arepositioned on each side of the pocket 4406 b. The receiving peninsulas4426 are bounded by the perimeter 4416 of the pocket 4406 b and atangent axis (e.g., T_(B1) and T_(B2)), which is tangential to thewidest portion of the proximal and distal cups 4420 and 4422 on a sideof the pocket 4406 b. A first tangent axis T_(B1) is positioned on afirst side of the pocket 4406 b and a second tangent axis T_(B2) ispositioned on the opposite side of the pocket 4406 b. The first andsecond tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2) depicted in FIG. 106 are parallelto the pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 105, each pocket 4406 extends toward thereceiving peninsula 4426 of an adjacent pocket 4406. For example, theintermediate pockets 4406 b are aligned with the central portion of theinner pockets 4406 a and the outer pockets 4406 c. Moreover, the innerpockets 4406 a and the outer pockets 4406 b extend toward the receivingpeninsula 4426 of one of the intermediate pockets 4406 b. Morespecifically, the inner pockets 4406 a are aligned with the centralportion of an adjacent intermediate pocket 4406 b, and the outer pockets4406 c are aligned with the central portion of an adjacent intermediatepocket 4406 b. In certain instances, a portion of the pockets 4406 canextend into the receiving peninsula 4426 of an adjacent pocket 4406.Similar to the pockets 3906 in the anvil 3900, the geometry of thepockets 4406 facilitates the close arrangement of the pockets 4406 inthe staple-forming surface 4402. The “forming ratio” of thestaple-forming surface 4402 is the ratio of the non-forming portion 4408to the forming portion, i.e., the pockets 4406. The forming ratio of thestaple-forming surface 4402 is about 2.56:1. In other instances, theforming ratio can be less than 2.56:1 or more than 2.56:1. For example,in at least one instance, more than 50% of the staple-forming surface4402 can be covered with staple-forming pockets 4406.

Referring now to FIGS. 109-112C, staple-forming pockets 4506 in aportion of an anvil 4500 are depicted. The pockets 4506 and arrangementthereof in the anvil 4500 are similar in many aspects to the pockets3906 and arrangement thereof in the anvil 3900. For example, the anvil4500 includes a staple-forming surface 4502 and a longitudinal slot4504. The longitudinal slot 4504 extends along the longitudinal axis LAof the anvil 4500. In certain instances, a firing element and/or cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 4504 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. The staple-forming pockets 4506 aredefined in the staple-forming surface 4502. The staple-forming surface4502 also includes a non-forming portion 4508 that extends around thepockets 4506. The non-forming portion 4508 extends entirely around eachpocket 4506 in FIG. 109. In other words, the non-forming portion 4508surrounds the staple-forming pockets 4506. In other instances, at leasta portion of two or more adjacent pockets 4506 can be in abuttingcontact such that a non-forming portion 4508 is not positionedtherebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 4502 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 4508 of the anvil 4500 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 4506. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 4506 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 4502 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 4506 depicted in FIG. 109 are arranged in an inner row 4514a, an intermediate row 4514 b, and an outer row 4514 c on a first sideof the longitudinal slot 4504. Inner pockets 4506 a are positioned inthe inner row 4514 a, intermediate pockets 4506 b are positioned in theintermediate row 4514 b, and outer pockets 4506 c are positioned in theouter row 4514 c. Similar to the anvil 3800, the pockets 4506 arearranged in a herringbone arrangement along the staple-forming surface4502 of the anvil 4500. Although not shown in FIG. 109, in at least oneinstance, the pockets 4506 on the opposing side of the slot 4504 canform a mirror image reflection of the pockets 4506 on the first side ofthe longitudinal slot 4504. In other instances, the arrangement ofpockets 4506 in the staple-forming surface 4502 can be asymmetricalrelative to the slot 4504 and, in certain instances, the anvil 4500 maynot include the longitudinal slot 4504. In various instances, thepockets 4506 can be arranged in less than or more than three rows oneach side of the slot 4504.

The pockets 4506 depicted in FIG. 109 are identical. Each pocket 4506defined in the staple-forming surface 4502 has the same geometry. Inother instances, the geometry of the pockets 4506 can vary row-to-rowand/or longitudinally along the length of the anvil 4500. For example,in certain instances, the depth of the pockets 4506 or portions thereofcan vary along the length of the anvil 4500 to accommodate forvariations in gap distance between the anvil and the staple cartridgealong the length of an end effector and/or tissue flow, as describedherein.

An exemplary pocket 4506 b is shown in FIGS. 110-112C. The pocket 4506 bhas a first end, or proximal end, 4510 and a second end, or distal end,4512. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 110) extends between the proximal end 4510and the distal end 4512 of the pocket 4506 b. The pocket 4506 b includesa perimeter 4516, which defines the boundary of the pocket 4506 b.Similar to the pockets 4306, the perimeter 4516 includes rounded cornersat the proximal and distal ends 4510 and 4512 of the pocket 4506 b. Thepocket 4506 b also includes a proximal cup 4520, a distal cup 4522, anda neck 4524 extending between the proximal cup 4520 and the distal cup4522. When a staple is driven into forming contact with thestaple-forming surface 4502, the proximal cup 4520 is aligned with aproximal staple leg, and the distal cup 4522 is aligned with a distalstaple leg. The cups 4520, 4522 are configured to direct or funnel thestaple legs toward the pocket axis PA and a central portion of thepocket 4506, such as the neck 4524, and to deform the staple legs intothe formed configuration.

Referring primarily to FIG. 111, each cup 4520, 4522 of the pocket 4506b defines an entrance ramp 4540 and an exit ramp 4542. The entrance ramp4540 is steeper than the exit ramp 4542. When forming a staple, the tipof a staple leg can enter the respective cup 4520, 4522 along theentrance ramp 4540 and exit the respective cup 4520, 4522 along the exitramp 4542. At an apex 4546 between the entrance ramp 4540 and the exitramp 4542, the tips of the staple legs are deformed toward the staplebase to assume the formed configuration, such as a B-form or modifiedB-form, for example. The pocket 4506 b also defines a bridge 4544between the proximal cup 4520 and the distal cup 4522. The bridge 4544is offset from the non-forming portion 4508. More specifically, thebridge 4544 is positioned below or recessed relative to the non-formingportion 4508.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 112A-112C, the pocket 4506 b includescontoured or arced walls 4550. The walls 4550 form each cup 4520, 5422into a wide, rounded basin for receiving and forming the staple legs.Additionally, the pocket 4506 b includes a groove 4556 along the bottomsurface. The walls 4550 arc downward into the anvil 4500 between thenon-forming surface 4508 and the groove 4556. For example, the sidewalls4550 seamlessly transition to a bottom surface of the pocket 4506 b. Thegroove 4556 extends along the bottom surface from the proximal cup 4520over the bridge 4524 and into the distal cup 4522. The groove 4556 isconfigured to constrain and guide the staple legs as they move to thedeformed configuration. In various instances, the diameter of the groove4556 can be less than the diameter of the staple engaged with the groove4556. In end effectors in which different staple geometries are utilizedwith the same staple-forming pocket geometry, the width of the groove inthe pocket can be less than the smallest diameter staple.

The contoured walls 4550 narrow between the outer ends of each cup 4520,4522 and the neck 4524. More specifically, the walls 4550 extend alongan inward contour to define a contour in the perimeter 4516 of thepocket 4506 b. The widened region provides an enlarged footprint forreceiving the tip of a staple leg. As the cups 4520, 4522 narrow towardthe bridge 4544, the cups 4520, 4522 are configured to funnel and/orguide the tips of the staple legs toward and/or along the pocket axis PAand into a formed configuration.

The pocket 4506 b also defines a chamfered edge 4554 along a portion ofthe sides of the pocket 4506 b. As the sidewalls 4550 narrow toward theneck portion 4524, the width of the chamfered edge 4554 correspondinglyexpands toward the neck portion 4224 to maintain the overall pocketwidth.

Referring again to FIG. 110, the pocket 4506 b is symmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4516 of the pocket 4406 b issymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 4506 b issymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 4524 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 4516 ofthe pocket 4506 b is symmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 4520 has the same geometry as the distal cup 4522. In otherinstances, the proximal cup 4520 can be different than the distal cup4522. For example, referring again to FIG. 111, the distal depth D₂ canbe less than the proximal depth D₁ to accommodate for variations in gapdistance between the anvil and the staple cartridge and/or tissue flow,as described herein.

Referring again to FIG. 109, each pocket 4506 extends toward the neckportion 4524 of an adjacent pocket 4506. For example, the intermediatepockets 4506 b are aligned with the neck portions 4524 of the innerpockets 4506 a and the outer pockets 4506 c. Moreover, the inner pockets4506 a and the outer pockets 4506 b extend toward the neck portion 4524of one of the intermediate pockets 4506 b.

Staple-forming pockets can include extended landing zones for receivingthe tips of the staple legs when the staples are fired into formingcontact with the anvil. In certain instances, the extended landing zonescan extend laterally and/or longitudinally from the cups of thestaple-forming pockets, as described herein. The profile, or perimeter,of the staple-forming pockets can nest with the profile, or perimeter,of one or more adjacent staple-forming pockets. For example, at least aportion of the perimeter of a staple-forming pocket can extend along acontour or path that matches, tracks, follows and/or parallels a portionof the perimeter of one or more adjacent staple-forming pockets. Suchtracking portions or adjacent perimeters can define concentric profiles.

In various instances, the surface area of a staple-forming pocket havingone or more extended landing zones can be greater than the surface areaof a staple-forming pocket without the one or more extended landingzones. For example, extended landing zones can increase the surface areaof a staple-forming pocket by at least 10%. Extended landing zones canincrease the surface area of a staple-forming pocket by 15% or 25%, forexample. In other instances, extended landing zones can increase thesurface area of a staple-forming pocket by less than 10%, such as 5%,for example. Certain staple-forming pockets described herein can have agreater surface area than the staple-forming pockets in an anvil havingsix rows of parallel staple-forming pockets but that is otherwiseidentical to certain anvils described herein having six rows ofangularly-oriented staple-forming pockets. In still other instances, astaple-forming pocket having extended landing zones may also includenarrowed and/or otherwise reduced portions having a surface area that isequal to or greater than the surface area of the extended landing zones.

In certain instances, the staple-forming pockets can be asymmetrical.For example, the staple-forming pockets can be asymmetrical relative toa pocket axis extending between a proximal end and a distal end of thepocket and/or can be asymmetrical relative to a central axis extendingperpendicular to the pocket axis and transecting a central portion ofthe pocket. The asymmetry of the staple-forming pockets can facilitatenesting of the pockets and/or can maximize the surface area of thepockets in a staple-forming surface, for example.

Referring now to FIGS. 113-116C, staple-forming pockets 5006 in aportion of an anvil 5000 are depicted. Similar to the anvil 3800, thepockets 5006 are arranged in a herringbone arrangement along thestaple-forming surface 5002 of the anvil 5000. The anvil 5000 includes astaple-forming surface 5002 and a longitudinal slot 5004. Thelongitudinal slot 5004 extends along the longitudinal axis LA of theanvil 5000. In certain instances, a firing element and/or a cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 5004 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. The staple-forming pockets 5006 aredefined in the staple-forming surface 5002. The staple-forming surface5002 also includes a non-forming portion 5008 that extends around thepockets 5006. The non-forming portion 5008 extends entirely around eachpocket 5006. In other words, the non-forming portion 5008 surrounds thestaple-forming pockets 5006. In other instances, at least a portion oftwo or more adjacent pockets 5006 can be in abutting contact such that anon-forming portion 5008 is not positioned therebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 5002 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 5008 of the anvil 5000 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 5006. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 5006 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 5002 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 5006 depicted in FIG. 113 are arranged in an inner row 5014a, an intermediate row 5014 b, and an outer row 5014 c on a first sideof the longitudinal slot 5004. Inner pockets 5006 a are positioned inthe inner row 5014 a, intermediate pockets 5006 b are positioned in theintermediate row 5014 b, and outer pockets 5006 c are positioned in theouter row 5014 c. Although not shown in FIG. 113, in at least oneinstance, the pockets 5006 on the opposing side of the slot 5004 canform a mirror image reflection of the pockets 5006 on the first side ofthe longitudinal slot 5004. In other instances, the arrangement ofpockets 5006 in the staple-forming surface 5002 can be asymmetricalrelative to the slot 5004 and, in certain instances, the anvil 5000 maynot include the longitudinal slot 5004. In various instances, thepockets 5006 can be arranged in less than or more than three rows oneach side of the slot 5004.

The inner pockets 5006 a are identical, the intermediate pockets 5006 bare identical, and the outer pockets 5006 c are identical; however, theinner pockets 5006 a are different than the intermediate pockets 5006 band the outer pockets 5006 c, and the intermediate pockets 5006 b aredifferent than the outer pockets 5006 c. In other words, the pockets5006 in each row 5014 a, 5014 b, and 5014 c are different. Extendedlanding zones 5030 and 5032 of the pockets 5006 a, 5006 b, and 5006 c,which are described herein, contribute to the different geometriesthereof. The shape and size of the extended landing zones 5030 and 5032are confined by the perimeter 5016 of adjacent, nested pockets 5006.

Although the pockets 5006 in each row 5014 a, 5014 b, and 5014 c aredifferent, the pockets 5006 can be configured to form staples to thesame, or substantially the same, formed shape. In other instances, thepockets 5006 can be configured to form staples to different formedshapes, such as to different heights and/or configurations. In certaininstances, the pockets 5006 can vary longitudinally within each row 5014a, 5014 b, and 5014 c. For example, in certain instances, the depth ofthe pockets 5006 or portions thereof can vary along the length of theanvil 5000 to accommodate for variations in gap distance between theanvil and the staple cartridge along the length of an end effectorand/or tissue flow, as described herein.

In certain instances, the pockets 5006 can be configured to engagedifferent geometry staples. For example, staples having differentunformed heights and/or different diameters can be formed by the pockets5006 in the anvil 5000. In certain instances, the geometry of thestaples can vary longitudinally, and the pockets 5006 can be configuredto form the different geometry staples. For example, the unformed heightof the staples and/or the wire diameter can vary along the length of theanvil 5000.

An exemplary intermediate pocket 5006 b is shown in FIGS. 113-116C. Thepocket 5006 b has a first end, or proximal end, 5010 and a second end,or distal end, 5012. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 114) extends between theproximal end 5010 and the distal end 5012 of the pocket 5006 b. Thepocket 5006 b includes a perimeter 5016, which defines the boundary ofthe pocket 5006 b. The perimeter 5016 includes linear portions andcontoured portions. More specifically, the perimeter 5016 includeslinear portions and contoured corners therebetween at which the linearportions change directions. Referring again to FIG. 113 at least aportion of the perimeter 5016 of each pocket 5006 closely tracks orparallels at least a portion of the perimeter of one or more adjacentpockets 5006.

The pocket 5006 b includes a proximal cup 5020, a distal cup 5022, and aneck 5024 extending between the proximal cup 5020 and the distal cup5022. When a staple is driven into forming contact with thestaple-forming surface 5002, the proximal cup 5020 is aligned with aproximal staple leg, and the distal cup 5022 is aligned with a distalstaple leg. The cups 5020 and 5022 are configured to direct or funnelthe staple legs toward the pocket axis PA and the central portion of thepocket 5006, such as the neck portion 5024, and to deform the staplelegs into the formed configuration.

Referring primarily to FIG. 115, each cup 5020, 5022 of the pocket 5006b defines an entrance ramp 5040 and an exit ramp 5042. When forming astaple, the tip of a staple leg can enter the respective pocket 5020,5022 along the entrance ramp 5040 and exit the respective pocket 5020,5022 along the exit ramp 5042. At an apex 5046 between the entrance ramp5040 and the exit ramp 5042, the tips of the staple legs are deformedtoward the staple base to assume the formed configuration, such as aB-form or modified B-form, for example. The pocket 5006 b also defines abridge 5044 in the neck portion 5024 between the proximal cup 5020 andthe distal cup 5022. The bridge 5044 is offset from the non-formingportion 5008. More specifically, the bridge 5044 is positioned below orrecessed relative to the non-forming portion 5008.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 116A-116C, the pocket 5006 b includessidewalls 5050, which extend from the non-forming portion 5008 to thebottom surface 5058. The sidewalls 5050 include linear portions andcontoured portions. The sidewalls 5050 widen toward a central region5021 (FIG. 114) of each cup 5020, 5022, and narrow from the centralregion 5021 of each cup 5020, 5022 toward the neck portion 5024. Thewidened central region 5021 provides an enlarged footprint for receivingthe tip of a staple leg. As the cups 5020, 5022 narrow toward the neck5024, the cups 5020, 5022 are configured to funnel and/or guide thestaple legs and tips thereof toward and/or along the pocket axis PA andinto a formed configuration.

FIG. 116A is taken along the plane ALL in FIG. 114, which corresponds tothe anticipated landing location (ALL) of a staple leg. For example, thetip of a staple leg can be expected to land in the proximal cup 5020 atand/or near the intersection of the plane ALL and the pocket axis PA. Atthe plane ALL, the pocket 5006 b defines a width W_(A) and a depthD_(A). The cross-section in FIG. 116B is taken across a transitionbetween the proximal cup 5020 and the neck 5024. FIG. 116B depicts thepocket 5006 b defining a width W_(B) and a depth D_(B). The width W_(B)is less than the width W_(A), and the depth D_(B) is greater than thedepth D_(A). In other words, the pocket 5006 b narrows and deepens fromthe plane ALL in the proximal cup 5020 toward the neck 5024. Thecomparatively large width W_(A) at the plane ALL is configured toprovide a wide receptacle or basin for receiving the staple leg. Thecross-section in FIG. 67C is taken across the neck portion 5024. FIG.116C depicts the pocket 5006 b defining a width W_(C) and a depth D_(C).The width W_(C) is less than the width W_(B), and the depth D_(C) isless than the depth D_(B). In other words, the pocket 5006 b continuesto narrow, and becomes shallower in the neck 5024 across the bridge5044.

The bottom surface 5058 of the pocket 5006 b is a flat surface, which isbounded by an arcuate fillet 5059 therearound. In certain instances, thebottom surface 5058 can have a groove defined along at least a portionthereof. In other instances, the bottom surface 5058 can form a trough.In still other instances, the bottom surface can include hump or ridgealong at least a portion thereof, such as across the bridge 5044, forexample.

Referring primarily now to FIG. 114, the pocket 5006 b includes aproximal extended landing zone 5030 and a distal extended landing zone5032. The proximal extended landing zone 5030 is positioned in aproximal portion of the proximal cup 5020, and the distal extendedlanding zone 5032 is positioned in a distal portion of the distal cup5022. More specifically, the extended landing zones 5030 and 5032 arepositioned beyond the anticipated landing location of a staple. Forexample, the proximal extended landing zone 5030 is positioned proximalto the plane ALL and, in instances where the tip of a staple leg landsbeyond the plane ALL, the proximal extended landing zones 5030 can catchthe staple leg and direct it toward the pocket axis PA and/or toward theneck portion 5024. The landing zones 5030 and 5032 define a generallypolygonal shape and, more specifically, a quadrilateral with roundedcorners. In other instances, the landing zones 5030 and 5032 can betriangular or substantially triangular and, in still other instances,can define an arcuate or bulbous profile, for example.

The geometry of the extended landing zones 5030 and 5032 is constrainedby the perimeter 5016 of the adjacent staple-forming pockets 5006. Forexample, the extended landing zones 5030 and 5032 can extend towardand/or into nearly abutting contact with one or more adjacentstaple-forming pockets. The extended landing zones 5030 and 5032 and/orother portions of the pocket 5006 b can track and/or extend parallel toadjacent staple-forming pockets 5006. In other instances, the extendedlanding zones 5030 and 5032 can abut one or more adjacent staple-formingpockets 5006.

Referring again to FIG. 114, the pocket 5006 b is asymmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 5016 of the pocket 5006 b isasymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 5006 b isasymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 5024 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 5016 ofthe pocket 5006 b is asymmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 5020 has a different geometry than the distal cup 5022.Although the proximal cup 5020 and the distal cup 5022 are different,the pocket 5006 b can be configured to form symmetric staples. Forexample, referring again to FIG. 115, the distal depth D₂ can be lessthan the proximal depth D₁ to accommodate for variations in gap distancebetween the anvil and the staple cartridge and/or tissue flow, asdescribed herein. The formed height of the proximal and distal legs of astaple can be equal. In other instances, the pocket 5006 can beconfigured to form asymmetric staples.

Referring again to FIG. 114, the neck portion 5024 is narrower than theproximal and distal cups 5020 and 5022. The narrowed perimeter 5016 ofthe pocket 5006 b at the neck portion 5024 defines a receiving peninsula5026 between a portion of the proximal cup 5020 and a portion of thedistal cup 5022. Receiving peninsulas 5026 are positioned on each sideof the pocket 5006 b. The receiving peninsulas 5026 are bounded by theperimeter 5016 of the pocket 5006 b and a tangent axis (e.g., T_(B1) andT_(B2)), which is tangential to the widest portions of the proximal anddistal cups 5020 and 5022 on each side of the pocket 5006. A firsttangent axis T_(B1) is positioned on a first side of the pocket 5006 band a second tangent axis T_(B2) is positioned on the opposite side ofthe pocket 5006 b. The first and second tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2)depicted in FIG. 116 are parallel to the pocket axis PA. In otherinstances, one or both of the tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2) may not beparallel to the pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 113, the perimeters 5016 of the pockets 5006 arenested or interlocked along the staple-forming surface 5002. Inparticular, each pocket 5006 extends into the receiving peninsula 5026of an adjacent pocket 5006. For example, the intermediate pockets 5006 bare nested between the inner pockets 5006 a and the outer pockets 5006c. Stated differently, the intermediate pockets 5006 b extend into thereceiving peninsula 5026 of an adjacent inner pocket 5006 a and into thereceiving peninsula 5026 of an adjacent outer pocket 5006 c. Moreover,the inner pockets 5006 a and the outer pockets 5006 b are nested withthe intermediate pockets 5006 b. More specifically, the inner pockets5006 a extend into the receiving peninsula 5026 of an adjacentintermediate pocket 5006 b, and the outer pockets 5006 c extend into thereceiving peninsula 5026 of an adjacent intermediate pocket 5006 b. Invarious instances, the distal extended landing zone 5032 of theintermediate pocket 5006 b is positioned in the receiving peninsula 5026of an inner pocket 5006 a, the proximal extended landing zone 5030 ofthe intermediate pocket 5006 b is positioned in the receiving peninsula5026 of an outer pocket 5006 c, the distal extended landing zone 5032 ofan inner pocket 5006 a is positioned in the receiving peninsula 5026 ofan intermediate pocket 5006 b, and the proximal extended landing zone5030 of the outer pocket 5006 c is positioned in the receiving peninsula5026 of an intermediate pocket 5006 b.

The geometry of the pockets 5006 facilitates the nesting of the pockets5006 in the staple-forming surface 5002. For example, because thepockets 5006 include a narrowed neck portion 5024 between two enlargedcups 5020 and 5022, one of the enlarged cups 5020, 5022 of anotherpocket 5006 can be positioned adjacent to the narrowed neck portion5024. For example, one of the enlarged cups 5020, 5022 can be alignedwith and/or received by a portion of an adjacent pocket 5006. In suchinstances, the surface area of the staple-forming surface 5002 that iscovered by the pockets 5006 can be optimized. The “forming ratio” of thestaple-forming surface 5002 is the ratio of the non-forming portion 5008to the forming portion, i.e., the pockets 5006. The forming ratio of thestaple-forming surface 5002 is about 1:1. In other instances, theforming ratio can be less than 1:1 or more than 1:1. For example, in atleast one instance, more than 50% of the staple-forming surface 5002 canbe covered with staple-forming pockets 5006. In another instances, morethan 60% or more than 75% of the stapling-forming surface 5002 can becovered with staple-forming pockets 5006.

Referring now to FIGS. 117-120C, staple-forming pockets 5106 in aportion of an anvil 5100 are depicted. Similar to the anvil 3800, thepockets 5106 are arranged in a herringbone arrangement along thestaple-forming surface 5102 of the anvil 5100. The anvil 5100 includes astaple-forming surface 5102 and a longitudinal slot 5104. Thelongitudinal slot 5104 extends along the longitudinal axis LA of theanvil 5100. In certain instances, a firing element and/or a cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 5104 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. The staple-forming pockets 5106 aredefined in the staple-forming surface 5102. The staple-forming surface5102 also includes a non-forming portion 5108 that extends around thepockets 5106. The non-forming portion 5108 extends entirely around eachpocket 5106. In other words, the non-forming portion 5108 surrounds thestaple-forming pockets 5106. In other instances, at least a portion oftwo or more adjacent pockets 5106 can be in abutting contact such that anon-forming portion 5108 is not positioned therebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 5102 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 5108 of the anvil 5100 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 5106. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 5106 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 5102 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 5106 depicted in FIG. 117 are arranged in an inner row 5114a, an intermediate row 5114 b, and an outer row 5114 c on a first sideof the longitudinal slot 5104. Inner pockets 5106 a are positioned inthe inner row 5114 a, intermediate pockets 5106 b are positioned in theintermediate row 5114 b, and outer pockets 5106 c are positioned in theouter row 5114 c. Although not shown in FIG. 117, in at least oneinstance, the pockets 5106 on the opposing side of the slot 5104 canform a mirror image reflection of the pockets 5106 on the first side ofthe longitudinal slot 5104. In other instances, the arrangement ofpockets 5106 in the staple-forming surface 5102 can be asymmetricalrelative to the slot 5104 and, in certain instances, the anvil 5100 maynot include the longitudinal slot 5104. In various instances, thepockets 5106 can be arranged in less than or more than three rows oneach side of the slot 5104.

The inner pockets 5106 a are identical, the intermediate pockets 5106 bare identical, and the outer pockets 5106 c are identical; however, theinner pockets 5106 a are different than the intermediate pockets 5106 band the outer pockets 5106 c, and the intermediate pockets 5106 b aredifferent than the outer pockets 5106 c. In other words, the pockets5106 in each row 5114 a, 5114 b, and 5114 c are different. In otherinstances, the pockets 5106 in two or more of the rows can be the same.For example, the inner pockets 5106 a can be the same as the outerpockets 5106 c. Extended landing zones 5130 and 5132 of the pockets 5106a, 5106 b, and 5106 c, which are described herein, can contribute to thedifferent geometries thereof. Moreover, the shape and size of theextended landing zones 5130 and 5132 are confined by the perimeter 5116of the adjacent, nested pockets 5106. The landing zones 5130 and 5132define an arcuate profile. In other instances, the landing zones 5030and 5032 can be polygonal and/or include one or more linear and/orcontoured portions.

Although the pockets in each row 5114 a, 5114 b, and 5114 c aredifferent, the pockets 5106 can be configured to form staples to thesame, or substantially the same, formed shape. In other instances, thepockets 5106 can be configured to form staples to different formedshapes, such as to different heights and/or configurations. In certaininstances, the pockets 5106 can vary longitudinally within each row 5114a, 5114 b, and 5114 c. For example, in certain instances, the depth ofthe pockets 5106 or portions thereof can vary along the length of theanvil 5100 to accommodate for variations in gap distance between theanvil and the staple cartridge along the length of an end effectorand/or tissue flow, as described herein.

An exemplary intermediate pocket 5106 b is shown in FIGS. 117-120C. Thepocket 5106 b has a first end, or proximal end, 5110 and a second end,or distal end, 5112. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 118) extends between theproximal end 5110 and the distal end 5112 of the pocket 5106 b. Thepocket 5106 b includes a perimeter 5116, which defines the boundary ofthe pocket 5106 b. The perimeter 5116 includes linear portions andcontoured portions. More specifically, the perimeter 5116 includeslinear portions and contoured corners therebetween at which the linearportions change directions. Referring again to FIG. 117, at least aportion of the perimeter 5116 of each pocket 5106 closely tracks orparallels at least a portion of the perimeter of one or more adjacentpockets 5106. The rounded perimeter 5116 of the pocket 5106 b canprovide a smoother profile, which can be easier to coin and/or stamp inthe staple-forming surface 5102 than pockets having sharp corners, forexample.

The pocket 5106 b includes a proximal cup 5120, a distal cup 5122, and aneck portion 5124 extending between the proximal cup 5120 and the distalcup 5122. When a staple is driven into forming contact with thestaple-forming surface 5102, the proximal cup 5120 is aligned with aproximal staple leg, and the distal cup 5122 is aligned with a distalstaple leg. The cups 5120 and 5122 are configured to direct or funnelthe staple legs toward the pocket axis PA and the central portion of thepocket 5106, such as the neck portion 5124, and to deform the staplelegs into the formed configuration.

Referring primarily to FIG. 119, each cup 5120, 5122 of the pocket 5106b defines an entrance ramp 5140 and an exit ramp 5142. When forming astaple, the tip of a staple leg can enter the respective pocket 5120,5122 along the entrance ramp 5140 and exit the respective pocket 5120,5122 along the exit ramp 5142. At an apex 5146 between the entrance ramp5140 and the exit ramp 5142, the tips of the staple legs are deformedtoward the staple base to assume the formed configuration, such as aB-form or modified B-form, for example. The pocket 5106 b also defines abridge 5144 in the neck portion 5124 between the proximal cup 5120 andthe distal cup 5122. The bridge 5144 is offset from the non-formingportion 5108. More specifically, the bridge 5144 is positioned below orrecessed relative to the non-forming portion 5108.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 120A-120C, the pocket 5106 b includessidewalls 5150, which extend from the non-forming portion 5108. Thesidewalls 5150 include linear portions and contoured portions. Thesidewalls 5150 widen toward a central region 5121 (FIG. 118) of each cup5120, 5122, and narrow from the central region 5121 of each cup 5120,5122 toward the neck portion 5124. The widened central region 5121provides an enlarged footprint for receiving the tip of a staple leg. Asthe cups 5120, 5122 narrow toward the neck 5124, the cups 5120, 5122 areconfigured to funnel and/or guide the staple legs and tips thereoftoward and/or along the pocket axis PA and into a formed configuration.

FIG. 120A is taken along the plane ALL in FIG. 118, which corresponds tothe anticipated landing location of a staple leg. For example, the tipof a staple leg can be expected to land in the proximal cup 5120 atand/or near the intersection of the plane ALL and the pocket axis PA. Atthe plane ALL, the pocket 5106 b defines a width W_(A) and a depthD_(A). The cross-section in FIG. 120B is taken across a transitionbetween the proximal cup 5120 and the neck 5124. FIG. 120B depicts thepocket 5106 b defining a width W_(B) and a depth D_(B). The width W_(B)is less than the width W_(A), and the depth D_(B) is greater than thedepth D_(A). In other words, the pocket 5106 b narrows and deepens fromthe plane ALL in the proximal cup 5120 toward the neck 5124. Thecomparatively large width W_(A) at the plane ALL is configured toprovide a wide basin or receptacle for receiving the staple leg. Thecross-section in FIG. 120C is taken across the neck portion 5124. FIG.120C depicts the pocket 5106 b defining a width W_(C) and a depth D_(C).The width W_(C) is less than the width W_(B), and the depth D_(C) isless than the depth D_(B). In other words, the pocket 5106 b continuesto narrow, and becomes shallower in the neck 5124 across the bridge5144.

The bottom surface 5158 of the pocket 5106 b is a flat surface. In otherinstances, the bottom surface 5158 can have a groove defined along atleast a portion thereof. In still instances, the bottom surface 5158 canform a trough and/or can include hump or ridge along at least a portionthereof, such as across the bridge 5144, for example.

Referring primarily now to FIG. 118, the pocket 5106 b includes aproximal extended landing zone 5130 and a distal extended landing zone5132. The proximal extended landing zone 5130 is positioned in aproximal portion of the proximal cup 5120, and the distal extendedlanding zone 5132 is positioned in a distal portion of the distal cup5122. More specifically, the extended landing zones 5130 and 5132 arepositioned beyond the anticipated landing location of a staple. Forexample, the proximal extended landing zone 5130 is positioned proximalto the plane ALL and, in instances where the tip of a staple leg landsbeyond the plane ALL, the proximal extended landing zone 5130 can catchthe staple leg and direct it toward the pocket axis PA and/or toward theneck portion 5124.

The geometry of the extended landing zones 5130 and 5132 is constrainedby the perimeter 5016 of the adjacent staple-forming pockets 5106. Forexample, the extended landing zones 5130 and 5132 can extend towardand/or into nearly abutting contact with one of more adjacentstaple-forming pockets. The extended landing zones 5130 and 5132 and/orother portions of the pocket 5106 b can extend parallel to adjacentstaple-forming pockets 5106. In other instances, the extended landingzones 5130 and 5132 can abut one or more adjacent staple-forming pockets5106.

Referring again to FIG. 118, the pocket 5106 b is asymmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 5116 of the pocket 5106 b isasymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 5106 b isasymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 5124 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 5116 ofthe pocket 5106 b is asymmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 5120 has a different geometry than the distal cup 5122.Although the proximal cup 5120 and the distal cup 5122 are different,the pocket 5106 b can be configured to form symmetric staples. Forexample, referring again to FIG. 119, the distal depth D₂ can be lessthan the proximal depth D₁ to accommodate for variations in gap distancebetween the anvil and the staple cartridge and/or tissue flow, asdescribed herein. Accordingly, the formed height of the proximal anddistal legs of a staple can be equal. In other instances, the pocket5106 can be configured to form asymmetric staples.

Referring again to FIG. 118, the neck portion 5124 is narrower than theproximal and distal cups 5120 and 5122. The narrowed perimeter 5116 ofthe pocket 5106 b at the neck portion 5124 defines a receiving peninsula5126 between a portion of the proximal cup 5120 and a portion of thedistal cup 5122. Receiving peninsulas 5126 are positioned on each sideof the pocket 5106 b. The receiving peninsulas 5126 are bounded by theperimeter 5116 of the pocket 5106 b and a tangent axis (e.g., T_(B1) orT_(B2)), which is tangential to the widest portions of the proximal anddistal cups 5120 and 5122 on each side of the pocket 5106. A firsttangent axis T_(B1) is positioned on a first side of the pocket 5106 band a second tangent axis T_(B2) is positioned on the opposite side ofthe pocket 5106 b. The first and second tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2)depicted in FIG. 118 are skewed relative to the pocket axis PA. In otherinstances, one or both of the tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2) can beparallel to the pocket axis PA.

Referring again to FIG. 117, the perimeters 5116 of the pockets 5106 arenested or interlocked along the staple-forming surface 5102. Inparticular, each pocket 5106 extends into the receiving peninsula 5126of an adjacent pocket 5106. For example, the intermediate pockets 5106 bare nested between the inner pockets 5106 a and the outer pockets 5106c. Stated differently, the intermediate pockets 5106 b extend into thereceiving peninsula 5126 of an adjacent inner pocket 5106 a and into thereceiving peninsula 5126 of an adjacent outer pocket 5106 c. Moreover,the inner pockets 5106 a and the outer pockets 5106 b are nested withthe intermediate pockets 5106 b. More specifically, the inner pockets5106 a extend into the receiving peninsula 5126 of an adjacentintermediate pocket 5106 b, and the outer pockets 5106 c extend into thereceiving peninsula 5126 of an adjacent intermediate pocket 5106 b. Invarious instances, the distal extended landing zone 5132 of theintermediate pocket 5106 b is positioned in the receiving peninsula 5126of an inner pocket 5106 a, the proximal extended landing zone 5130 ofthe intermediate pocket 5106 b is positioned in the receiving peninsula5126 of an outer pocket 5106 c, the distal extended landing zone 5132 ofan inner pocket 5106 a is positioned in the receiving peninsula 5126 ofan intermediate pocket 5106 b, and the proximal extended landing zone5130 of the outer pocket 5106 c is positioned in the receiving peninsula5126 of an intermediate pocket 5106 b.

The geometry of the pockets 5106 facilitates the nesting of the pockets5106 in the staple-forming surface 5102. For example, because thepockets 5106 include a narrowed neck portion 5124 between two enlargedcups 5120 and 5122, one of the enlarged cups 5120, 5122 of anotherpocket 5106 can be positioned adjacent to the narrowed neck portion5124. For example, one of the enlarged cups 5120, 5122 can be alignedwith and/or received by a portion of an adjacent pocket 5106. In suchinstances, the surface area of the staple-forming surface 5102 that iscovered by the pockets 5106 can be optimized. For example, the surfacearea of the staple-forming surface 5102 that is covered by the pockets5106 is maximized. The “forming ratio” of the staple-forming surface5102 is the ratio of the non-forming portion 5108 to the formingportion, i.e., the pockets 5106. In at least one instance, the formingratio can be at least 1:1, for example. In certain instances, more than60% or more than 75% of the staple-forming surface 5102 can be coveredby staple-forming pockets 5106.

Referring now to FIGS. 121-125C, staple-forming pockets 5206 in aportion of an anvil 5200 are depicted. Similar to the anvil 3800, thepockets 5206 are arranged in a herringbone arrangement along thestaple-forming surface 5202 of the anvil 5200. The anvil 5200 includes astaple-forming surface 5202 and a longitudinal slot 5204. Thelongitudinal slot 5204 extends along the longitudinal axis LA of theanvil 5200. In certain instances, a firing element and/or a cuttingelement can translate through the longitudinal slot 5204 during at leasta portion of a firing stroke. The staple-forming pockets 5206 aredefined in the staple-forming surface 5202. The staple-forming surface5202 also includes a non-forming portion 5208 that extends around thepockets 5206. The non-forming portion 5208 extends entirely around eachpocket 5206. In other words, the non-forming portion 5208 surrounds thestaple-forming pockets 5206. In other instances, at least a portion oftwo or more adjacent pockets 5206 can be in abutting contact such that anon-forming portion 5208 is not positioned therebetween.

The forming ratio of the staple-forming surface 5202 can be optimized.By optimizing the forming ratio, more staples can be formed and/orformed to their desired configurations. In certain instances, thesurface area of the non-forming portion 5208 of the anvil 5200 can beminimized with respect to the staple-forming pockets 5206. Additionallyor alternatively, the footprint of the staple-forming pockets 5206 canbe extended or enlarged to maximize the portion of the staple-formingsurface 5202 that is designed to catch and form the staples.

The pockets 5206 depicted in FIG. 121 are arranged in an inner row 5214a, an intermediate row 5214 b, and an outer row 5214 c on a first sideof the longitudinal slot 5204. Inner pockets 5206 a are positioned inthe inner row 5214 a, intermediate pockets 5206 b are positioned in theintermediate row 5214 b, and outer pockets 5206 c are positioned in theouter row 5214 c. Although not shown in FIG. 121, in at least oneinstance, the pockets 5206 on the opposing side of the slot 5204 canform a mirror image reflection of the pockets 5206 on the first side ofthe longitudinal slot 5204. In other instances, the arrangement ofpockets 5206 in the staple-forming surface 5202 can be asymmetricalrelative to the slot 5204 and, in certain instances, the anvil 5200 maynot include the longitudinal slot 5204. In various instances, thepockets 5206 can be arranged in less than or more than three rows oneach side of the slot 5204.

The pockets 5206 depicted in FIG. 121 are identical. Each pocket 5206defined in the staple-forming surface 5202 has the same geometry. Inother instances, the geometry of the pockets 5206 can vary row-to-rowand/or longitudinally along the length of the anvil 5200. For example,in certain instances, the depth of the pockets 5206 can vary along thelength of the anvil 5200 to accommodate for variations in gap distancebetween the anvil and the staple cartridge along the length of an endeffector and/or tissue flow, as described herein.

The pockets 5206 can be configured to form staples to the same, orsubstantially the same, formed shape. As described herein, the pockets5206 can be configured to form each staple to the same asymmetricalshape. In other instances, the pockets 5206 can be configured to formstaples to different formed shapes, such as to different heights and/orconfigurations.

An exemplary intermediate pocket 5206 b is shown in FIGS. 122-125C. Thepocket 5206 b has a first end, or proximal end, 5210 and a second end,or distal end, 5212. A pocket axis PA (FIG. 121) extends between theproximal end 5210 and the distal end 5212 of the pocket 5206 b. Thepocket 5206 b includes a perimeter 5216, which defines the boundary ofthe pocket 5206 b. The perimeter 5216 includes linear portions andcontoured portions.

The pocket 5206 b includes a proximal cup 5220, a distal cup 5222, and aneck 5224 extending between the proximal cup 5220 and the distal cup5222. When a staple is driven into forming contact with thestaple-forming surface 5202, the proximal cup 5220 is aligned with aproximal staple leg, and the distal cup 5222 is aligned with a distalstaple leg. The cups 5220 and 5222 are configured to direct or funnelthe staple legs toward the pocket axis PA and the central portion of thepocket 5206, such as the neck portion 5224, and to deform the staplelegs into the formed configuration. In other instances, the cup 5222 canbe proximal to the cup 5220.

Referring primarily to FIG. 119, each cup 5220 and 5222 of the pocket5206 b defines an entrance ramp 5240 a and 5240 b, respectively, and anexit ramp 5242 a and 5242 b, respectively. When forming a staple, thetip of a staple leg can enter the respective pocket 5220, 5222 along theentrance ramp 5240 a, 5240 b and exit the respective pocket 5220, 5222along the exit ramp 5242 a, 5242 b. At an apex 5246 a, 5246 b,respectively, between the entrance ramp 5240 a, 5240 b and the exit ramp5242 a, 5242 b, the tips of the staple legs are deformed toward thestaple base to assume the formed configuration, such as a B-form ormodified B-form, for example. The pocket 5206 b also defines a bridge5244 between the proximal cup 5220 and the distal cup 5222. The bridge5244 is offset from the non-forming portion 5208. More specifically, thebridge 5244 is positioned below or recessed relative to the non-formingportion 5208.

Referring again to FIG. 122, the pocket 5206 b is symmetric about thepocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 5216 of the pocket 5206 b issymmetric about the pocket axis PA. Moreover, the pocket 5206 b isasymmetric about a central axis CA through the neck portion 5224 andperpendicular to the pocket axis PA. For example, the perimeter 5216 ofthe pocket 5206 b is asymmetric about the central axis CA, and theproximal cup 5220 has a different geometry than the distal cup 5222. Theasymmetry of the cups 5220 and 5222 is configured to form asymmetricstaples. For example, referring again to FIG. 123, the distal depth D₂is less than the proximal depth D₁, which is configured to form a staplehaving a greater formed height at the proximal leg than at the distalleg. The distal depth D₂ can be about 0.002 inches less than theproximal depth D₁. In other instances, the difference between the distaldepth D₂ and the proximal depth D₁ can be greater than and/or less than0.002 inches. In certain instances, the difference can be between onepercent and ten percent of the staple diameter. For example, thedifference can be about two percent of the staple diameter. In otherinstances, the formed height of the staple can be greater at the distalleg than the proximal leg. The length of each cup 5220, 5222 is alsodifferent. For example, the distal length D₂ is greater than theproximal length D₁ in FIG. 123. Additionally, the incline of theentrance ramps 5240 a and 5240 b in the pocket 5206 b are different, andthe incline of the exit ramps 5242 a and 5242 b in the pocket 5206 b arealso different.

In various instances, the reduced depth in a portion of the pocket 5206b can improve the stiffness of the anvil. For example, because thedistal depth D₂ is less than the proximal depth D₁, the anvil 5200 iscomprised of more material, which can increase the stiffness thereof.Moreover, because the increased material is in a distal portion of theanvil 5200, such portion can have an increased stiffness, which canlimit bowing or deformation of the anvil toward the distal end.

The difference in geometry of the proximal and distal cups 5220 and5222, respectively, can accommodate for tissue movement or flow. Morespecifically, when tissue is clamped against the anvil 5200, fluid inthe clamped tissue can flow or move toward adjacent, unclamped tissue.The tissue can flow laterally toward the longitudinal sides of the anvil5200, distally toward the distal end of the anvil 5200, and/orproximally toward the proximal end of the anvil 5200. In certaininstances, tissue can flow relative to the anvil 5200 when the cuttingedge is advanced distally through the tissue. In such instances, tissuemay flow laterally, distally, and/or proximally, but it primarily flowsdistally due to the distal movement of the cutting edge. In instanceswhere the cutting edge moves proximally to incise tissue, the movementor flow of the tissue would be generally proximal during the cuttingstroke. The different geometries of the proximal and distal cups 5220and 5222, respectively, can accommodate for the flow of the tissue,which can shift or skew the staple legs embedded therein.

Referring primarily to FIGS. 124A-124C, the pocket 5206 b includessidewalls 5250, which extend from the non-forming portion 5208. The cups5220, 5222 are configured to funnel and/or guide the staple legs andtips thereof toward and/or along the pocket axis PA and into a formedconfiguration. Owing to the different geometries of the proximal anddistal cups 5220 and 5222, the path of the proximal staple leg can bedifferent than the path of the distal staple leg when driven intoforming contact with the pocket 5206 b. In certain instances, theasymmetrical staple pockets 5206 b can form asymmetrical staples fromsymmetrical unformed staples. Additionally or alternatively,asymmetrical unformed staples can be formed into asymmetrical formedstaples by the staple pockets 5206 b.

FIG. 124A is taken along the plane ALL₁ in FIG. 122, which correspondsto the anticipated landing location of a proximal staple leg. Forexample, the tip of a proximal staple leg can be expected to land in theproximal cup 5220 at and/or near the intersection of the plane ALL₁ andthe pocket axis PA. At the plane ALL₁, the proximal cup 5220 defines awidth W1 _(A) and a depth D1 _(A). The cross-section in FIG. 124B istaken across a transition between the proximal cup 5220 and the neck5224. FIG. 124B depicts the proximal cup 5220 defining a width W1 _(B)and a depth D1 _(B). The width W1 _(B) is greater than the width W1_(A), and the depth D1 _(B) is greater than the depth D1 _(A). In otherwords, the proximal cup 5220 widens and deepens from the plane ALL₁ inthe proximal cup 5220 toward the neck 5224. The cross-section in FIG.124C is taken across a proximal end of the neck portion 5224. FIG. 124Cdepicts the pocket 5206 b defining a width W1 _(C) and a depth D1 _(C).The width W1 _(C) is less than the width W1 _(B), and the depth D1 _(C)is less than the depth D1 _(B). In other words, the pocket 5206 bcontinues to narrow, and becomes shallower in the neck 5224 across thebridge 5244.

FIG. 125A is taken along the plane ALL₂ in FIG. 122, which correspondsto the anticipated landing location of a distal staple leg. For example,the tip of a distal staple leg can be expected to land in the distal cup5222 at and/or near the intersection of the plane ALL₂ and the pocketaxis PA. At the plane ALL₂, the distal cup 5222 defines a width W2 _(A)and a depth D2 _(A). The width W2 _(A) is different than the width W1_(A), and the depth D2 _(A) is different than the depth D1 _(A). Thecross-section in FIG. 125B is taken across a transition between thedistal cup 5222 and the neck 5224. FIG. 125B depicts the distal cup 5222defining a width W2 _(B) and a depth D2 _(B). The width W2 _(B) isdifferent than the width W1 _(B), and the depth D2 _(B) is differentthan the depth D1 _(B). The width W2 _(B) is less than the width W2_(A), and the depth D2 _(B) is greater than the depth D2 _(A). In otherwords, the distal cup 5222 narrows and deepens from the plane ALL₂ inthe distal cup 5222 toward the neck 5224. The cross-section in FIG. 125Cis taken across a distal end of the neck portion 5224. FIG. 125C depictsthe pocket 5206 b defining a width W2 _(C) and a depth D2 _(C). Thewidth W2 _(C) is different than the width W1 _(C), and the depth D2 _(C)is different than the depth D1 _(C). The width W2 _(C) is less than thewidth W2 _(B), and the depth D2 _(C) is less than the depth D2 _(B). Inother words, the pocket 5206 b continues to narrow, and becomesshallower in the neck 5224 across the bridge 5244.

The bottom surface 5258 of the pocket 5206 b is a flat surface. In otherinstances, the bottom surface 5258 can have a groove defined along atleast a portion thereof. In still other instances, the bottom surface5258 can form a trough and/or can include a hump or ridge along at leasta portion thereof, such as across the bridge 5244, for example.

Referring primarily now to FIG. 122, the pocket 5206 b includes aproximal extended landing zone 5230 and a distal extended landing zone5232. The proximal extended landing zone 5230 is positioned in aproximal portion of the proximal cup 5220, and the distal extendedlanding zone 5232 is positioned in a distal portion of the distal cup5222. More specifically, the extended landing zones 5230 and 5232 arepositioned beyond the anticipated landing location of a staple. Forexample, the proximal extended landing zone 5230 is positioned proximalto the plane ALL₁ and, in instances where the tip of a staple leg landsbeyond the plane ALL₁, the proximal extended landing zones 5230 cancatch the staple leg and direct it toward the pocket axis PA and/ortoward the neck portion 5224. The distal extended landing zone 5232 ispositioned distal to the plane ALL₂ and, in instances where the tip of astaple leg lands beyond the plane ALL₂, the distal extended landingzones 5232 can catch the staple leg and direct it toward the pocket axisPA and/or toward the neck portion 5224. In certain instances, thegeometry of the extended landing zones 5230, 5232 can be constrained orlimited by the geometry of the adjacent, nested staple-forming pockets5206.

Referring again to FIG. 122, the neck portion 5224 is narrower than theproximal and distal cups 5220 and 5222. The narrowed perimeter 5216 ofthe pocket 5206 b at the neck portion 5224 defines a receiving peninsula5226 between a portion of the proximal cup 5220 and a portion of thedistal cup 5222. Receiving peninsulas 5226 are positioned on each sideof the pocket 5206 b. The receiving peninsulas 5226 are bounded by theperimeter 5216 of the pocket 5206 b and a tangent axis (e.g., T_(B1) andT_(B2)), which is tangential to the widest portions of the proximal anddistal cups 5220 and 5222 on each side of the pocket 5206. A firsttangent axis T_(B1) is positioned on a first side of the pocket 5206 band a second tangent axis T_(B2) is positioned on the opposite side ofthe pocket 5206 b. The first and second tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2)depicted in FIG. 122 are skewed relative to the pocket axis PA. In otherinstances, one or both of the tangent axes T_(B1) and T_(B2) can beparallel to the pocket axis PA.

In various instances, the geometry of the pockets 5206 can facilitatethe nesting and/or the close arrangement of the pockets 5206 in thestaple-forming surface 5202. For example, the surface area of thestaple-forming surface 5202 that is covered by the pockets 5206 can beoptimized. The “forming ratio” of the staple-forming surface 5202 is theratio of the non-forming portion 5208 to the forming portion, i.e., thepockets 5206. In at least one instance, the forming ratio can be atleast 1:1, for example.

As described herein, the arrangement of staple cavities and staples in astaple cartridge for an end effector can correspond to or match thearrangement of staple-forming pockets in an anvil of the end effector.More specifically, the angular orientation and spacing of each staplecavity can match the angular orientation and spacing of a respectivestaple-forming pocket. For example, when the staple cavities arearranged in a herringbone pattern, the staple-forming pockets can bearranged in a corresponding herringbone pattern.

In certain instances, an end effector can include a staple cartridgehaving an arrangement of staple cavities and an anvil having anon-corresponding arrangement of staple-forming pockets. For example,the staple cavities can be obliquely oriented relative to a longitudinalaxis and the staple-forming pockets can be oriented parallel to thelongitudinal axis. In certain instances, an end effector can beconfigured to receive different staple cartridges having differentarrangements of staple cavities, for example, and the anvil of the endeffector may not be compatible with all of the different staplecartridges and permutations of staple cavities therein. In suchinstances, the anvil can be retrofit or adapted with an attachment, suchas an anvil plate, having a suitable arrangement of staple-formingpockets.

A surgical end effector 5500 is depicted in FIGS. 126-128. Similar tothe end effector 1100 (FIGS. 1-4), the end effector 5500 includes theelongate channel 1102, which is configured to operably support a staplecartridge 5510 therein. The staple cartridge 5510 is similar in manyaspects to the staple cartridge 1110. For example, the staple cartridgeincludes a staple cartridge body 5511 having a deck 5515. A longitudinalslot 5514 extends through the deck 5515 from a proximal end portion 5512of the body 5511 toward a distal end portion 5513 of the body 5511.Angularly-oriented staple cavities 5516 are defined in the cartridgebody 5511 and each staple cavity 5516 defines an opening in the deck5515. The opening of each staple cavity 5516 is oriented at an obliqueangle relative to the longitudinal slot 5514. The staple cavities 5516are arranged in a herringbone pattern. Staples are removably positionedin the staple cavities.

The end effector 5500 also includes an anvil 5530 that is pivotallysupported relative to the elongate channel 1102. The anvil 5530 issimilar in many aspects to the anvil 1130. For example, the anvil 5530includes a staple-forming surface 5502 and a longitudinal slot 5504. Incertain instances, a firing element and/or a cutting element, such asthe sled assembly 1120 and/or the firing member 1760 (FIG. 4), forexample, can translate through the longitudinal slot 5504 during atleast a portion of a firing stroke. Tissue stops 5531 extend downwardtoward the staple cartridge 5510 to control the positioning of tissuebetween the proximal end portion 5512 of the cartridge body 5511 and theanvil 5530. Staple-forming pockets 5506 are defined in thestaple-forming surface 5502, which also includes a non-forming portion5508 that extends around the pockets 5506. The staple-forming pockets5506 are oriented parallel to the longitudinal slot 5504. In otherwords, the arrangement of staple-forming pockets 5506 does not match orcorrespond to the arrangement of staple cavities 5516. If staples werefired from the staple cartridge 5510 into forming contact with the anvil5530, the majority of such staples would likely be unformed and/ormalformed.

The end effector 5500 includes an adaptor assembly 5540, which isconfigured to adapt the anvil 5530 to a suitable arrangement ofstaple-forming pockets. The staple cartridge 5510 is part of the adaptorassembly 5540. The adaptor assembly 5540 also includes an anvil plate5550 and connecting material 5570. A proximal portion of the anvil plate5550 forms a spring 5551 at which the anvil plate 5550 is attached tothe staple cartridge 5510. As such, the anvil plate 5550 is configuredto pivot downward toward the staple cartridge 5510 at the proximalspring 5551 when a closing motion is applied to the anvil plate 5550,such as by the anvil 5530, for example. The spring 5551 can bias theanvil plate 5550 toward the configuration shown in FIG. 126, which canfacilitate the releasable attachment of the adaptor assembly 5540 to theanvil 5530.

The arrangement of staple-forming pockets in the anvil plate 5550corresponds to the arrangement of staple cavities 5516 in the staplecartridge. The anvil plate 5550 includes a staple-forming surface 5502and a longitudinal slot 5554, which is aligned with the longitudinalslot 5504 in the anvil 5530 and the longitudinal slot 5514 in the staplecartridge 5510 when the adaptor assembly 5540 is installed in the endeffector 5500. Staple-forming pockets 5556 are defined in thestaple-forming surface 5502 and a non-forming portion 5558 (FIG. 126)extends around the staple-forming pockets 5556. In the illustratedembodiment, the staple-forming pockets 5556 are oriented at obliqueangles relative to the longitudinal slot 5554. More specifically, thestaple-forming pockets 5556 are arranged in a herringbone pattern, whichcorresponds to the herringbone pattern of the staple cavities 5516. Theanvil plate 5550 can be a sheet of metal in which the arrangement ofstaple-forming pockets has been stamped.

The arrangement of staple-forming pockets 5556 in the anvil plate 5550corresponds to the arrangement of staple cavities 5516 in the staplecartridge. In other words, each staple-forming pocket 5556 in the anvilplate 5550 corresponds to the angle and position of a staple cavity5516. The reader will appreciate that a staple cartridge can include avariety of different arrangements of staple cavities, and variousexemplary arrangements of staple cavities are described herein. Forexample, a staple cartridge can include a longitudinally-repetitivepattern of obliquely-oriented staple cavities and/or one or moreparallel and/or angularly-offset staple cavities. Additionally oralternatively, a staple cartridge can include multiple distinct patternsof staple cavities. In still other instances, the arrangement of staplecavities can vary laterally and/or longitudinally along the cartridgebody. Whatever the arrangement of staple cavities in a staple cartridge,a corresponding arrangement of staple-forming pockets can be provided bythe complementary anvil plate 5550 of the adaptor assembly 5540.

The anvil plate 5500 is connectable to the staple cartridge 5510, andthe connecting material 5570 is attached to the anvil plate 5500. Inuse, when the staple cartridge 5510 is inserted into the elongatechannel 1102, the anvil plate 5500 and the connecting material 5570 ofthe adaptor assembly 5540 are also disposed between the elongate channel1102 and the anvil 5530. In certain instances, the anvil 5530 can bepivoted downward toward the elongate channel 1102 to secure or otherwiseattach the anvil plate 5550 to the staple-forming surface 5502 of theanvil 5530 with the connecting material 5570. Additionally oralternatively, the spring member 5551 can bias the anvil plate 5550 andthe connecting material 5570 thereon into and/or toward attachment withthe anvil 5530. When the adaptor assembly 5540 is installed in the endeffector 5500, the anvil 5530 has effectively been retrofit or adaptedfor use with the staple cartridge 5510.

The staple cartridge 5510 and the anvil plate 5550 may include alignmentfeatures for aligning the staple cavities 5516 in the staple cartridge5510 with the corresponding staple-forming pockets 5556 in the anvilplate 5500. For example, the staple cartridge 5510 includes alignmentapertures 5520 (FIG. 126), and the anvil plate 5550 includes alignmentposts or pins 5562. The alignment pins 5562 are received by thealignment apertures 5520 to position the anvil plate 5550 relative tothe staple cartridge 5510. For example, the alignment pins 5562 can bepress fit into the alignment apertures 5520. The connection between thealignment apertures 5520 and the alignment pins 5562 is configured tolongitudinally align the staple cartridge 5510 and the anvil plate 5550,for example.

In certain instances, the manufacturer and/or distributor can providethe assembly 5540 pre-assembled. For example, the anvil plate 5550 canbe press fit into engagement with the staple cartridge 5510 before asurgeon or assistant thereto obtains the assembly 5540 for a surgicalprocedure. In other instances, the surgeon and/or assistant thereto canassemble the assembly 5540.

The anvil plate 5550 also includes alignment features for aligning theanvil plate 5550 with the anvil 5530. For example, the anvil plate 5550includes distal alignment flanges 5564. The distal alignment flanges5564 are received by the longitudinal slot 5504 in the anvil 5530 toposition the anvil plate 5550 relative to the anvil 5530. For example,the distal alignment flanges 5564 can be press fit into the longitudinalslot 5504. The connection between the alignment flanges 5564 and thelongitudinal slot 5504 is configured to laterally align the anvil plate5550 and the anvil 5530, for example.

The connecting material 5570 is a flexible material. For example, theconnecting material 5570 can comprise an elastomer and/or low densitypolyethylene. In various instances, the connecting material 5570 can bean overmold on the anvil plate 5550. When adhered or otherwise securedto the anvil 5530, the connecting material 5570 is configured to assumea deformed configuration that matches the profile of the staple-formingsurface 5502. For example, the unformed configuration of the connectingmaterial 5570 is depicted in FIG. 126 and the formed configuration ofthe connecting material 5570 is depicted in FIG. 127. Referringprimarily to FIG. 127, the connecting material 5570 flows into and fillsthe staple-forming pockets 5506. In other words, the staple-formingpockets 5506 imprint in the connecting material 5570. In such instances,the connecting material 5570 can fortify the anvil plate 5550 during aforming process. For example, the connecting material 5570 between theanvil plate 5550 and the anvil 5530 can provide a backing for the anvilplate 5550 to prevent and/or limit deformation of the anvil plate 5550relative to the anvil 5530 when the anvil plate 5550 is impacted andsubjected to other forces during use.

The connecting material 5570 includes a channel 5572. The channel 5572extends along a portion of the length thereof. Although not shown inFIG. 126, a similar channel 5572 can be defined in the connectingmaterial 5570 along the opposite side of the adaptor assembly 5540. Alip 5566 of the anvil plate 5550 is positioned in the channel 5572. Thelip 5566 is substantially U-shaped. In other instances, the lip 5566 canbe L-shaped, linear, and/or contoured, for example. The anvil plate 5500also includes an inner ridge 5568, which is aligned with a longitudinalslot 5574 (FIG. 126) in the connecting material 5570 and thelongitudinal slot 5504 in the anvil 5530. The ridge 5568 is configuredto facilitate the alignment of the adaptor assembly 5540 along thelength of the end effector 5500. In various instances, the connectingmaterial 5570 can be molded over the anvil plate 5550. For example, theconnecting material 5570 can be molded around the lip 5566 and/or theridge 5568.

A portion of the end effector 5500 is also depicted in FIG. 128. Anadaptor assembly 5640 is installed in the end effector 5500 in FIG. 128.The adaptor assembly 5640 is similar in many aspects to the adaptorassembly 5540. For example, the adaptor assembly 5640 includes an anvilplate 5650 having a staple-forming surface 5652 and a longitudinal slot5654, which is aligned with the longitudinal slot 5504 in the anvil5530. Staple-forming pockets 5656 are defined in the staple-formingsurface 5652 and a non-forming portion 5658 extends around thestaple-forming pockets 5656. The staple-forming pockets 5656 areoriented at oblique angles relative to the longitudinal slot 5654. Morespecifically, the staple-forming pockets 5656 are arranged in aherringbone pattern, which corresponds to the herringbone pattern of thestaple cavities 5516 (FIG. 126). The anvil plate 5650 can be a sheet ofmetal in which the arrangement of staple-forming pockets has beenstamped.

The adaptor assembly 5640 does not include a deformable material, suchas the deformable material 5570. Rather, the anvil plate 5650 isconfigured to directly engage the anvil 5530. The anvil plate 5650includes a lip 5666, which is positioned against the staple-formingsurface 5502. The lip 5666 is substantially U-shaped. In otherinstances, the lip 5666 can be L-shaped, linear, and/or contoured, forexample. The anvil plate 5600 also includes an inner ridge 5668, whichis aligned with the longitudinal slot 5504 in the anvil 5530. The ridge5668 is configured to facilitate the alignment of the adaptor assembly5640 along the length of the end effector 5600.

In other instances, the anvil plate 5650 can be embedded in thestaple-forming surface 5502 of the anvil 5530. For example,staple-forming pockets 5656 of the anvil plate 5650 can at leastpartially nest within the staple-forming pockets 5506 in the anvil 5530.Although the arrangement, quantity, and/or geometry of thestaple-forming pockets 5656 are different than the arrangement,quantity, and/or geometry of the staple-forming pockets 5506, portionsof the staple-forming pockets 5656 can be positioned within portions ofthe staple-forming pockets 5506.

Many of the surgical instrument systems described herein are motivatedby an electric motor; however, the surgical instrument systems describedherein can be motivated in any suitable manner. In various instances,the surgical instrument systems described herein can be motivated by amanually-operated trigger, for example. In certain instances, the motorsdisclosed herein may comprise a portion or portions of a roboticallycontrolled system. Moreover, any of the end effectors and/or toolassemblies disclosed herein can be utilized with a robotic surgicalinstrument system. U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitledSURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENTARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2012/0298719,for example, discloses several examples of a robotic surgical instrumentsystem in greater detail.

The surgical instrument systems described herein have been described inconnection with the deployment and deformation of staples; however, theembodiments described herein are not so limited. Various embodiments areenvisioned which deploy fasteners other than staples, such as clamps ortacks, for example. Moreover, various embodiments are envisioned whichutilize any suitable means for sealing tissue. For instance, an endeffector in accordance with various embodiments can comprise electrodesconfigured to heat and seal the tissue. Also, for instance, an endeffector in accordance with certain embodiments can apply vibrationalenergy to seal the tissue.

The entire disclosures of:

-   -   U.S. Pat. No. 5,403,312, entitled ELECTROSURGICAL HEMOSTATIC        DEVICE, which issued on Apr. 4, 1995;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 7,000,818, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT        HAVING SEPARATE DISTINCT CLOSING AND FIRING SYSTEMS, which        issued on Feb. 21, 2006;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 7,422,139, entitled MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING        AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT WITH TACTILE POSITION FEEDBACK, which        issued on Sep. 9, 2008;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 7,464,849, entitled ELECTRO-MECHANICAL SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT WITH CLOSURE SYSTEM AND ANVIL ALIGNMENT COMPONENTS,        which issued on Dec. 16, 2008;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 7,670,334, entitled SURGICAL INSTRUMENT HAVING AN        ARTICULATING END EFFECTOR, which issued on Mar. 2, 2010;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 7,753,245, entitled SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENTS,        which issued on Jul. 13, 2010;    -   U.S. Pat. No. 8,393,514, entitled SELECTIVELY ORIENTABLE        IMPLANTABLE FASTENER CARTRIDGE, which issued on Mar. 12, 2013;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/343,803, entitled SURGICAL        INSTRUMENT HAVING RECORDING CAPABILITIES; now U.S. Pat. No.        7,845,537;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,573, entitled SURGICAL        CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT HAVING RF ELECTRODES, filed        Feb. 14, 2008;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/031,873, entitled END        EFFECTORS FOR A SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING INSTRUMENT, filed        Feb. 15, 2008, now U.S. Pat. No. 7,980,443;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/235,782, entitled        MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT, now U.S. Pat. No.        8,210,411;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/249,117, entitled POWERED        SURGICAL CUTTING AND STAPLING APPARATUS WITH MANUALLY        RETRACTABLE FIRING SYSTEM, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,608,045;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/647,100, entitled        MOTOR-DRIVEN SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT WITH ELECTRIC ACTUATOR        DIRECTIONAL CONTROL ASSEMBLY, filed Dec. 24, 2009; now U.S. Pat.        No. 8,220,688;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 12/893,461, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGE, filed Sep. 29, 2012, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,733,613;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/036,647, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENT, filed Feb. 28, 2011, now U.S. Pat. No.        8,561,870;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/118,241, entitled SURGICAL        STAPLING INSTRUMENTS WITH ROTATABLE STAPLE DEPLOYMENT        ARRANGEMENTS, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,072,535;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/524,049, entitled        ARTICULATABLE SURGICAL INSTRUMENT COMPRISING A FIRING DRIVE,        filed on Jun. 15, 2012; now U.S. Pat. No. 9,101,358;    -   U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,025, entitled STAPLE        CARTRIDGE TISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed on Mar. 13,        2013, now U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2014/0263551;

U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/800,067, entitled STAPLE CARTRIDGETISSUE THICKNESS SENSOR SYSTEM, filed on Mar. 13, 2013, now U.S. PatentApplication Publication No. 2014/0263552;

-   -   U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2007/0175955, entitled        SURGICAL CUTTING AND FASTENING INSTRUMENT WITH CLOSURE TRIGGER        LOCKING MECHANISM, filed Jan. 31, 2006; and    -   U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 2010/0264194, entitled        SURGICAL STAPLING INSTRUMENT WITH AN ARTICULATABLE END EFFECTOR,        filed Apr. 22, 2010, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,308,040, are hereby        incorporated by reference herein.

Although various devices have been described herein in connection withcertain embodiments, modifications and variations to those embodimentsmay be implemented. Particular features, structures, or characteristicsmay be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. Thus,the particular features, structures or characteristics illustrated ordescribed in connection with one embodiment may be combined in whole orin part, with the features, structures, or characteristics of one ormore other embodiments without limitation. Also, where materials aredisclosed for certain components, other materials may be used.Furthermore, according to various embodiments, a single component may bereplaced by multiple components, and multiple components may be replacedby a single component, to perform a given function or functions. Theforegoing description and following claims are intended to cover allsuch modification and variations.

The devices disclosed herein can be designed to be disposed of after asingle use, or they can be designed to be used multiple times. In eithercase, however, a device can be reconditioned for reuse after at leastone use. Reconditioning can include any combination of the stepsincluding, but not limited to, the disassembly of the device, followedby cleaning or replacement of particular pieces of the device, andsubsequent reassembly of the device. In particular, a reconditioningfacility and/or surgical team can disassemble a device and, aftercleaning and/or replacing particular parts of the device, the device canbe reassembled for subsequent use. Those skilled in the art willappreciate that reconditioning of a device can utilize a variety oftechniques for disassembly, cleaning/replacement, and reassembly. Use ofsuch techniques, and the resulting reconditioned device, are all withinthe scope of the present application.

The devices disclosed herein may be processed before surgery. First, anew or used instrument may be obtained and, when necessary, cleaned. Theinstrument may then be sterilized. In one sterilization technique, theinstrument is placed in a closed and sealed container, such as a plasticor TYVEK bag. The container and instrument may then be placed in a fieldof radiation that can penetrate the container, such as gamma radiation,x-rays, and/or high-energy electrons. The radiation may kill bacteria onthe instrument and in the container. The sterilized instrument may thenbe stored in the sterile container. The sealed container may keep theinstrument sterile until it is opened in a medical facility. A devicemay also be sterilized using any other technique known in the art,including but not limited to beta radiation, gamma radiation, ethyleneoxide, plasma peroxide, and/or steam.

While this invention has been described as having exemplary designs, thepresent invention may be further modified within the spirit and scope ofthe disclosure. This application is therefore intended to cover anyvariations, uses, or adaptations of the invention using its generalprinciples.

Any patent, publication, or other disclosure material, in whole or inpart, that is said to be incorporated by reference herein isincorporated herein only to the extent that the incorporated materialsdo not conflict with existing definitions, statements, or otherdisclosure material set forth in this disclosure. As such, and to theextent necessary, the disclosure as explicitly set forth hereinsupersedes any conflicting material incorporated herein by reference.Any material, or portion thereof, that is said to be incorporated byreference herein, but which conflicts with existing definitions,statements, or other disclosure material set forth herein will only beincorporated to the extent that no conflict arises between thatincorporated material and the existing disclosure material.

1. A method, comprising: obtaining a staple cartridge comprising aplurality of staples, wherein each staple comprises a base and a legextending from the base; and firing the staples from the staplecartridge, wherein the staples are fired into tissue in a staple line,and wherein the staple line comprises: a first portion comprising afirst flexibility; and a second portion longitudinally offset from thefirst portion, wherein the second portion comprises a secondflexibility, and wherein the second flexibility is different than thefirst flexibility. 2-20. (canceled)
 21. A method, comprising: obtaininga staple cartridge comprising cartridge body comprising a plurality ofsurgical staples stored therein, wherein the cartridge body furthercomprises an active tissue stop arrangement movably coupled thereto; andinstalling the staple cartridge in an end effector, wherein the endeffector comprises an anvil comprising a fixed tissue stop arrangementsuch that when the staple cartridge is installed in the end effector,the active tissue stop arrangement and the fixed tissue stop arrangementprevents tissue from extending proximally beyond a proximal-mostsurgical staple stored in the cartridge body.
 22. The method of claim21, wherein the active tissue stop arrangement comprises a pair ofmovable tissue stops, wherein one movable tissue stop is movably coupledto one side of the cartridge body and another movable tissue stop ismovably coupled to another side of the cartridge body.
 23. The method ofclaim 21, wherein the anvil is movably supported relative to an elongatechannel and is movable relative thereto between an open and closedposition, and wherein said installing comprises removably seating thestaple cartridge in the elongate channel.
 24. The method of claim 23,wherein when the anvil is moved to the closed position, the movabletissue stops are each received between the cartridge body and acorresponding side wall of the elongate channel.
 25. The method of claim22, wherein each movable tissue stop is movable between an expandedorientation and a collapsed orientation.
 26. The method of claim 25,wherein each movable tissue stop comprises: a lower tissue stop portiondefining a lower cavity therein; an upper tissue stop portion movablysupported in each lower cavity, wherein each lower tissue stop portionand corresponding upper tissue stop portion are pivotally supported on acorresponding side of the staple cartridge for pivotal travel relativethereto about a common pivot axis; and a biaser for biasing each uppertissue stop out of the corresponding lower cavity when the anvil is in afully open position.
 27. The method of claim 25, further comprisingretaining the movable tissue stops in the collapsed orientation duringsaid installing of the staple cartridge in the end effector.
 28. Themethod of claim 27, further comprising permitting the movable tissuestops to expand to the expanded orientation after the staple cartridgehas been installed in the end effector and the anvil is moved to an openposition.
 29. The method of claim 28, wherein the staple cartridgefurther comprises a removable staple cover attached to the cartridgebody, wherein the removable staple cover retains the surgical staples inthe cartridge body and further retains the movable tissue stops in thecollapsed orientation, and wherein said permitting the movable tissuestops to expand to the expanded orientation comprises removing theremovable staple cover from the cartridge body.
 30. The method of claim28, wherein each of the movable tissue stops is biased into the expandedposition.
 31. The method of claim 28, wherein when the movable tissuestops are in a fully expanded position and the anvil is in a fully openposition, each of the movable tissue stops contact a correspondingportion of the anvil.
 32. The method of claim 30, wherein the staplecartridge further comprises means for preventing each of the movabletissue stops from expanding beyond a predetermined fully expandedorientation.
 33. The method of claim 21, wherein the staple cartridgecomprises a plurality of staple cavities arranged in a herringbonepattern.
 34. A method, comprising: obtaining a staple cartridgecomprising cartridge body that defines a cartridge deck surface, whereinthe cartridge body comprising a plurality of surgical staples storedtherein, wherein the cartridge body further comprises a pair ofupstanding cartridge tissue stops that extend upward from a proximal endof the cartridge deck surface; and installing the staple cartridge in anend effector, wherein the end effector comprises an anvil comprising apair of anvil tissue stops protruding downward from a proximal end ofthe anvil such that when the staple cartridge is installed in the endeffector, the upstanding cartridge tissue stops cooperate with the anviltissue stops to prevent tissue from extending proximally beyond aproximal-most surgical staple stored in the cartridge body.
 35. Themethod of claim 34, wherein the anvil comprises an anvil outer surface,and wherein when the anvil is in a fully closed position, the upstandingcartridge tissue stops do not extend beyond the anvil outer surface. 36.The method of claim 35, wherein the anvil further comprises a tissuestop cavity that corresponds to each of the upstanding cartridge tissuestops such that when the anvil is in the fully closed position, an upperend of each of the cartridge tissue stops is received in thecorresponding tissue stop cavity.
 37. The method of claim 34, whereinthe anvil further comprises a pair of distal tissue stops located distalto the anvil tissue stops and the cartridge tissue stops.
 38. The methodof claim 37, wherein when the anvil is in a fully closed position, thedistal tissue stops do not extend below the cartridge deck surface. 39.The method of claim 34, wherein the staple cartridge comprises aplurality of staple cavities arranged in a herringbone pattern.